FOR

N C C

Prepared for

Government of India
 Project Coordination Dr. Nalini Bhat
Ministry of Environment & Forests Advisor, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. T. Chandni
Director, Ministry of Environment and Forests

Core Project Coordination Team Mr. Mahesh Babu

IL&FS Environment CEO
Mr. N. Sateesh Babu
Vice President & Project Director
Mr. B.S.V. Pavan Gopal
Manager –Technical
Mr. Vijaya Krishna. D
Senior Environmental Engineer
Ms. Chaitanya Vangeti
Assistant Manager –Technical
Ms. Suman Benedicta Thomas
Technical Writer

Resource Person Mr. K.D. Choudhury

Former GM (Environment), MECON
Expert Core & Peer Committee
Chairman Dr. V. Rajagopalan, IAS
Additional Secretary
Ministry of Chemicals & Fertilizers
Core Members Dr. R. K. Garg
Former Chairman, EIA Committee, Ministry of Environment and
Forests
Mr. Paritosh C. Tyagi
Former Chairman, Central Pollution Control Board
Prof. S.P. Gautam
Chairman, Central Pollution Control Board
Dr. Tapan Chakraborti
Director, National Environmental Engineering Research Institute
Mr. K. P. Nyati
Former Head, Environmental Policy, Confederation of Indian Industry
Dr. G.K. Pandey
Former Advisor, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. Nalini Bhat
Advisor, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. G.V. Subramaniam
Advisor, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. B. Sengupta
Former Member Secretary, Central Pollution Control Board
Dr. R. C. Trivedi
Former Scientist, Central Pollution Control Board
Peer Member Prof. S.P. Mehrotra
Former Director, National Metallurgical Laboratory
Professor, Department of Materials and Metallurgical Engineering
Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur
Member Convener Mr. N. Sateesh Babu
Project Director
 Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION TO THE TECHNICAL EIA GUIDANCE MANUALS PROJECT 1-1

1.1 Purpose ................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Project Implementation ....................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Additional Information ........................................................................................................ 1-4
2. CONCEPTUAL FACETS OF EIA 2-1
2.1 Environment in EIA Context............................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Pollution Control Strategies ................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 Tools for Preventive Environmental Management.............................................................. 2-2
2.3.1 Tools for assessment and analysis ....................................................................... 2-3
2.3.2 Tools for action .................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3.3 Tools for communication................................................................................... 2-10
2.4 Objectives of EIA .............................................................................................................. 2-10
2.5 Types of EIA ..................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.6 Basic EIA Principles ......................................................................................................... 2-12
2.7 Project Cycle ..................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.8 Environmental Impacts ..................................................................................................... 2-13
2.8.1 Direct impacts .................................................................................................... 2-14
2.8.2 Indirect impacts ................................................................................................. 2-14
2.8.3 Cumulative impacts ........................................................................................... 2-15
2.8.4 Induced impacts ................................................................................................. 2-15
2.9 Significance of Impacts ..................................................................................................... 2-16
2.9.1 Criteria/methodology to determine the significance of the identified impacts .. 2-17
3. ABOUT INDUCTION/ELECTRIC ARC/CUPOLA FURNACES INCLUDING BEST
PRACTICES AND POLLUTION CONTROL TECHNOLOGIES 3-1
3.1 History and Development of Induction, Electric Arc, Submerged Arc and Cupola Furnace
Industry ............................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1 Induction furnace industry ................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 EAF industry........................................................................................................ 3-3
3.1.3 Cupola furnace ..................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2 Scientific Aspects of Industrial Processes ........................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 Electric steel making ........................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Non electric steel making .................................................................................. 3-13
3.2.3 Manufacturing process in the context of environmental pollution .................... 3-15
3.2.4 Specific consumption factors ............................................................................. 3-20
3.3 Qualitative and quantitative analysis of rejects ................................................................. 3-23
3.3.1 Induction furnace ............................................................................................... 3-23
3.3.2 EAF.................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.3.3 Cupola furnace ................................................................................................... 3-25
3.3.4 Exposure pathway.............................................................................................. 3-26

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

i
 Table of Contents

3.4 Technological Aspects ...................................................................................................... 3-28

3.4.1 Cleaner technologies.......................................................................................... 3-28
3.4.2 Pollution control technologies ........................................................................... 3-34
3.5 Summary of Applicable National Regulatory Requirements ............................................ 3-37
3.5.1 General description of major statutes ................................................................ 3-37
3.5.2 General standards for discharge of environmental pollutants ........................... 3-38
3.5.3 Industry-specific standards ................................................................................ 3-38
4. OPERATIONAL ASPECTS OF EIA 4-1
4.1 Coverage of Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces under the Purview of the Notification ......... 4-1
4.2 Screening ............................................................................................................................. 4-6
4.2.1 Applicable conditions for Category B projects.................................................... 4-6
4.2.2 Criteria for classification of Category B1 and B2 projects .................................. 4-6
4.2.3 Application for prior environmental clearance .................................................... 4-7
4.2.4 Siting guidelines .................................................................................................. 4-7
4.3 Scoping for EIA Studies ...................................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.1 Pre-feasibility report .......................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.2 Guidance for providing information in Form 1 ................................................. 4-11
4.3.3 Identification of appropriate valued environmental components ...................... 4-11
4.3.4 Methods for identification of impacts................................................................ 4-11
4.3.5 Testing the significance of impacts ................................................................... 4-17
4.3.6 Terms of reference for EIA studies ................................................................... 4-17
4.4 Environmental Impact Assessment ................................................................................... 4-22
4.4.1 EIA team ............................................................................................................ 4-23
4.4.2 Baseline quality of the environment .................................................................. 4-24
4.4.3 Impact prediction tools ...................................................................................... 4-27
4.4.4 Significance of the impacts ................................................................................ 4-27
4.5 Social Impact Assessment ................................................................................................. 4-28
4.6 Risk Assessment ................................................................................................................ 4-30
4.7 Mitigation Measures .......................................................................................................... 4-34
4.7.1 Important considerations for mitigation methods .............................................. 4-34
4.7.2 Hierarchy of elements of mitigation plan .......................................................... 4-35
4.7.3 Typical mitigation measures .............................................................................. 4-36
4.8 Environmental Management Plan ..................................................................................... 4-39
4.9 Reporting ........................................................................................................................... 4-40
4.10 Public Consultation ........................................................................................................... 4-41
4.11 Appraisal 4-44
4.12 Decision Making ............................................................................................................... 4-46
4.13 Post-clearance Monitoring Protocol .................................................................................. 4-47
5. STAKEHOLDERS’ ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES 5-1
5.1 SEIAA ................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2 EAC and SEAC ................................................................................................................... 5-6

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry ii August 2010

 Table of Contents

LIST OF TABLES
Table 3-1: Approximate Share of EAF & Induction Furnace (%) in total Crude Steel Production (in
thousand tonnes) ............................................................................................................... 3-1

Table 3-2: Production of EAF Steel .................................................................................................... 3-3

Table 3-3: Types of Charge Mix and their Usage in EAF Steelmaking ............................................. 3-4

Table 3-4: Typical Composition of Input Materials for Induction Furnace ...................................... 3-10

Table 3-5: Emission / Waste Generation .......................................................................................... 3-20

Table 3-6: Performance Procedure ................................................................................................... 3-22

Table 3-7: Air Emissions from Electric Arc Furnace ....................................................................... 3-24

Table 3-8: Amount of Dust Exhausted from EAF per Tonne of Steel .............................................. 3-25

Table 3-9: Cupola Furnace Emissions Criteria ................................................................................. 3-26

Table 3-10: Exposure Pathways........................................................................................................ 3-27

Table 3-11: Comparison of High and Low Frequency Melting Furnaces ........................................ 3-29

Table 3-12: Emission Monitoring Results ........................................................................................ 3-37

Table 3-13: Emission Standards - Foundries .................................................................................... 3-38

Table 3-14: Emission Standards – Cupola Furnace .......................................................................... 3-39

Table 3-15: OSHA standards for Permissible Noise Exposure ........................................................ 3-39

Table 4-1: Advantages and Disadvantages of Impact Identification Methods ................................. 4-12

Table 4-2: Matrix of Impacts ............................................................................................................ 4-14

Table 4-3: List of Important Physical Environment Components and Indicators of EBM .............. 4-25

Table 4-4: Choice of Models for Impact Predictions: Risk Assessment.......................................... 4-32

Table 4-5: Typical Mitigation Measures ........................................................................................... 4-37

Table 4-6: Structure of EIA Report................................................................................................... 4-40

Table 5-1: Roles and Responsibilities of Stakeholders Involved in Prior Environmental Clearance 5-1

Table 5-2: Organization-specific Functions ........................................................................................ 5-2

Table 5-3: SEIAA: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson/ Members/ Secretary ................................... 5-5

Table 5-4: EAC/SEAC: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson / Members / Secretary .......................... 5-8

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry iii August 2010

 Table of Contents

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 2-1: Inclusive Components of Sustainable Development ........................................................ 2-1

Figure 2-2: Types of Impacts ............................................................................................................ 2-14

Figure 2-3: Cumulative Impact ......................................................................................................... 2-15

Figure 3-1: Composition of Metal Production in India....................................................................... 3-2

Figure 3-2: Open Top Iron Core Induction Furnace ........................................................................... 3-6

Figure 3-3: Closed Channel Iron Core Induction Furnace .................................................................. 3-7

Figure 3-4: Magnetic Field and Electro-dynamic Forces acting in the Crucible of an Induction
Furnace and Electro-dynamic Circulation of Metal in the Crucible of an Induction Furnace
.......................................................................................................................................... 3-8

Figure 3-5: A Modern EAF............................................................................................................... 3-11

Figure 3-6: Typical Cupola Furnace ................................................................................................. 3-13

Figure 4-1: Categorization of Projects Under the Purview of Notification ........................................ 4-2

Figure 4-2: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities Falling Under Category A ......... 4-4

Figure 4-3: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities Falling Under Category B ......... 4-5

Figure 4-4: Approach for EIA Study ................................................................................................ 4-23

Figure 4-5: Risk Assessment – Conceptual Framework ................................................................... 4-32

Figure 4-6: Comprehensive Risk Assessment - At a Glance ............................................................ 4-33

Figure 4-7: Elements of Mitigation................................................................................................... 4-35

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

iv
 Table of Contents

LIST OF ANNEXURES
Annexure I

A Compilation of Legal Instruments

Annexure II

General Standards for Discharge of Environmental Pollutants as per CPCB

Annexure III

Form 1 (Application Form for Obtaining EIA Clearance)

Annexure IV

Critically Polluted Industrial Areas and Clusters / Potential Impact Zone

Annexure V

Pre-feasibility Report: Points for Possible Coverage

Annexure VI

Types of Monitoring and Network Design Considerations

Annexure VII

Guidance for Assessment of Baseline Components and Attributes

Annexure VIII

Sources of Secondary Data

Annexure IX

Impact Prediction Tools

Annexure X

Form through which the State Government/Administration of the Union Territories

Submit Nominations for SEIAA and SEAC for the Consideration and Notification by the
Central Government.

Annexure XI

Composition of EAC/SEAC

Annexure XII

Best Practices & Latest Technologies available and reference

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry v August 2010

 Table of Contents

ACRONYMS
AAQ Ambient Air Quality
B/C Benefits Cost Ratio
BAT Best Available Technology
BOD Biological Oxygen Demand
BOQ Bill of Quantities
BOT Build Operate Transfer
CCA Conventional Cost Accounting
CER Corporate Environmental Reports
CEAA Canadian Environmental Assessment Agency
CFE Consent for Establishment
CO Carbon Monoxide
CPCB Central Pollution Control Board
CREP Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection
CRZ Coastal Regulatory Zone
DMP Disaster Management Plan
DRI Direct Reduced Iron
EAC Expert Appraisal Committee
EAF Electric Arc Furnace
ECI Environmental Condition Indicators
EcE Economic-cum-Environmental
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment
EIS Environmental Information System
EMA Environmental Management Accounting
EMP Environmental Management Plan
EMS Environmental Management System
EPI Environmental Performance indicators
EPZ Export Processing Zones
ES Environmental Statements
ESP Electrostatic Precipitator
ETP Effluent Treatment Plant
FCA Full Cost Assessment
FUCHS Post Consumption Shaft Furnace
HAZOP Hazard and Operability Studies
HBI Hot Briquetted Iron
HTL High Tide Level

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry vi August 2010

 Table of Contents

IF Induction Furnace
IL&FS Infrastructure Leasing & Financial Services Limited
IVI Importance Value Index
ISO International Standard Organization
JPC Joint Plant Commission of Ministry of Steel
LCA Life Cycle Assessment
LDAR Leak Detection and Repair
LTL Low Tide Level
MCA Maximum Credible Accident
MoEF Ministry of Environment & Forests
MT Million (metric) tons
NAQM National Air Quality Monitoring
O&M Operation and Maintenance
OECD Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development
PAH Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons
PCB Polychlorinated Biphenyls
PM Particulate Matter
PPA Participatory Poverty Assessment
PRA Participatory Rural Appraisal
QA/QC Quality Assurance/Quality Control
QRA Quantitative Risk Assessment
SEA Strategic Environmental Assessment
SEAC State Level Expert Appraisal Committee
SEIAA State Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority
SEZ Special Economic Zone
SIA Social Impact Assessment
SPCB State Pollution Control Board
SPM Suspended Particulate Matter
TA Technology Assessment
TCA Total Cost Assessment
TEQM Total Environmental Quality Movement
TGM Technical EIA Guidance Manual
ToR Terms of Reference
UT Union Territory
UTEIAA Union Territory Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority
UTPCC Union Territory Pollution Control Committee
VOC Volatile Organic Compound

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry vii August 2010

 u|gl-{f4 ?aeT ?T-drd+ (atie vari)
JAIRAM RAMESH qqia-{urEii E-d
rltto tltcDt?
<g ftd-t r oooa
8-dis rd MINISTEROF STATE(INDEPENDENT CHARGE)
ENVIRONMENT & FORESTS
GOVERNMENTOF INDIA
N E W D E L H I. 1 1 0 O O 3

22"d December 20L0

FOREWORD

The Ministry of Environment & Forests (MOEF) introduced the Environmental Impact
Assessrnent(EIA) Notificati on 2006 on 14thseptembet 2006,which not only reengineered the
'1994,
entire environment clearance(EC) processspecified under the EIA Notification bft also
introduced a number of new developmental sectorswhich would require prior environmental
clearance.The EIA Notification 2006has notified a list of 39 developmental sectorswhich have
been further categorisedas A or B based on their capacity and likely environmental imPacts.
Category B projects have been further categorisedas 81 and 82. The EIA Notification 2006has
further introduced a system of screening, scoping and appraisal and for the setting up of
Environment Impact Assessment Authority (EIAA) at the Central level and state Level
Environment Impact AssessmentAuthorities (SEIAAs)to grant environmental clearancesat the
Central and Statelevel respectively.The Ministry of Environment & Forestsis the Environment
Impact AssessmentAuthority at the Central level and 25 State Level Environment Impact
AssessmentAuthorities (SEIAAS) have been set uP in the various States/UTs. The EIA
Notification 2006 also stipulates the constitution of a multi-disciplinary Expert Appraisal
Committee (EAC) at the Centre and State level Expert Appraisal Committees (SEACs) at
State/UT Level for appraisal of Category A or B projects respectively and to recomrnend
grant/rejection of environmental clearanceto each project/ activities falling under the varrous
sectorsto the EIAA/SEIAAs respectively.

Although the process of obtaining environmental clearance consisting of Screening,

Scoping and Appraisal and for undertaking public consultation including the process of
conduct of Public Hearing has been elaboratedunder the EIA Notification 2006,$e Notification
itself provides for bringing out guidelines from tirne to time on the EIA Notification 2006and
the EC processwith a view to bringing clarity on the EC processfor expediting environmental
clearance.This need was further reinforced after the consbitution of SEIAAs and SEACs in
various States,who were assignedthe task for the first time and for addressingthe concernsof
standardization of the quality of appraisal and in reducing inconsistencies between
SEACs/SEIAAsin granting ECs {or similar proiectsin diJferentStates.

The Technical Guidance Manual of "Induction, Electric Arc And Cupola Furnaces"
sectordescribestypes of processand pollution control technologies,operational aspectsof EIA
with model TOR of that Sector, technological options with cleaner production and waste
minirnization techniques, monitoring of environmental quality, post clearance monitodng
protocol, related regulations, and procedure of obtaining EC if linked to other clearancesfor
e.g.,CRZ,etc.

Steel melting in EAF or induction furnace uses large quantities of raw materials/ energy
and water. Theseneed to be managed well in order to maxirnize productivity and profits. As
such, imploving energy and ,"roorle efficiency should be approachedfrom severaldirections.
A strong corpirate-wlde energy and resource management Program is essential .India's
industrial competitiveness and environmental future depends on hrdustries such as Induction,
Electric Arc ind Cupola Furnaces adoPting energy and resource efficient technologies'
Recyclingand reuseof materials is critical.

To keep pace with changing technologiesand needs of sustainable development, the

manual would r^equire regular updating in the future. The manual will be available on the
MoEF website *d *" would appreciate receiving lesponses from stakeholders for further
imDrovements.

I congratulatethe entire team of IL&FS EcosmartLtd., exPertsftom the sectorwho were

involved in the preparation of the Manuals, Chairman and members of the Core and Peer
Committees of various sectors and various Resource Persons whose inputs were indeed
valuable in the preparation and finalization of the Manuals.

, . (Jairam Ramesh)
 1.
INTRODUCTION TO THE TECHNICAL EIA
GUIDANCE MANUALS PROJECT

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is a process of identifying, predicting,

evaluating and mitigating the biophysical, social, and other relevant effects of
development proposals prior to major decisions being taken and commitments made.
These studies integrate the environmental concerns of developmental activities into the
process of decision-making.

EIA has emerged as one of the successful policy innovations of the 20th Century in the
process of ensuring sustained development. Today, EIA is formalized as a regulatory tool
in more than 100 countries for effective integration of environmental concerns in the
economic development process. The EIA process in India was made mandatory and was
also given a legislative status through a Notification issued by the Ministry of
Environment and Forests (MoEF) in January 1994. The Notification, however, covered
only a few selected industrial developmental activities. While there are subsequent
amendments, the Notification issued on September 14, 2006 supersedes all the earlier
Notifications, and has brought out structural changes in the clearance mechanism.

The basic tenets of this EIA Notification could be summarized into the following:

̇ Pollution potential as the basis for prior environmental clearance instead of

investment criteria; and
̇ Decentralization of clearing powers to the State/Union Territory (UT) level
Authorities for certain developmental activities to make the prior environmental
clearance process quicker, transparent and effective.
Devolution of the power to grant clearances at the state level for certain category of the
developmental activities / projects is a step forward to fulfill the basic tenets of the re-
engineering i.e., quicker, transparent and effective process but many issues impede/hinder
its functional efficiency. These issues could be in technical and operational domains as
listed below:

Technical issues

̇ Ensuring level playing ground to avoid arbitrariness in the decision-making process

̇ Classification of projects which do not require public hearing and detailed EIA
(Category B2)
̇ Variations in drawing Terms of Reference (ToR) of EIA studies for a given
developmental activity across the States/UTs
̇ Varying developmental-activity-specific expertise requirement for conducting EIA
studies and their appraisal
̇ Availability of adequate sectoral experts and variations in competency levels
̇ Inadequate data verification, cross checking tools and supporting institutional
framework

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

1-1
 Introduction

̇ Meeting time targets without compromising with the quality of assessments/ reviews
̇ Varying knowledge and skill levels of regulators, consultants and experts
̇ Newly added developmental activities for prior environmental clearance, etc.

Operational issues

̇ State level /UT level EIA Authorities (SEIAA/UTEIAA) are formulated for the first
time and many are functioning
̇ Varying roles and responsibilities of involved organizations
̇ Varying supporting institutional strengths across the States/UTs
̇ Varying manpower availability, etc.
1.1 Purpose

The purpose of developing the sector-specific technical EIA guidance manuals (TGM) is
to provide clear and concise information on EIA to all the stakeholders i.e., the project
proponent, the consultant, the reviewer, and the public. The TGMs are organized to cover
following:

Chapter 1 (Introduction): This chapter provides a brief introduction on the EIA, basic
tenets of EIA Notification, technical & operational issues in the process of clearance,
purpose of the TGMs, project implementation process and additional information.

Chapter 2 (Conceptual facets of an EIA): Provides an overall understanding to the

conceptual aspects of control of pollution and EIA for the developmental projects. This
basic understanding would set the readers at same level of understanding for proper
interpretations and boundaries for identifying the environmental interactions of the
developmental projects and their significance for taking measures of mitigation. This
chapter covers the discussion on environment in EIA context i.e., sustainable
development, pollution control strategies, preventive environmental management tools,
Objectives of EIA, types and basic principles of EIA, project cycle for induction/
arc/cupola furnace industry, understanding on type of environmental impacts and the
criteria for the significance analysis.

Chapter 3 (Induction/arc/cupola furnace industry): The purpose of this chapter is to

provide the reader precise information on all the relevant aspects of the industry, which is
essential to realize the likely interaction of such developmental activities on the receiving
environment. Besides, this Chapter gives a holistic understanding on the sources of
pollution and the opportunities of the source control.

The specific coverage which provides precise information on the industry include (i)
introduction to history and development of the industry in India, (ii) Scientific aspects of
industrial process – electric steel making, Non electric steel making, Manufacturing
process in the context of environmental pollution, Specific consumption factors,
Qualitative and quantitative analysis of rejects, Exposure pathway, (iii) cleaner and
pollution control technologies, and (iv) the summary of applicable national regulation for
this developmental activity.

Chapter 4 (Operational aspects): The purpose of this chapter is to facilitate the

stakeholders to extend clear guidance on coverage of legislative requirements, sequence
of procedures for obtaining the EIA clearance and each step-wise provisions and
considerations.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 1-2 August 2010

 Introduction

The coverage of the Chapter include provisions in the EIA Notification regarding
induction/electric arc/cupola furnace industry, screening (criteria for categorization of B1
and B2, siting guidelines, etc.), scoping (pre-feasibility report, guidance for filling form 1,
identification of valued environmental components, identification of impacts, etc.),
arriving at terms of reference for EIA studies, impact assessment studies (EIA team,
assessment of baseline quality of environment, impact prediction tools, significance of
impacts), social impact assessment, risk assessment considerations, typical mitigation
measures, designing considerations for environmental management plan, structure of EIA
report for incorporation of study findings, process of public consultation, project
appraisal, decision making process and post-clearance monitoring protocol.

Chapter 5 (Roles and responsibilities of various organizations involved in the

process of prior environmental clearance): The purpose of this Chapter is to brief the
stakeholders on the institutional mechanism and roles & responsibilities of the
stakeholders involved in the process of prior environmental clearance. The Coverage of
the Chapter include (i) roles and responsibilities of the stakeholders, (ii) organization
specific functions, (iii) constitution, composition and decision making process of SEIAA
and (iv) EAC & SEAC and (v) other conditions which may be considered.

For any given industry, each topic listed above could alone be the subject of a lengthy
volume. However, in order to produce a manageable document, this project focuses on
providing summary information for each topic. This format provides the reader with a
synopsis of each issue. Text within each section was researched from many sources, and
was condensed from more detailed sources pertaining to specific topics.

The contents of the document are designed with a view to facilitate addressing of the
relevant technical and operational issues as mentioned in the earlier section. Besides, it
facilitates various stakeholders involved in the EIA clearance process i.e.,

̇ Project proponents will be fully aware of the procedures, common ToR for EIA
studies, timelines, monitoring needs, etc., in order to plan the projects/studies
appropriately.
̇ Consultants across India will gain similar understanding about a given sector, and
also the procedure for EIA studies, so that the quality of the EIA reports gets
improved and streamlined
̇ Reviewers across the states/UTs will have the same understanding about an industry
sector and would able to draw a benchmark in establishing the significant impacts for
the purpose of prescribing the ToR for EIA studies and also in the process of review
and appraisal.
̇ Public who are concerned about new or expansion projects, use this manual to get a
basic idea about the manufacturing/production details, rejects/wastes from the
operations, choice of cleaner/control technologies, regulatory requirements, likely
environmental and social concerns, mitigation measures, etc., in order to seek
clarifications appropriately in the process of public consultation. The procedural
clarity in the document will further strengthen them to understand the stages involved
in clearance and roles and responsibilities of various organizations.
̇ In addition, these manuals would substantially ease the pressure on reviewers at the
scoping stage and would bring in functional efficiency at the central and state levels.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 1-3 August 2010

 Introduction

1.2 Project Implementation

The Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoEF), Government of India took up the task of
developing sector-specific technical EIA guidance manuals for all the developmental
activities listed in the re-engineered EIA Notification. The Infrastructure Leasing and
Financial Services Ecosmart Limited (IL&FS Ecosmart), has been entrusted with the task
of developing these manuals for 27 industrial and related sectors as mentioned in the
Schedule attached to the EIA Notification issued on September 14, 2006. Now, after
amendment of the EIA notification as on 1st December, 2009, induction and electric arc
furnace, submerged arc furnace and cupola with capacity more than 30,000 tonnes per
annum (TPA), have been listed in item 3(a), column 5, which requires environmental
clearance under metallurgical industries. This manual is prepared specially for induction,
electric arc and cupola furnaces.

The ability to design comprehensive EIA studies for specific industries depends on the
knowledge of several interrelated topics. Therefore, it requires expert inputs from
multiple dimensions i.e., administrative, project management, technical, scientific, social,
economic, risk etc., in order to comprehensively analyze the issues of concern and to
draw logical interpretations. Thus, Ecosmart has designed a well-composed
implementation framework to factor inputs of the experts and stakeholders in the process
of finalization of these manuals.

The process of manual preparation involved collection & collation of the secondary
available information, technical review by sectoral resource persons and critical review &
finalization by a competent Expert Committee composed of core and sectoral peer
members.

The MoEF appreciates the efforts of Ecosmart, Expert Core and Peer Committee,
resource persons and all those who have directly and indirectly contributed to this
Manual.

1.3 Additional Information

This TGM is brought out by the MoEF to provide clarity to all the stakeholders involved
in the ‘Prior Environmental Clearance’ process. As such, the contents and clarifications
given in this document do not withstand in case of a conflict with the statutory provisions
of the Notifications and Executive Orders issued by the MoEF from time-to-time.

TGMs are not regulatory documents. Instead, these are the tools designed to assist in
successful completion of an EIA. For the purpose of this project, the key elements
considered under TGMs are: conceptual aspects of EIA; developmental activity-specific
information; operational aspects; and roles and responsibilities of involved stakeholders.

This manual is prepared considering the Notification issued on September 14, 2006 and
latest amendment of 1st December 2009. For recent updates, if any, please refer the
website of the MoEF, Government of India i.e., http://moef.nic.in/index.php

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 1-4 August 2010

 2.
CONCEPTUAL FACETS OF EIA

It is an imperative requirement to understand the basic concepts concerned to the

pollution control and the environmental impact assessment in an overall objective of the
sustainable development. This Chapter highlights the pollution control strategies and
their tools besides the objectives, types & principles of EIA, type of impacts their
significance analysis, in order to provide consistent understanding to the reader before
assessing the development of activity-specific environmental concerns in Chapter 3 and
identification & prediction of significant impacts in order to design mitigation measures
as detailed in Chapter 4.

2.1 Environment in EIA Context

“Environment” in EIA context mainly focuses, but is not limited to physical, chemical,
biological, geological, social, economical, and aesthetic dimensions along with their
complex interactions, which affect individuals, communities and ultimately determines
their forms, character, relationship, and survival. In EIA context, ‘effect’ and ‘impact’
can often be used interchangeably. However, ‘impact’ is considered as a value judgment
of the significance of an effect.

Sustainable development is built on three basic premises i.e., economic growth,

ecological balance and social progress. Economic growth achieved in a way that does not
consider the environmental concerns, will not be sustainable in the long run. Therefore,
sustainable development needs careful integration of environmental, economic, and social
needs in order to achieve both an increased standard of living in short term, and a net gain
or equilibrium among human, natural, and economic resources to support future
generations in the long term.

“It is necessary to understand the links between environment and development in order to
make choices for development that will be economically efficient, socially equitable and
responsible, as well as environmentally sound.” Agenda 21, Rio Declaration on
Environment and Development, Rio De Janerio, June 1992.

Figure 2-1: Inclusive Components of Sustainable Development

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

2-1
 Conceptual Facets of EIA

2.2 Pollution Control Strategies

Pollution control strategies can be broadly categorized in to preventive and reactive. The
reactive strategy refers to the steps that may be applied once the wastes are generated or
contamination of the receiving environment takes place. The control technology or a
combination of technologies to minimize the impact due to the process rejects/wastes
varies with quantity and characteristics, desired control efficiency and economics.

Many combinations of techniques could be adopted for treatment of a specific waste or

the contaminated receiving environment, but are often judged based on techno-economic
feasibility. Therefore, the best alternative is to take all possible steps to avoid pollution
itself. This preventive approach refers to a hierarchy that involves i) prevention &
reduction; ii) recycling and re-use; iii) treatment; and iv) disposal, respectively.

Therefore, there is a need to shift the emphasis from the reactive to preventive strategy
i.e., to promote preventive environmental management. Preventive environmental
management tools may be grouped into management based tools, process based tools and
product based tools, which are given below:

Management Based Tools Process Based Tools Product Based Tools

Environmental Management Environmental Technology Assessment Industrial Ecology
System (EMS)
Toxic Use Reduction Extended Producers
Environmental Performance Responsibility
Best Operating Practices
Evaluation
Eco-labeling
Environmentally Best Practice
Environmental Audits
Design for
Best Available Technology (BAT)
Environmental Reporting Environment
and Communication Waste Minimization
Life Cycle
Total Cost Accounting Pollution Prevention Assessment (LCA)
Law and Policy Cleaner Production
Trade and Environment 4-R Concept
Environmental Economics Cleaner Technology
Eco-efficiency

2.3 Tools for Preventive Environmental Management

The tools for preventive environmental management can be broadly classified into
following three groups.

̇ Tools for assessment and analysis - risk assessment, life cycle assessment, total cost
assessment, environmental audit / statement, environmental benchmarking,
environmental indicators
̇ Tools for action - environmental policy, market based economic instruments,
innovative funding mechanism, EMS and ISO certification, total environmental
quality movement, eco-labeling, cleaner production, eco-efficiency, industrial
ecosystem or metabolism, voluntary agreements
̇ Tools for communication - state of environment, corporate environmental reporting
Specific tools under each group are discussed precisely in next sections.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-2 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

2.3.1 Tools for assessment and analysis

2.3.1.1 Risk assessment

Risk is associated with the frequency of failure and consequence effect. Predicting such
situations and evaluation of risk is essential to take appropriate preventive measures. The
major concern of the assessment is to identify the activities falling in a matrix of high &
low frequencies at which the failures occur and the degree of its impact. The high
frequency, low impact activities can be managed by regular maintenance i.e, LDAR
(Leak detection and repair) programmes. Whereas, the low frequency, high impact
activities are of major concern (accidents) in terms of risk assessment. As the frequency
is low, often the required precautions are not realized or maintained. However, risk
assessment identifies the areas of major concerns which require additional preventive
measures; likely consequence distances considering domino effects, which will give the
possible casualties and ecological loss in case of accidents. These magnitudes demand
the attention for preventive and disaster management plans (DMP). Thus is an essential
tool to ensure safety of operations.

2.3.1.2 Life cycle assessment

A broader approach followed to deal with environmental impacts during manufacturing is

called LCA. This approach recognizes that environmental concerns are associated with
every step of the processing w.r.t. manufacturing of products and also examines
environmental impacts of the product at all stages of the project life cycle. LCA includes
product design, development, manufacturing, packaging, distribution, usage and disposal.
LCA is concerned with reducing environmental impacts at all the stages and considering
the total picture rather than just one stage of the production process.

Industries/firms may apply this concept to minimize costs incurred on the environmental
conservation throughout the project life cycle.

2.3.1.3 Total cost assessment

Total Cost Assessment (TCA) is an enhanced financial analysis tool that is used to assess
the profitability of alternative courses of action e.g., raw material substitution to reduce
the costs of managing the wastes generated by process; an energy retrofit to reduce the
costs of energy consumption. This is particularly relevant for pollution prevention
options. These options, because of their nature, often produce financial savings that are
overlooked in conventional financial analysis, either because they are misallocated,
uncertain, hard to quantify, or occur more than three to five years after the initial
investment. TCA includes all relevant costs and savings associated with an option so that
it can compete for scarce capital resources fairly, on a level playing field. The
assessments are often beneficial w.r.t the following:

̇ Identification of costly resource inefficiencies

̇ Financial analysis of environmental activities/projects such as investment in cleaner
technologies
̇ Prioritization of environmental activities/projects
̇ Evaluation of product mix and product pricing
̇ Bench marking against the performance of other processes or against the competitors
A comparison of cost assessments is given below:

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-3 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

̇ Conventional cost accounting (CCA): Direct and indirect financial costs+ Recognized
contingent costs
̇ Total Cost Assessment (TCA): A broader range of direct, indirect, contingent and
less quantifiable costs
̇ Full Cost assessment (FCA): TCA + External social costs borne by society
2.3.1.4 Environmental audit/statement

Key objectives of an environmental audit includes compliance verification, problem

identification, environmental impact measurement, environmental performance
measurement, conforming effectiveness of EMS, providing a database for corrective
actions and future actions, developing company’s environmental strategy, communication
and formulating environmental policy.

The MoEF, Government of India issued Notification on ‘Environmental Statements’ (ES)

in April, 1992 and further amended in April 1993 – As per the Notification, the industries
are required to submit environmental statements to the respective State Pollution Control
Board (SPCB). ES is a proactive tool for self-examination of the industry to
reduce/minimize pollution by adopting process modifications, recycling and reusing of
the resources. The regular submission of ES will indicate the systematic improvement in
environmental pollution control being achieved by the industry. In other way, specific
points in ES may be used as environmental performance indicators for relative
comparison, implementation and to promote better practices.

2.3.1.5 Environmental benchmarking

Environmental performance and operational indicators could be used to navigate, manage

and communicate the significant aspects and give enough evidence of good
environmental house keeping. Besides the existing prescribed standards, an insight to
identify the performance indicators and prescribing schedule for systematic improvement
in performance of these indicators will yield better results.

Relative indicators may be identified for different industrial sectors and be integrated in
companies and organizations to monitor and manage the different environmental aspects
of the company, to benchmark and compare two or more companies from the same sector.
These could cover water consumption, wastewater generation, energy consumption,
solid/hazardous waste generation, chemical consumption etc., per tonne of final product.
Once these bench marks are developed, the industries which are below them may be
guided and enforced to reach them while those which are better than the benchmark may
be encouraged further by giving incentives etc.

2.3.1.6 Environmental indicators

Indicators can be classified in to environmental performance indicators (EPI) and

environmental condition indicators (ECI). The EPIs can be further divided into two
categories i.e., operational performance indicators and management performance
indicators.

The operational performance indicators are related to the process and other operational
activities of the organization. These would typically address the issue of raw material
consumption, energy consumption, water consumption in the organization, the quantities
of wastewater generated, other solid wastes & emissions generated from the organization
etc.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-4 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

Management performance indicators are related to the management efforts to influence

the environmental performance of the organisational operations.

The environmental condition indicators provide information about the environment.

These indicators provide information about the local, regional, national or global
condition of the environment. This information helps an organization to understand the
environmental impacts of its activities and thus helps in taking decisions to improve the
environmental performance.

Indicators basically used to evaluate environmental performance against the set standards
and thus indicate the direction in which to proceed. Selection of type of indicators for a
firm or project depends upon its relevance, clarity and realistic cost of collection and its
development.

2.3.2 Tools for action

2.3.2.1 Environmental policy

An environmental policy is a statement of an organization’s overall aim and principles of

action w.r.t the environment, including compliance with all relevant regulatory
requirements. It is a key tool in communicating environmental priorities of the
organization to all its employees. To ensure organization’s commitment towards a
formulated environmental policy, it is essential for the top management to be involved in
the process of formulating the policy and setting priorities. Therefore, the first step is to
get the commitment from the higher levels of management. The organization should then
conduct an initial environmental review and draft an environmental policy. This draft
should be discussed and approved by the board of directors. The approved environmental
policy statement, should then be communicated internally among all its employees and
must also be made available to the public.

The Ministry of Environment & Forests, Government of India published the National
Environment Policy, thus the individual firms while making their environmental policies
may like to refer the national environment policy for synchronization

2.3.2.2 Market-based economic instruments

Market based instruments are regulations that encourage behavior through market signals
rather than through explicit directives regarding pollution control levels. These policy
instruments such as tradable permits, pollution charge are often described as harnessing
market forces. Market based instruments can be categorized into the following four
major categories which are discussed below.

̇ Pollution charge: Charge system will assess a fee or tax on the amount of pollution a
firm or source generates. It is worthwhile for the firm to reduce emissions to the
point, where its marginal abatement costs is equal to the tax rate. Thus firms control
pollution to different degrees i.e. High cost controllers – less; low-cost controllers-
more. The charge system encourages the industries to further reduce the pollutants.
The collected charges can form a fund for restoration of the environment. Another
form of pollution charge is a deposit refund system, where, consumers pay a
surcharge when purchasing a potentially polluting product, and receive a refund on
return of the product after useful life span at appropriate centers. The concept of

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-5 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

extended producers’ responsibility brought in to avoid accumulation of dangerous

products in the environment.
̇ Tradable permits: Under this system, firms that achieve the emission levels below
their allotted level may sell the surplus permits. Similarly, the firms, which are
required to spend more to attain the required degree of treatment/allotted levels, can
purchase permits from others at lower costs and may be benefited.
̇ Market barrier reductions: Three known market barrier reduction types are as
follows:
– Market Creation: Measures that facilitate the voluntary exchange of water rights
and thus promote more efficient allocation of scarce water supplies
– Liability Concerns: Encourage firms to consider potential environmental damages
of their decisions
– Information Programmes: Eco-labeling and energy- efficiency product labeling
requirements
̇ Government subsidy reduction: Subsidies are the mirror images of taxes and, in
theory, can provide incentive to address environmental problems. However, it has
been reported that the subsidies encourage economically inefficient and
environmentally unsound practices, and often leads to market distortions due to
differences in the area. However, these are important to sustain the expansion of
production, in the national interests. In such cases, the subsidy may be comparable to
the net social benefit.

2.3.2.3 Innovative funding mechanism

There are many forums under which the fund is made available for the issues which are of
global/regional concern i.e., climate change, Basal Convention and further fund sources
are being explored for the Persistent Organic Pollutants Convention. Besides the global
funding mechanism, there needs to be localized alternative mechanisms for boosting the
investment in environmental pollution control. For example, in India the Government has
established mechanism to fund the common effluent treatment plants, which are
specifically serving the small and medium scale enterprises i.e., 25% share by the State
Government, matching grants from the Central Government and surety for 25% soft loan.
It means that the industries need to invest only 25% initially, thus encouraging voluntary
compliance.

There are some more options i.e., if the pollution tax/charge is imposed on the residual
pollution being caused by the industries, municipalities etc., fund will automatically be
generated, which in turn, can be utilized for funding the environmental improvement
programmes. The emerging concept of build-operate-transfer (BOT) is an encouraging
development, where there is a possibility to generate revenue by application of advanced
technologies. There are many opportunities which can be explored. However, what is
required is the paradigm shift and focused efforts.

2.3.2.4 EMS and ISO certification

EMS is that part of the overall management system, which includes the organizational
structure, responsibilities, practices, procedures, process and resources for determining
and implementing the forms of overall aims, principles of action w.r.t the environment. It
encompasses the totality of organizational, administrative and policy provisions to be
taken by a firm to control its environmental influences. Common elements of an EMS are

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-6 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

the identification of the environmental impacts and legal obligations, the development of
a plan for management & improvement, the assignment of the responsibilities and
monitoring of the performance.

2.3.2.5 Total environmental quality movement

Quality is regarded as

̇ A product attribute that had to be set at an acceptable level and balanced against the
cost
̇ Something delivered by technical systems engineered by experts rather than the
organization as a whole
̇ Assured primarily through the findings and correction of mistakes at the end of the
production process
One expression of the total environment quality movement (TEQM) is a system of control
called Kaizen. The principles of Kaizen are:

̇ Goal must be continuous improvement of quality instead of acceptable quality

̇ Responsibility of the quality shall be shared by all members of an organization
̇ Efforts should be focused on improving the whole process and design of the products
With some modifications, TEQM approach can be applied in the improvement of
corporate environmental performance in both process and product areas.

2.3.2.6 Eco-labeling

Eco-labeling is the practice of supplying information on the environmental characteristics

of a product or service to the general public. These labeling schemes can be grouped into
three types:

̇ Type I: Multiple criteria base; third party (Govt. or non-commercial private

organizations) programme claims overall environmental preferability.
̇ Type II: Specific attribute of a product; often issued by a company/industrial
association
̇ Type III: Agreed set of indices; provide quantified information; self declaration
Among the above, Type I are more reliable because they are established by a third party
and considers the environmental impacts of a product from cradle to grave. However, the
labeling program will only be effective if linked with complementary program of
consumer education and up on restriction of umbrella claims by the producers.

2.3.2.7 Cleaner production

Cleaner production is one of the tools, which has lot of bearing on environmental
pollution control. It is also seen that the approach is changing with time i.e., dumping-to-
control-to-recycle-to-prevention. Promotion of cleaner production principles involve an
insight into the production processes not only to get desired yield but also to optimize on
raw material consumption i.e., resource conservation and implications of the waste
treatment and disposal.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-7 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

2.3.2.8 4-R concept

The concept endorses utilization of wastes as a by-product to the extent possible i.e., Re-
cycle, Recover, Reuse, Recharge. Recycling refers to using wastes/by-products in the
process again as a raw material to maximize production. Recovery refers to engineering
means such as solvent extraction, distillation, precipitation etc. to separate the useful
constituents of wastes, so that these recovered materials can be used. Re-use refers to the
utilization of waste from one process as a raw material to other. Recharging is an option
in which the natural systems are used for renovation of waste for further use.

2.3.2.9 Eco-efficiency

The World Business Council on sustainable development (WBCSD) defines eco-

efficiency as “the delivery of competitively priced goods and services that satisfy human
needs and bring quality of life, while progressively reducing ecological impacts and
resource intensity throughout the life cycle, to a level at least in line with earth’s carrying
capacity”. The business implements the eco-efficiency on four levels i.e. optimized
processes, recycling of wastes, eco-innovation and new services. Fussler (1995) defined
six dimensions of eco efficiency, which are given below to understand/examine the
system.

̇ Mass: There is an opportunity to significantly reduce mass burdens (raw materials,

fuels, utilities consumed during the life cycle)
̇ Reduce Energy Use: The opportunity is to redesign the product or its use to provide
significant energy savings
̇ Reduce Environmental Toxins: This is concern to the environmental quality and
human health. The opportunity here is to significantly control the dispersion of toxic
elements.
̇ Recycle when Practical: Designing for recyclibility is important
̇ Working with Mother Nature: Materials are borrowed and returned to the nature
without negatively affecting the balance of the ecosystem
̇ Make it Last Longer: It relates to useful life and functions of products. Increasing
the functionality of products also increase their eco efficiency
The competitiveness among the companies and long-term survival will continue and the
successful implementation of eco efficiency will contribute to their success. There is a
need to shift towards responsible consumerism equal to the efficiency gains made by
corporations – doing more with less.

2.3.2.10 Industrial ecosystem or metabolism

Eco-industrial development is a new paradigm for achieving excellence in business and

environmental performance. It opens up innovative new avenues for managing business
and conducting economic development by creating linkages among local ‘resources’,
including businesses, non-profit groups, governments, unions, educational institutions,
and communities. They can creatively foster the dynamic and responsible growth.
Antiquated business strategies based on isolated enterprises are no longer responsive
enough to market, environmental and community requirements.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-8 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

Sustainable eco-industrial development looks systematically at development, business and

environment, attempting to stretch the boundaries of current practice - on one level. It is
as directly practical as making the right connections between the wastes and resources
needed for production and at the other level, it is a whole new way of thinking about
doing business and interacting with communities. At a most basic level, it is each
organization seeking higher performance within it self. However, most eco-industrial
activity is moving to a new level by increasing the inter connections between the
companies.

Strategic partnership, networked manufacturing and performed supplier arrangements are

all the examples of ways used by the businesses to ensure growth, contain costs and to
reach out for new opportunities.

For most businesses, the two essentials for success are the responsive markets and access
to cost-effective, quality resources for production or delivering services. In absence of
these two factors, virtually every other incentive becomes a minor consideration.

Transportation issues are important at two levels, the ability to get goods to market in an
expeditious way is essential to success in this day of just in time inventories. The use of
least impact transportation with due consideration of speed and cost supports business
success and addresses the concerned in community.

Eco-industrial development works because it consciously mixes a range of targeted

strategies shaped to the contours of the local community. Most importantly, it works
because the communities want nothing less than the best possible in or near their
neighborhoods. For companies, it provides a path towards significantly higher operating
results and positive market presence. For our environment, it provides great hope that the
waste will be transformed into valued product and that the stewardship will be a joint
pledge of both businesses and communities.

2.3.2.11 Voluntary agreements

Voluntary environmental agreements among the industries, government, public

representatives, NGOs and other concerned towards attaining certain future demands of
the environment are reported to be successful. Such agreements may be used as a tool
where Government would like to make the standards stringent in future (phase-wise-
stringent). These may be used when conditions are temporary and require timely
replacement. Also these may be used as supplementary/ complimentary in
implementation of the regulation. The agreements may include:

̇ Target objectives (emission limit values/standards)

̇ Performance objectives (operating procedures)
̇ R&D activities – Government and industry may have agreement to establish better
control technologies.
̇ Monitoring & reporting of the agreement conditions by other agents (NGOs, public
participants, civil authority etc.)
In India, the MoEF has organized such programme, popularly known as the corporate
responsibility for environment protection (CREP) considering identified 17 categories of
high pollution potential industrial sectors. Publication in this regard, is available with
Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB).

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-9 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

2.3.3 Tools for communication

2.3.3.1 State of environment

The Government of India has brought out the state of environment report for entire
country and similar reports available for many of the states. These reports are published
at regular intervals to record trends and to identify the required interventions at various
levels. These reports consider the internationally accepted DPSIR framework for the
presentation of the information. DPSIR refers to

Ü D – Driving forces – causes of concern i.e. industries, transportation etc.

Ü P – Pressures – pollutants emanating from driving forces i.e. emission
Ü S – State – quality of environment i.e. air, water & soil quality
Ü I – Impact – Impact on health, ecosystem, materials, biodiversity, economic damage
etc.
Ü R – Responses – action for cleaner production, policies (including standards/
guidelines), targets etc.

Environment reports including the above elements gives a comprehensive picture of

specific target area in order to take appropriate measures for improvement. Such reports
capture the concerns, which could be considered in EIAs.

2.3.3.2 Corporate environmental reporting

Corporate environmental reports (CERs) are only one form of environmental reporting
defined as publicly available, stand alone reports, issued voluntarily by the industries on
their environmental activities. CER is just a means of environmental improvement and
greater accountability, not an end in itself.

Three categories of environmental disclosure are:

̇ Involuntary Disclosure: Without its permission and against its will (env. Campaign,
press etc.)
̇ Mandatory Disclosure: As required by law
̇ Voluntary Disclosure: The disclosure of information on a voluntary basis

2.4 Objectives of EIA

Objectives of EIA include the following:

Ü To ensure environmental considerations are explicitly addressed and incorporated

into the development decision-making process;
Ü To anticipate and avoid, minimize or offset the adverse significant biophysical, social
and other relevant effects of development proposals;
Ü To protect the productivity and capacity of natural systems and the ecological
processes which maintain their functions; and
Ü To promote development that is sustainable and optimizes resource use as well as
management opportunities

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-10 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

2.5 Types of EIA

Environmental assessments could be classified into four types i.e. strategic environmental
assessment, regional EIA, sectoral EIA and project level EIA. These are precisely
discussed below:

Strategic environmental assessment

Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) refers to systematic analysis of the

environmental effects of development policies, plans, programmes and other proposed
strategic actions. SEA represents a proactive approach to integrate environmental
considerations into the higher levels of decision-making – beyond the project level, when
major alternatives are still open.

Regional EIA

EIA in the context of regional planning integrates environmental concerns into

development planning for a geographic region, normally at the sub-country level. Such
an approach is referred to as the economic-cum-environmental (EcE) development
planning. This approach facilitates adequate integration of economic development with
management of renewable natural resources within the carrying capacity limitation to
achieve sustainable development. It fulfils the need for macro-level environmental
integration, which the project-oriented EIA is unable to address effectively. Regional
EIA addresses the environmental impacts of regional development plans and thus, the
context for project-level EIA of the subsequent projects, within the region. In addition, if
environmental effects are considered at regional level, then cumulative environmental
effects of all the projects within the region can be accounted.

Sectoral EIA

Instead of project-level-EIA, an EIA should take place in the context of regional and
sectoral level planning. Once sectoral level development plans have the integrated
sectoral environmental concerns addressed, the scope of project-level EIA will be quite
minimal. Sectoral EIA helps in addressing specific environmental problems that may be
encountered in planning and implementing sectoral development projects.

Project level EIA

Project level EIA refers to the developmental activity in isolation and the impacts that it
exerts on the receiving environment. Thus, it may not effectively integrate the cumulative
effects of the development in a region.

From the above discussion, it is clear that EIA shall be integrated at all the levels i.e.
strategic, regional, sectoral and the project level. Whereas, the strategic EIA is a
structural change in the way the things are evaluated for decision-making, the regional
EIA refers to substantial information processing and drawing complex inferences. The
project-level EIA is relatively simple and reaches to meaningful conclusions. Therefore
in India, project-level EIA studies take place on an large-scale and are being considered.
However, in the re-engineered Notification, provisions have been incorporated for giving
a single clearance for the entire industrial estate for e.g., Leather parks, pharma cities,
etc., which is a step towards the regional approach.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-11 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

As we progress and the resource planning concepts emerge in our decision-making

process, the integration of overall regional issues will become part of the impact
assessment studies.

2.6 Basic EIA Principles

By integrating the environmental impacts of the development activities and their

mitigation early in the project planning cycle, the benefits of EIA could be realized in all
stages of a project, from exploration and planning, through construction, operations,
decommissioning, and beyond site closure.

A properly-conducted-EIA also lessens conflicts by promoting community participation,

informing decision makers, and also helps in laying the base for environmentally sound
projects. An EIA should meet at least three core values:

̇ Integrity: The EIA process should be fair, objective, unbiased and balanced
̇ Utility: The EIA process should provide balanced, credible information for decision-
making
̇ Sustainability: The EIA process should result in environmental safeguards
Ideally an EIA process should be:

̇ Purposive - should inform decision makers and result in appropriate levels of

environmental protection and community well-being.
̇ Rigorous - should apply ‘best practicable’ science, employing methodologies and
techniques appropriate to address the problems being investigated.
̇ Practical - should result in providing information and acceptable and implementable
solutions for problems faced by proponents.
̇ Relevant - should provide sufficient, reliable and usable information for development
planning and decision making.
̇ Cost-effective - should impose minimum cost burdens in terms of time and finance on
proponents and participants consistent with meeting accepted requirements and
objectives of EIA.
̇ Efficient - should achieve the objectives of EIA within the limits of available
information, time, resources and methodology.
̇ Focused - should concentrate on significant environmental effects and key issues; i.e.,
the matters that need to be taken into account in making decisions.
̇ Adaptive - should be adjusted to the realities, issues and circumstances of the
proposals under review without compromising the integrity of the process, and be
iterative, incorporating lessons learned throughout the project life cycle.
̇ Participative - should provide appropriate opportunities to inform and involve the
interested and affected publics, and their inputs and concerns should be addressed
explicitly in the documentation and decision making.
̇ Inter-disciplinary - should ensure that appropriate techniques and experts in the
relevant bio-physical and socio-economic disciplines are employed, including use of
traditional knowledge as relevant.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-12 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

̇ Credible - should be carried out with professionalism, rigor, fairness, objectivity,

impartiality and balance, and be subject to independent checks and verification.
̇ Integrated - should address the interrelationships of social, economic and biophysical
aspects.
̇ Transparent - should have clear, easily understood requirements for EIA content;
ensure public access to information; identify the factors that are to be taken into
account in decision making; and acknowledge limitations and difficulties.
̇ Systematic - should result in full consideration of all relevant information on the
affected environment, of proposed alternatives and their impacts, and of the measures
necessary to monitor and investigate residual effects.

2.7 Project Cycle

Like any other project, the generic project cycle including that of the Induction and
electric arc furnace, submerged arc furnace and cupola of capacity more than 30.000TPA,
for which this TGM has been prepared, has six main stages:

1. Project concept
2. Pre-feasibility
3. Feasibility
4. Design and engineering
5. Implementation
6. Monitoring and evaluation

It is important to consider the environmental factors on an equal basis with technical and
economic factors throughout the project planning, assessment and implementation phases.
Environmental considerations should be introduced at the earliest in the project cycle and
must be an integral part of the project pre-feasibility and feasibility stage. If the
environmental considerations are given due respect in site selection process by the project
proponent, the subsequent stages of the environmental clearance process would get
simplified and would also facilitate easy compliance to the mitigation measures
throughout the project life cycle.

A project’s feasibility study should include a detailed description of significant impacts,

and the EIA include a detailed prediction and quantification of impacts and delineation of
Environmental Management Plan (EMP). Findings of the EIA study should preferably be
incorporated in the project design stage so that the project as well as the site alternatives
is studied and necessary changes, if required, are incorporated in the project design stage.
This practice will also help the management in assessing the negative impacts and in
designing cost-effective remedial measures. In general, EIA enhances the project quality
and improves the project planning process.

2.8 Environmental Impacts

Environmental impacts resulting from proposed actions can be grouped into following
categories:

̇ Beneficial or detrimental
̇ Naturally reversible or irreversible

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-13 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

̇ Repairable via management practices or irreparable

̇ Short term or long term
̇ Temporary or continuous
̇ Occurring during construction phase or operational phase
̇ Local, regional, national or global
̇ Accidental or planned (recognized before hand)
̇ Direct (primary) or Indirect (secondary)
̇ Cumulative or single
The category of impact as stated above, and the significance will facilitate the Expert
Appraisal Committee (EAC)/State Level EAC (SEAC) to take a look at the ToR for EIA
studies, as well as, in decision making process about the developmental activity.

Figure 2-2: Types of Impacts

The nature of impacts could fall within three broad classifications i.e., direct, indirect and
cumulative, based on the characteristics of impacts. The assessment of direct, indirect
and cumulative impacts should not be considered in isolation or considered as separate
stages in the EIA. Ideally, the assessment of such impacts should form an integral part of
all stages of the EIA. The TGM does not recommend a single method to assess the types
of impacts, but suggests a practical framework/approach that can be adapted and
combined to suit a particular project and the nature of impacts.

2.8.1 Direct impacts

Direct impacts occur through direct interaction of an activity with an environmental,

social, or economic component. For example, an emission from induction and electric arc
furnace, submerged arc furnace and cupola may lead to a decline in air quality.

2.8.2 Indirect impacts

Indirect impacts on the environment are those which are not a direct result of the project,
often produced away from or as a result of a complex impact pathway. The indirect
impacts are also known as secondary or even tertiary level impacts. For example,
ambient air SO2 rise due to stack emissions may deposit on land as SO4 and cause acidic

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-14 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

soils. Another example of indirect impact, is the decline in water quality due to
accumulation of metals and heavy metals of water bodies receiving contaminated water
discharge from the nearby industry. This, in turn, may lead to a secondary indirect impact
on aquatic flora in that water body and may further cause reduction in fish population and
may also lead to biomagnification. Reduction in fishing harvests, affecting the incomes
of fishermen is a third level impact. Such impacts are characterized as socio-economic
(third level) impacts. The indirect impacts may also include growth-inducing impacts and
other effects related to induced changes to the pattern of land use or additional road
network, population density or growth rate. In the process, air, water and other natural
systems including the ecosystem may also be affected. Many indirect impacts may also
be positive such as greening of the area; improved recreational, health and educational
facilities; employment generation and enhanced economic activity of a region.

2.8.3 Cumulative impacts

Cumulative impact consists of an impact that is created as a result of the combination of

the project evaluated in the EIA together with other projects in the same vicinity, causing
related impacts. These impacts occur when the incremental impact of the project is
combined with the cumulative effects of other past, present and reasonably foreseeable
future projects. Figure 2-3 depicts the same. Respective EAC may exercise their
discretion on a case-by-case basis for considering the cumulative impacts.

Figure 2-3: Cumulative Impact

2.8.4 Induced impacts

The cumulative impacts can be due to induced actions of projects and activities that may
occur if the action under assessment is implemented such as growth-inducing impacts and
other effects related to induced changes to the pattern of future land use or additional road
network, population density or growth rate (e.g., excess growth may be induced in the
zone of influence around an induction and electric arc furnace, submerged arc furnace and
cupola project, and in the process causing additional effects on air, water and other
natural ecosystems). Induced actions may not be officially announced or be a part of any
official announcement/plan. Increase in workforce and nearby communities contributes
to this effect.

They usually have no direct relationship with the action under assessment, and represent
the growth-inducing potential of an action. New roads leading from those constructed for
a project, increased recreational activities (e.g., hunting, fishing), and construction of new
service facilities are examples of induced actions.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-15 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

However, the cumulative impacts due to induced development or third level or even
secondary indirect impacts are difficult to be quantified. Because of higher levels of
uncertainties, these impacts cannot normally be assessed over a long time horizon. An
EIA practitioner usually can only guess as to what such induced impacts may be and the
possible extent of their implications on the environmental factors. Respective EAC may
exercise their discretion on a case-by-case basis for considering the induced impacts by
specifying it very early at TOR stage.

2.9 Significance of Impacts

This TGM establishes the significance of impacts first and proceeds to delineate the
associated mitigation measures. So the significance here reflects the “worst-case
scenario” before mitigation is applied, and therefore provides an understanding of what
may happen if mitigation fails or is not as effective as predicted. For establishing
significance of different impacts, understanding the responses and interaction of the
environmental system is essential. Hence, the impact interactions and pathways are to be
understood and established first. Such an understanding will help in the assessment
process to quantify the impact as accurately as possible. Complex interactions,
particularly in the case of certain indirect or cumulative impacts, may give rise to non-
linear responses which are often difficult to understand and therefore their significance is
difficult to assess. It is hence understood that indirect or cumulative impacts are more
complex than the direct impacts. Currently the impact assessments are limited to direct
impacts. In case mitigation measures are delineated before determining significance of
the effect, the significance represents the residual effects.

However, the ultimate objective of an EIA is to achieve sustainable development. The

development process shall invariably cause some residual impacts even after
implementing an EMP effectively. Environmentalists today are faced with a vital, not-
easy-to-answer question—“What is the tolerable level of environmental impact within the
sustainable development framework?” As such, it has been recognized that every
ecosystem has a threshold for absorbing deterioration and a certain capacity for self-
regeneration. These thresholds based on concept of carrying capacity are as follows:

̇ Waste emissions from a project should be within the assimilative capacity of the local
environment to absorb without unacceptable degradation of its future waste
absorptive capacity or other important services.
̇ Harvest rates of renewable resource inputs should be within the regenerative capacity
of the natural system that generates them; depletion rates of non-renewable inputs
should be equal to the rate at which renewable substitutes are developed by human
invention and investment.
The aim of this model is to curb over-consumption and unacceptable environmental
degradation. But because of limitation in available scientific basis, this definition
provides only general guidelines for determining the sustainable use of inputs and
outputs. To establish the level of significance for each identified impact, a three-stage
analysis may be referred:

̇ First, an impact is qualified as being either negative or positive.

̇ Second, the nature of impacts such as direct, indirect, or cumulative is determined
using the impact network
̇ Third, a scale is used to determine the severity of the effect; for example, an impact is
of low, medium, or high significance.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-16 August 2010

 Conceptual Facets of EIA

It is not sufficient to simply state the significance of the effect. This determination must
be justified, coherent and documented, notably by a determination methodology, which
must be described in the methodology section of the report. There are many recognized
methodologies to determine the significance of effects.

2.9.1 Criteria/methodology to determine the significance of the identified

impacts

The criteria can be determined by answering some questions regarding the factors
affecting the significance. This will help the EIA stake-holders, the practitioner in
particular, to determine the significance of the identified impacts eventually. Typical
examples of such factors include the following:

̇ Exceeding of threshold limit: Significance may increase if a threshold is exceeded.

e.g., particulate matter emissions exceed the permissible threshold.
̇ Effectiveness of mitigation: Significance may increase as the effectiveness of
mitigation measures decreases. e.g., control technologies, which may not assure
consistent compliance to the requirements.
̇ Size of study area: Significance may increase as the zone of effects increases.
̇ Incremental contribution of effects from action under review: Significance may
increase as the relative contribution of an action increases.
̇ Relative contribution of effects of other actions: Significance may decrease as the
significance of nearby larger actions increase.
̇ Relative rarity of species: Significance may increase as species becomes increasingly
rare or threatened.
̇ Significance of local effects: Significance may increase as the significance of local
effects is high.
̇ Magnitude of change relative to natural background variability: Significance may
decrease if effects are within natural assimilative capacity or variability.
̇ Creation of induced actions: Significance may increase as an induced activity also
becomes highly significant.
̇ Degree of existing disturbance: Significance may increase if the surrounding
environment is pristine.
For determining significance of impacts, it is important to remember that secondary and
higher order effects can also occur as a result of a primary interaction between a project
activity and the local environment. Wherever a primary effect is identified, the
practitioner should always think if secondary or tertiary effects on other aspects of the
environment could also arise.

The EIA should also consider the effects that could arise from the project due to induced
developments, which take place as a consequence of the project. e.g., Population density
and associated infrastructure and jobs for people attracted to the area by the project. It
also requires consideration of cumulative effects that could arise from a combination of
the effects due to other projects with those of other existing or planned developments in
the surrounding area. So the necessity to formulate a qualitative checklist is suggested to
test significance, in general.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 2-17 August 2010

 3.
ABOUT INDUCTION/ELECTRIC ARC/CUPOLA
FURNACES INCLUDING BEST PRACTICES AND
POLLUTION CONTROL TECHNOLOGIES

Induction Furnaces (IF) are found both in secondary steel and secondary non-ferrous
industries, whereas, most common use of Electric Arc Furnace (EAF)/Submerged Arc
Furnace is found in the secondary steel industry. For many years, the cupola was the
primary method of melting used in iron foundries, however, in recent times, the use of the
cupola has declined in favour of electric/induction melting, which offers more precise
control of melt chemistry & temperature, and also releases much lower levels of
emissions. Among this group, the cupola is the furnace type that uses coke as a fuel;
combustion air used to burn the coke is introduced through tuyeres located at the base of
the cupola. The others use electricity for melting.

The growth in the production of the secondary steel sector has been quite significant,
specially in the post liberalization / de-regulation period so much so that they have
become the driver of growth in many areas. Steel manufacturing through EAFs has
matured in India as an industry. From a mere 9 per cent (%) of steel production in the
country in 1956, EAFs today account for 27.4% of the steel production. Engaged
primarily in stainless steel production with imported technology, the induction furnace
segment was marked by two changes that spurred growth; (i) development of indigenous
technology and (ii) use of sponge iron which revolutionized mild steel making in
induction furnace. The share of induction furnaces in total crude steel production is
increasing fast and today it is 31.5%. Table 3-1 captures such aspects:

Table 3-1: Approximate Share of EAF & Induction Furnace (%) in total Crude Steel
Production (in thousand tonnes)

Unit 2005-06 2006-07 2007-08*

EAF 11,273 (27%) 13,250 (26%) 14,800 (27.4%)

IF 8,693 (21%) 15,390 (30%) 17,000 (31.5%)
Total Crude Steel 41,660 50,817 53,904
Source: JPC Bulletin on Iron & Steel, March 2007 Vol. VII, Issue 3 & June 2008, Volume
VIII, Issue 6,* Prov.

In foundry industry, various types of castings produced are made of ferrous, non-ferrous,
aluminum alloy, graded cast iron, ductile iron, steel, etc., for application in automobiles,
railways, pumps, compressors, valves, diesel engines, cement/electrical/textile machinery,
aero & sanitary pipes, pipe fittings, castings for special applications, etc. However, grey
iron castings have the major share, i.e., about 70 % of total castings produced. Most
foundries use cupolas using coke.

There are about 4500 foundry units in the country, of which 80% can be classified as
small-scale units and 10% each as medium & large scale units. About 500 units have
International Quality Accreditation. The large foundries are modern, globally

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-1 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

competitive and are working at nearly full capacity. There is growing awareness about
environment, thus many foundries are switching over to induction furnaces while some
units in Agra are shifting to cokeless cupolas.

The exports showed healthy trends - approx 25-30% years on year (YOY). The exports
for FY 2005-06 were about USD 800 Million.

The industry directly employs about 5,00,000 people and indirectly about 1,50,000
people. It is labour-intensive industry. The small units are mainly dependant on manual
labour. However, the medium & large units are semi/ largely mechanized. Despite being
the most important industry in the small-scale sector, these foundries are often with low-
levels of mechanization, primarily family-owned and managed with typical capacity of
about 3 million tonnes of castings per annum.

Grey iron is the major component of production followed by steel, ductile iron & non
ferrous as shown in the figure below:

Figure 3-1: Composition of Metal Production in India

3.1 History and Development of Induction, Electric Arc, Submerged Arc

and Cupola Furnace Industry

3.1.1 Induction furnace industry

Medium frequency induction furnaces have been used in India to produce crude steel for
the last 25 years. It was only with de-regulation that the induction furnace industry in
India emerged in big form. With a host of units producing mild steel ingots (apart from
castings) in different pockets in the country, but more concentrated in the northern belt,
the Induction Furnaces came up to cater to domestic demand, which could not be
adequately met by the large scale integrated steel plants. While furnace of bigger size
and capacity were observed, there was also the large scale acceptance and adoption of
sponge iron in the charge mix. It may be seen that Induction Furnaces have started
producing steel even in those states where crude steel is being supplied by integrated steel
plants. The size of the Induction Furnaces used in making the crude steel is 5, 8,10 and
15 tonne per charge. The old system of using 3 tonne per charge furnaces has now
become obsolete.

The induction furnace industry prospered in the immediate post de-regulation period, but
fell victim to the slow down phase of the late 90’s. This phase saw quite a bit of

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-2 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

structural changes in the industry in the form of closure and consolidation. Over the time,
induction furnace route has emerged as a key driver of crude steel production in the
country with a rising share in total production as already mentioned above. As it is
expected that demand of steel in India will start rising very fast to narrow the gap of per
capita steel consumption with developed countries, the demand of induction furnace steel
may increase further.

3.1.2 EAF industry

In India, very high investment costs and terminal time overruns in commissioning of the
greenfield integrated steel plants using the blast furnace – basic oxygen furnace route of
steel production, coupled with the worrisome shortage of good quality metallurgical coke,
has resulted in adoption of EAF. APP countries produce 46% of all EAF steel produced
globally. Table 3-2 compares the production of EAF steel in 2005 in India, the APP
countries and worldwide.

Table 3-2: Production of EAF Steel

Country Production
(million tonnes)
Australia 1.4
China 45.1
India 17.1
Japan 28.8
South Korea 21.1
USA 52.2
APP Total 165.6
Worldwide 358.1

Current ongoing EAF steelmaking research includes reducing electricity requirement per
tonne of steel, modifying equipment and practices to minimize consumption of the
graphite electrodes, and improving the quality and range of steel produced from low
quality scrap.

Over the years, enough improvements have taken place in the design and operational
features of EAFs that have contributed to significant cost savings and increase in
productivity. Some of the innovations that have taken place with reference to EAFs can
be classified into three segments, i.e:

̇ Pre-smelting technology: Scrap preheating, dezincing of scrap;

̇ Smelting technology: Use of UHP technology, introduction of water cooled panels in
furnace wall and roof, effective fume extraction, high amount of automation and
computerization in both design and operation,
̇ Post smelting technology: Use of ladle refinement of steel
The EAF steelmaking has been commercially established for various types of charge
materials. The various types of charge materials and their extent of usage in EAF are
shown in Table 3-3.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-3 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Table 3-3: Types of Charge Mix and their Usage in EAF Steelmaking

S. No. Type of Charge Mix Extent of Usage (%)

1 Steel scrap 0 – 100

2 Solid pig iron 0 – 50
3 Liquid Hot Metal 0 – 70
4 HBI / DRI 0 – 100
5 Iron Carbide 0 - 50

The general trend in EAF steelmaking is to use either100% steel scrap or a mixture of
steel scrap, HBI/DRI, liquid/solid pig iron in different proportion. Selection of charge
mix depends upon availability of charge materials and quality of steel with respect to
acceptable tramp materials. As some of the tramp materials can not be easily removed
during steel making. Only way to minimize content of such elements is through dilution.
DRI / HBI, iron carbide, liquid hot metal, etc. are some of the materials, which could be
used as dilutants.

The EAFs are also used for production of ferroalloys and other non-ferrous alloys, and for
production of phosphorus. Furnaces for these services are physically different from steel-
making furnaces and may operate on a continuous, rather than batch, basis. Continuous
process furnaces may also use paste-type (Soderberg) electrodes to prevent interruptions
due to electrode changes. Such furnaces are usually known as submerged arc furnaces,
because the electrode tips are buried in the slag/charge, and arcing occurs through the
slag, between the matte and the electrode. A steelmaking arc furnace, by comparison,
arcs in the open. The key is the electrical resistance, which generates the heat required.
The resistance in steelmaking furnace is the atmosphere, while in a submerged arc
furnace, it is slag or charge. The liquid metal formed in either furnace is too conductive
to form an effective heat-generating resistance.

3.1.3 Cupola furnace

India is fast emerging as an important global player in the casting sector of metallurgical
industry. Most foundries use cupolas using metallurgical coke. This is mainly due to the
stringent pollution control standards in the developed countries and the exponential
growth in automobile and machine tool sectors within the country. There is also a
growing awareness regarding pollution control levels in India in recent times and this is
perceived as a threat to the existence of these small-scale foundry units scattered in
various parts of the country unless best practicable means are implemented.

Foundry industry in India is well established. According to the recent World Census of
Castings by Modern Castings, USA, India ranks as number six country in the world
producing an estimated 6 MT of various grades of castings as per the International
Standards.

There are several foundry clusters. Each cluster is known for its type of products. Some
of the major clusters are Batala, Jalandhar, Ludhiana, Belgaum, Chennai, Kolhapur,
Rajkot, Coimbatore, Howrah, Agra, Pune and Rajkot.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-4 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

3.2 Scientific Aspects of Industrial Processes

3.2.1 Electric steel making

All metal melting electric furnaces can be divided into three groups according to the
methods by which electric energy is transferred into heat.

̇ Induction Furnaces: In these furnaces, electromagnetic induction is used to heat the

metal. An alternating current supplied to a primary coil (inductor) sets up a variable
magnetic field around that coil. The variable magnetic flux in turn induces an
electromotive force in the secondary circuit (metallic charge), so that the metal is
melted by the alternating current formed in it.

̇ EAF: In furnaces of this type, the electric energy is used to form an electric arc which
heats the metal by radiant heat evolved. This can be further sub-divided as:

- Direct Arc Furnace: Electric arcs are formed between the electrodes and metal
being heated, which is thus a component of the electric circuit and is heated by
radiation from the arcs. They are used in steel making.
- Submerged Arc Furnace: The arcs burn under a cover of solid charge which
surrounds the electrodes. These are mostly used for ore smelting operations, in
particular for making ferro-alloys.
- Plasma Furnaces: The heat is evolved by a flow of pressurized ionized gas
supplied into the arc discharge zone. Plasma furnaces can produce very high
temperatures, up to 2000 0C. They are used for melting special steels, alloys and
pure metals.
̇ Resistance furnaces: In these furnaces, the heat is generated by special heating
elements and is transferred to the body to be heated by radiation and convection. The
body, which has a high electric resistivity, is heated directly by passing electric
current through it.

The EAF and induction furnaces are more commonly used in India for metal smelting.

3.2.1.1 Induction furnace

The application of induction heating for melting steels was first attempted at the
beginning of the 20th Century. Since then, induction heating has found very wide
applications in melting ferrous and non-ferrous metals, case hardening of parts and
heating of blanks before forging and stamping.

Induction melting process is being used for manufacturing aluminum, zinc, copper and
their alloys; cast iron of all types; carbon steel, and low alloy as well as high alloy steels.

From the standpoint of thermal engineering, an induction furnace is a merely perfect

plant, since the heat is generated in the place where it is to be consumed.

Induction furnaces may be with or without iron core. The first iron core induction
furnace for melting steel was built by Kjellin of Sweden in 1901. In 1916, Northrup of
the USA put a coreless induction furnace into industrial application.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-5 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

A. Iron-core induction furnace

Two main types of iron-core furnaces exist: (i) furnace with an open horizontal channel
and (ii) those with closed horizontal or vertical channel.

In the first type, metal is melted by an electric current induced in the metallic charge
hoper; in those with a closed channel, electric energy is induced in a narrow channel filled
with molten metal, while the solid charge in the furnace shaft is heated by the overheated
metal that circulates in the channel. This is shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2: Open Top Iron Core Induction Furnace

Note: 1. Channel with molten metal, 2. Inductor, 3. Core

Furnaces with an open annular channel could not compete with other types of melting
plants due to some limitations.

B. Closed channel furnaces

Closed channel induction furnaces with an iron core have found wide applications for re-
melting non-ferrous metals and as mixers to heat conversion iron in foundry shops. As
shown in Figure 3-3, a closed channel furnace comprises a cylindrical shaft (1), made of
sheet iron and lined with refractory materials, and a bottom block (2) which is enclosed in
a detachable cast shell (3). An inductor (4) is placed into the central portion of the iron
core in hole provided in the bottom block. The metal that fills a narrow channel in the
bottom block is heated by the induced current. After being placed into the shaft, the
charge is melted owing to the intensive circulation of molten metal. The oxidation loss of
non-ferrous metal during melting is not high, as the metal is being superheated in the
closed channel, its vapours condense on the colder metal of the shaft.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-6 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Figure 3-3: Closed Channel Iron Core Induction Furnace

Note:

(a). Furnace with vertical closed channel; 1. Shaft, 2. Bottom block, 3. Builtup shell, 4. Inductor,
5. Core

(b). Furnace with horizontal closed channel, 1. Furnace, 2. Charging door, 3. Core, 4. Inductor,
5. Hydraulic tilting mechanism, 6. Ventilators, 7. Control board, 8. Contactors

Among the drawbacks of the closed channel furnaces are the relatively cold slag, the
necessity to leave around 20% of the mass of the previous charge as ‘heel’ in the furnace
and low durability of the bottom block when melting high melting temperature metals.

C. Coreless induction furnace

Ferrous metallurgy mostly uses core-less (or high frequency) induction furnace. The
assembly of this type consists of a crucible within a water-cooled copper coil and a
framework on which the supports are arranged for tilting during pouring. The primary
circuit is formed by the coil, and the secondary circuit is the crucible or, rather, the charge
in it. The lines of magnetic force link through the charge and induce eddy current in it,

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-7 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

and the later generates heat. The magnetic field and electro-dynamic forces acting in the
crucible of an induction furnace and the electro-dynamic circulation of metal in the
crucible of an induction furnace is shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4: Magnetic Field and Electro-dynamic Forces acting in the Crucible of an
Induction Furnace and Electro-dynamic Circulation of Metal in the Crucible of an
Induction Furnace
The electromotive force of induction E (in V) is:

E = 4.44 max fn10-8

Where,

n = number of the inductor turns

max = magnetic flux density

f = alternating current frequency, Hz

If max drops, the required electromotive force of induction can be maintained by

increasing the current frequency. Based on frequency of current supplied, the induction
furnaces can be classified into three types:

High frequency 200 to 1000 kHz, operating with valve generators. These are mostly
used for making high alloy steels or refractory metals and alloys
Medium frequency 500 to 10,000 Hz, supplied with rotary or thyristor converters.
These are used for all types of steel melting
Low frequency 50 Hz, which are fed directly from mains. These are used for non-
ferrous as well as cast iron including malleable and spheroidal graphite
iron.

The density of induced currents attains its maximum at the surface of the charge and
lowers towards the middle. The depth of the surface layer of a metal (charge) where the
density of induced current is large is called penetration depth. The heat required to melt
the charge is developed mainly in that layer.

The penetration depth e (in cm) can be calculated using the formula:

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-8 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

e = 5.03 X 103 √ /µf

Where,

= resistivity of the charge, ohm.cm

µ = magnetic permeability, and

f = frequency, Hz

For iron at 200C, = 10-5 ohm.cm and µ = 100; but the moment iron looses its magnetic
properties (around 7500C), = 1.1X 10-4 ohm.cm and µ = 1.0.

The lowest frequency for a given metal at its Curie point is determined by the formula:

fmin ≥ 2.5 X 109( /d2)

where,

d = mean diameter of the crucible in cm

This means large furnaces require lower frequency than smaller ones.

The energy W (in W) that is transformed into heat in the charge is given by formula:

W = I2n22 2(d/h)√ µf.10-9

Where,

I = current in the inductor, A

h = depth of metal in the crucible, cm

The product (In) is called ampere-turns. The energy that is transformed into heat in the
charge is directly proportional to the square of ampere-turns and the square root of
resistivity and frequency.

Coreless induction furnaces possess certain advantages over EAFs as listed below:

̇ since there are no electrodes, it is possible to melt steels very low in carbon
̇ the absence of arcs ensures that the metal is very low in gasses
̇ alloying additions are oxidized only insignificantly and the furnace productivity is
high
̇ temperature of the process can be controlled quite accurately
However, there are limitations of coreless induction furnaces for melting steel as the slag
is heated only by the bath, and this may not be enough for it to melt. For this reason, slag
assisted refining is out of question and the melting of charges of clean metals and alloys
of known analysis is the principle field of the coreless induction furnaces. Thus, slag
inclusion in the bath does not pose much problem. This also helps to keep the
environment clean. Limited oxidation, high temperature, intimate stirring, and no
electrodes to carburise the melt all serve to produce alloy steels and composite alloys

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-9 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

extremely low in carbon. In case carbon in bath is high, sponge iron is added to reduce it.
It will also reduce sulphur and phosphorus content.

D. Induction Furnace Process

In a typical ferrous smelting case, the materials used for melting in induction furnaces
consists of the elements as mentioned in Table 3-4 below:

Table 3-4: Typical Composition of Input Materials for Induction Furnace

Composition (%) Min. Max.

Steel Scrap
Carbon (C) 0.15 0.30
Manganese (Mn) 0.60 1.00
Silicon (Si) 0.15 0.35
Phosphorus (P) 0.04 0.06
Sulphur (S) 0.04 0.06
Sponge Iron
Carbon (C) 0.05 0.20
Fe (total) 90.00 92.00
Gangue or non-metallics Balance
Hot Briquetted Iron (HBI)
Carbon (C) 0.7 1.2
FeO 6.00 8.00
Fe (metallics) 90.00 92.00
Non-metallics Balance
Cast Iron Scrap
Carbon (C) 3.30 4.0
Phosphorous (P) 0.1 0.45
Sulphur (S) 0.15 0.25
Manganese (Mn) 0.70 0.85
Silicon (Si) 1.50 2.8

First, cast iron scrap of above chemical composition is melted in the furnace. The
quantity of cast iron scrap is only 5%. This is done to make a pool of liquid metal to
enable steel scrap to melt faster in the furnace. The steel scrap charged is having carbon
content within specification limit of mild steel. Small quantity of lime is used to flux out
the oxidized elements which form slag. The slag formed is maximum 2% of charge. No
oxygen lancing is done. The following reactions occur:

Fe + O2 Fe2O3 1% Fe is lost

C + O2 CO +CO2 0.5% C is lost

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-10 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Si + O2 SiO2 0.5% Si is lost

P + O2 + Ca CaPO4 0.05% P is lost

The molten metal will, therefore, have the chemical composition having all elements as
per specification because the presence of cast iron scrap in small quantity does not
influence in increase of any element.

Sponge iron addition is done along with charge up to a maximum of 40% depending on
the bath chemistry. Sponge iron has carbon less than 0.2%, which in fact dilutes excess
carbon in steel scrap. If HBI is used, it is a great advantage in reducing carbon content of
bath. FeO present in HBI reduces the carbon content.

FeO + C CO + Fe

If carbon in bath is in excess of 0.3%, more HBI is used. Thus refining is carried out.
Ferroalloys are added to molten metal but this addition does not lead to any air pollution
as the alloys dissolve in molten metal.

3.2.1.2 Electric arc steel-making furnaces

Heroult of France has now become almost universal. An EAF is a furnace that heats
charged material by means of an electric arc. They range in size from small units of
approximately one tonne capacity (used in foundries for producing cast iron products) up
to about 400 tonne units used for secondary steelmaking. Arc furnaces used in research
laboratories and by dentists may have a capacity of only a few dozen grams. EAF
temperatures can be up to 1,800 oC. Figure 3-5 shows a modern EAF.

Figure 3-5: A Modern EAF

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-11 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

The furnace has a steel shell in the form of a tapered cylinder with a spherical bottom.
The shell has a refractory lining inside. The reaction chamber of the furnace is covered
from above by a removable roof made of refractory bricks held by a roof ring. The
furnace has a main charging door and a tap hole with tapping spout. It is fed with a three
phase alternating current and has three electrodes fastened in electrode clamps which are
connected by means of a sleeve with a movable electrode stand. Current is supplied via
water cooled flexible cables and water cooled copper tubes. The furnace rests upon two
support sectors which can roll on the furnace stand to tilt the furnace towards the main
door and towards the tap hole for tapping, the tilting motion being affected by a rack
mechanism.

The furnace is charged from the top by means of a pan. To open the reaction chamber for
charging, the furnace roof which is suspended from chains is raised up to the gantry. The
latter together with the roof and electrodes, can be swung towards the tapping spout. A
rotating mechanism is provided to rotate the furnace shell through an angle of 40 degrees
in both directions from the normal position. The furnace also has an electromagnetic
stirring device for intermixing of molten metal.

Although electricity provides most of the energy for EAF steelmaking, supplemental
heating from oxy-fuel and oxygen injection is used. The major advantage of EAF
steelmaking is that it does not require molten iron supply. By eliminating the need for
blast furnaces and associated plant processes like coke oven batteries, EAF technology
has facilitated the proliferation of mini-mills, which can operate economically at a smaller
scale than larger integrated steelmaking. EAF steelmaking can use a wide range of scrap
types, as well as DRI and molten iron (up to 70%). This recycling saves virgin raw
materials and the energy required for converting them. The EAF operates as a batch
melting process, producing heats of molten steel with tap-to- tap times for modern
furnaces of less than 60 minutes.

Arc furnace process

Steel in arc furnace may be refined with or without oxidation. Oxidation may be
dispensed where the metal ingredients of the charge are close to the desired steel grade in
analysis. In such case, a reducing slag is used both in melting and refining (single
refining or single slag practice). Usually, this process is used to smelt alloy wastes to
alloy steel. In working with oxidation, the charge is melted and refined under an
oxidizing slag or ‘black slag’ (the slag is called ‘black’ due to the colour it is given by the
iron oxide), removing phosphorous and/or carbon almost completely; then the ‘black
slag’ is removed and a reducing or ‘white slag’ containing lime, fluorspar, silica, carbon
and/or ferrosilicon made up, giving a very high degree of desulpherisation and good
deoxidation. Additions of the required ferroalloys are made during this stage, or
sometimes to the ladle.

The principal processes in the oxidizing period are (i) removal of phosphorous, (ii)
oxidation of silicon and manganese, (iii) removal of sulphur, (iv) removal of nitrogen and
hydrogen, (v) removal of non-metallic inclusions, (vi) heating of the metal, (vii) reboil,
and (viii) carbonization of metal. A modern development in arc furnace practice is the
use of an oxygen lance for injecting high pressure oxygen into the bath, during the
oxidation period. This removes carbon more rapidly than by ore alone. Lancing does not
need an arc for heating. The use of oxygen lance has special advantage in the
manufacture of stainless steel. If oxygen is blown into the metal, exothermic reactions
prevail in the bath, the metal is heated up quickly, and it is possible to switch off the
current as soon as the carbon begins to burn intensively.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-12 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

The aims of the reducing period during the melt in a basic EAF are (i) deoxidation of the
metal, (ii) removal of sulphur, (iii) adjustment of the steel composition to specifications,
(iv) control of the bath temperature, and (v) preparation of well oxidized free running
highly basic slag, which can be used for of-furnace treatment of the metal in the ladle.
The reducing period can be shortened considerably if the metal is treated with argon or
synthetic slag or deoxidized in the ladle.

3.2.2 Non electric steel making

3.2.2.1 Cupola furnace

The use of cupola furnaces is one of the oldest processes for making cast iron and is still
among the dominant technologies in the world.

The construction of a conventional cupola consists of a vertical steel shell which is lined
with a refractory brick. The charge is introduced into the furnace body by means of an
opening approximately half way up the vertical shaft. The charge consists of alternate
layers of the metal to be melted, coke fuel and limestone flux. The fuel is burnt in air
which is introduced through tuyeres positioned above the hearth. The hot gases generated
in the lower part of the shaft ascend and preheat the descending charge.

Most cupolas are of the drop bottom type with hinged doors under the hearth, which
allows the bottom to drop away at the end of melting to aid cleaning and repairs. At the
bottom front is a taphole for the molten iron; at the rear, positioned above the taphole is a
slaghole. The top of the stack is capped with a spark/fume arrester hood.

Typical internal diameters of cupolas are 450 mm to 2000 mm diameter which can be
operated on different fuel to metal ratios, giving melt rates of approximately 1-30 tonnes
per hour.

A typical cupola furnace is shown in Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6: Typical Cupola Furnace

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-13 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

A typical operation cycle for a cupola would consist of closing and propping the bottom
hinged doors and preparing a hearth bottom. The bottom is usually made from low
strength moulding sand and slopes towards a tapping hole. A fire is started in the hearth
using light weight timber, coke is charged on top of the fire and is burnt by increasing the
air draught from the tuyeres. Once the coke bed is ignited and of the required height,
alternate layers of metal, flux and coke are added until the level reaches the charged
doors. The metal charge would typically consist of pig iron, scrap steel and domestic
returns.

Once the furnace is sufficiently filled with fuel and crude material, air is blasted into the
combustion mixture, increasing the temperature inside the furnace. Some furnaces have
special devices that insert pure oxygen gas into the furnace's interior. When burned in the
presence of oxygen, the high-carbon coke fuel undergoes a chemical reaction to produce
the gases carbon monoxide and dioxide, which diffuse through nearby molten metal and
increase its carbon levels. An air blast is introduced through the wind box and tuyeres
located near the bottom of the cupola. The air reacts chemically with the carbonaceous
fuel thus producing heat of combustion.

Soon after the blast is turned on, molten metal collects on the hearth bottom where it is
eventually tapped out into a waiting ladle or receiver. As the metal is melted and fuel
consumed, additional charges are added to maintain a level at the charging door and
provide a continuous supply of molten iron.

At the end of the melting campaign, charging is stopped but the air blast is maintained
until all of the metal is melted and tapped off. The air is then turned off and the bottom
doors opened allowing the residual charge material to be dumped.

The process can be briefly described as follows:

̇ The charge, consisting of metal, alloying ingredients, limestone, and coal coke for
fuel and carbonisation (8-16% of the metal charge), is fed in alternating layers
through an opening in the cylinder.
̇ Air enters the bottom through tuyeres extending a short distance into the interior of
the cylinder. The air inflow often contains enhanced oxygen levels.
̇ Coke is consumed. The hot exhaust gases rise up through the charge, preheating it.
This increases the energy efficiency of the furnace. The charge drops and is melted.
̇ Although air is fed into the furnace, the environment is a reducing one. Burning of
coke under reducing conditions raises the carbon content of the metal charge to the
casting specifications.
̇ As the material is consumed, additional charges can be added to the furnace.
̇ A continuous flow of iron emerges from the bottom of the furnace.
̇ Depending on the size of the furnace, the flow rate can be as high as 100 tonnes per
hour. At the metal melts it is refined to some extent, which removes contaminants.
This makes this process more suitable than electric furnaces for dirty charges.
̇ A hole higher than the tap allows slag to be drawn off.
̇ The exhaust gases emerge from the top of the cupola. Emission control technology is
used to treat the emissions to meet environmental standards.
̇ Hinged doors at the bottom allow the furnace to be emptied when not in use.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-14 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

3.2.3 Manufacturing process in the context of environmental pollution

3.2.3.1 Induction furnace

Only air pollution occurs and no water or noise pollution takes place in induction furnace.
The scrap charge when melted emits metallurgical smoke due to oxidation having solid
particles as well as gaseous pollutants. The steel melting scrap charge may have dust and
rust which on heating disintegrates from metal. Some refractory lining may also
contribute to the solid pollutants. Thus the solid pollutants will consist of suspended
particulate matters of iron oxide, alumina, silica, magnesia, calcium oxide and alkali
oxides. The gaseous pollutants will consist of CO, CO2, HC, and small proportion of
SO2. In case scrap consists of galvanized parts, small percentage of volatilized zinc can
be found in gases.

3.2.3.2 Electric arc furnace

EAF exerts air emissions, wastewater and solid waste which lead to impacts on air, water
and land.

Steel can be produced from scrap steel in an EAF in which the scrap is melted. The scrap
is usually preheated in a specific furnace and loaded together with lime or dololime,
which are used as flux for slag formation. It is normal to charge about 50-60 % of the
scrap initially. The electrodes are then lowered to the scrap. Within 20-30 mm above the
scrap they strike an arc. After the first charge has been melted, the remainder of the scrap
is added. During the initial period of melting, the applied power is kept low to prevent
damage to the furnace walls and roof from radiation, while allowing the electrodes to bore
into the scrap. As soon as the arcs have become shielded by the surrounding scrap, the
power is increased to complete melting. Oxygen lances and/or oxy-fuel burners are
frequently used to assist in the early stages of melting. Oxygen may be added to the
liquid steel by specific nozzles in the bottom or side wall of the EAF. Fuels include
natural gas and oil. Sponge iron can replace scrap to a considerable extent. Hot metal in
proportion of maximum 70% can also be added.

A. Gas cleaning

Modern large steel making arc furnaces eject a large amount of dust laden gases into the
atmosphere. The use of oxygen and powdered materials aggravates the problem. The
content of dust in the gaseous emissions may vary between 1 to 10 g/m3 in various
periods of furnace operation – much exceeding the emission norms. Therefore the
problem of dust collection and cleaning is quite critical.

EAFs generate particulate matter during melting; oxygen injection and decarbonizing
phases (primary off-gas emissions); and charging / tapping (secondary off-gas emissions).
The primary emissions contain considerable carbon monoxide (CO) along with dust.
Sources of CO include waste gases from the EAF. CO is generated from the oxidation of
coke in smelting and reduction processes, and from the oxidation of the graphite
electrodes and the carbon from the metal bath during melting and refining phases in
EAFs.

The most effective system of primary gas removal is individual gas removal via the roof
aperture. The gases are exhausted by forming a negative pressure within a range of 1.25

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-15 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

to 2.5 mm H2O. To prevent the possible explosion of CO, which evolves from the
furnace during the oxidation period, the system is provided with a means to suck in
excess air from a gap in the ducting system, generally at elbow. This mixes with furnace
gases and ensures complete combustion in the gas cleaning system. The primary
emissions are collected from EAF casing by water cooled ducts, excess CO burnt, gases
cooled and discharged to atmosphere after cleaning in a fabric filter or any suitable dust
collection system.

The volume of primary gas generation depends upon the decarburization rate of the
charge. In case, a reasonable EAF size is limited to approximately 150 t (specially DC
type), a tap-to-tap time of 1 hr. or less has to be maintained. This leads to the
consequence that the power on/oxygen on time must not exceed a maximum of 45 min.,
and the available time for decarburization is approx. 40 min. If a charge mixture to be
refined during this time period, consisting approximately 50% hot metal, 35% sponge
iron, 10% revert scrap and 5% pool iron (i.e., cold pig iron), a decarburization rate of
about 0.1% C/min is to be achieved in place of 0.05% C/min. in conventional refining.
For example, in EAF of 130 t capacity and decarburization rate of 0.1% C/min, oxygen
blowing rate of 6000 Nm3/h. is required to convert C to CO. The calculated quantity of
primary gas works out to about 31,600 Nm3/h at a gas temperature of about 17000C.
Further, for complete combustion of CO to CO2, another 80,000 Nm3/h of atmospheric air
at 40 0C is needed which also cools the gases before entering water cooled duct, and
cooled gases of amount 111,600 N m3/h at 6000C is generated. This may need further
cooling before entering gas cooler, thus may require air dilution.

The fugitive emissions from secondary off-gas emissions i.e., scrap charging, oxygen
blowing, tapping, hot metal transfer, and slag handling are usually collected by local
hooding and de-dusted in the same fabric filters after a mixing chamber. Also, at mixing
chamber, provision for emergency cooling is to be kept to protect the fabric filters.

For a 130 t EAF, the fugitive emission during charging the EAF with roof removed is
about 880,000 Nm3/h. Figure 3-7 indicates a system of connecting 2 EAFs in a single gas
cleaning system for optimization. EAF 1 is charging and maximum fugitive emission of
880,000 Nm3/h at 650C is sucked through canopy. EAF 2 is melting with primary suction
of 31,600 Nm3/h at 17000C; dilution air of 80,000 Nm3/h at 50oC for complete
combustion of CO to CO2; and further dilution air of 30,000 Nm3/h at 50 oC reducing
temperature further. The canopy over EAF 2 also sucks 670,000 Nm3/h at 50 oC to
control fugitive emission from leakages. The volume controls are done through auto
dampers to regulate flow. The mixed air goes to a gas cooler and then to a fabric filter
and fan before discharging to atmosphere. Many such combinations can be made
judiciously (like both EAFs melting/one melting – one carging) to optimize gas cleaning
plant capacity in case there are more than one EAFs in a single melt shop.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-16 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Figure 3-7: Two EAFs connected – A Typical Case

Design of canopy for control of fugitive emission is of utmost importance. The size of
canopy can be found out from Figure. 3-8 and the following formula:

H = 0.437 C 0.88; A = 2.58 W1.138;

Where,

H = Hood dia (m); W = Furnace dia (m);

P = Theoretical point; Hood face velocity = 0.5 – 1.0 m/s;

Figure 3-8: Conopy Size Over EAF

Minor emissions of particulates arise from ladle metallurgy processes and vacuum
degassing and they are usually collected and cleaned by fabric filters – separate or
common.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-17 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Recommended measures to prevent and control particulate matter emissions from EAFs
include:

̇ Quick cooling of gas followed by bag filters. The bag filters can be primed with
absorbents (e.g. lime or carbon) to further capture volatile impurities;

̇ Use of direct off-gas extraction and canopy hood enclosures and cleaning.

Recommended pollution prevention and control techniques to reduce CO emissions

include the use of foamy slag practices in EAF process.

B. Chlorides and fluorides

HF and HCl may arise from off-gas in the EAF process, depending on the quality of the
scrap charged. Recommended pollution prevention and control techniques include:

̇ Use of dry dedusting or wet scrubbing techniques, which are also typically installed
to control particulate matter and sulphur oxide emissions respectively;

̇ Control the input of chlorine via raw materials through the materials selection
process;

̇ Avoid spraying with sea water;

C. VOCs and organic HAPs

Volatile organic compounds (VOC) and polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH) may
be emitted from various stages in steel manufacturing from the EAF, especially when coal
is added as a ‘nest’ to the scrap basket. PAH may also be present in the EAF scrap input,
and may also be formed during EAF operation. Recommended pollution prevention and
control techniques for VOC emissions include the following process integrated measures:

̇ Pre-treat mill scales through practices such as pressure washing to reduce oil content
̇ Optimize operation practices, particularly combustion and temperature controls
̇ Minimize oil input via mill scale through use of “good housekeeping” techniques
D. Dioxins and furans

Potential PCDD/F emissions source is off-gas in the EAF. The potential presence of
polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB), PVC, and other organics in the scrap input (shredded
scrap mainly obtained from old equipment or ship breakings) may be a source of concern,
due to its high potential for PCDD/F formation. Recommended techniques to prevent and
control PCDD/F emissions include the following:

̇ Use of clean scrap for melting

̇ Use of post combustion of the EAF off-gas to achieve temperatures above 1200 °C,
and maximizing residence time at this temperature. The process is completed with a
rapid quenching to minimize time in the dioxin reformation temperature range

̇ Use of oxygen injection to ensure complete combustion

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-18 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

̇ Injection of additive powders (e.g. activated carbons) into the gas stream to adsorb
dioxins before the dust removal by filtration (with subsequent treatment as a
hazardous waste)

̇ Installation of fabric filters with catalytic oxidation systems

E. Metals

Heavy metals may be present in off-gas fumes from thermal processes. The amount of
metal emissions depends on the particular process type and on the composition of raw
materials (scrap). Particulates from the EAF may contain zinc (which has the highest
emission factor in EAFs, particularly if galvanized steel scrap is used); cadmium; lead;
nickel; mercury; manganese; and chromium. Metal particulate emissions should be
controlled with high efficiency dust abatement techniques applied to particulate emissions
control as discussed above. Gaseous metal emissions are typically controlled through the
cooling of gases followed by bag filters.

F. Wastewater

Major share of wastewater is generated from indirect cooling of furnace shell and water
cooled duct. This wastewater is passed through the cooling towers after removal of oil
and grease and recycled. Some effluent may be generated by the degassing process.

G. Solid Waste

Solid wastes from this industry primarily include steel skulls, slag, and waste refractories.
Other solid wastes include sludge from effluent treatment and dust from dry dust
collectors. Dust may contain dioxins and furans due to largely external (dirty) scrap
consumption. The steel skulls are usually recycled, and other solid wastes are recycled,
when appropriate, or disposed of in a landfill site.

EAFs produce a significant amount of slag, which is crushed and screened for recycle or
sale. If reuse of EAF slag is not financially or technically feasible, it should be disposed
off, along with the dust from the treatment of off-gas, in a landfill designed with
consideration of slag and dust characteristics in line with Hazardous Waste (Management
and Handling) Rules, Government of India. Local geological conditions should also be
considered when locating slag heaps.

H. Noise

Raw and product material handling as well as the production processes within EAF,
transport and ventilation systems may generate excessive noise levels. Recommended
techniques to prevent, reduce, and control noise include the following:

̇ Enclose the process buildings and/or insulate structures

̇ Enclose fans, insulate ventilation pipes, and use dampers
̇ Adopt foaming slag practice in EAFs
̇ Limitation of scrap handling and transport during night time, where required
Table 3-5 provides examples of emission and waste generation indicators. World Bank
(WB) – International Finance Corporation (IFC)- industry benchmark values are provided

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-19 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

here are for comparative purposes only and individual projects should target continual
improvement in these areas.

Table 3-5: Emission / Waste Generation

Outputs per unit of product Unit Industry Benchmark

Emissions (1) (2) EAF

Particulate Matter kg/t product 0.02
CO kg/t product 0.75- 4
NOx kg/t product 0.12-0.25
PCDD/F µgI TEQ/ t product 0.07- 9
Waste(1)
Solid Waste kg/t product 110- 180
1. European Commission, IPPC, “BREF Document on the Production of Iron and Steel” and
“Reference Document in BAT in the Ferrous Metals Processing Industry” December 2001
2. UK Environmental Agency 2001, 2002. Technical Guidance Notes. IPPC S2.01, S2.04.
Benchmark values.

3.2.4 Specific consumption factors

3.2.4.1 Induction furnace

A coreless induction furnace is an efficient periodic action melting plant. The use of
refractories per tonne of steel produced is at a minimum in these types of furnaces. A
furnace of an output of 1 t/h has a refractory lining not more than 100 mm thick with a
total mass of only 160 kg. The lining of an arc furnace of the same output weighs about 7
t.

An important index of furnace operation is the use of electric energy. The power supplied
to a medium frequency induction furnace producing carbon steel may be distributed as
follows:

Losses in converter 12-28%

Losses in capacitor and wiring 5-6%
Losses in inductor 11-16%
Radiant heat losses 8-10%
Heating of metal and slag 52-62%

With the total efficiency of the plant of 0.57, the use of electric energy is around 630
kWh/t steel melted, i.e., only 10-30 kWh higher than that of a 3 t arc furnace melting
scrap. The average use of electric energy in mains frequency furnaces is 550 kWh/t when
melting foundry pig iron and around 730 kWh/t when melting steel for casting.

It should be remembered that the induction furnaces do not involve a loss of alloying
elements, there is no loss of electrodes, and labour expenditure is low.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-20 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

The following measures are essential for improving techno economic indices of induction
furnaces:

̇ Install a sufficiently powerful generator

̇ Place the capacitors as close as close as possible to the furnace, since a high current
flows in the capacitor’s furnace circuit
̇ Install two inductors per generator
̇ Carefully select and weigh the charge so as to minimize the number of samplings
during a heat
̇ Control the temperature of the cooling water so as to avoid needless wastage
3.2.4.2 EAF

A. Electrodes

An important characteristic of an EAF heat is the consumption of electrodes per tonne of

steel produced. The types of electrodes used are carbon and graphite electrodes. The
graphite electrodes are much superior to carbon electrodes as they have a 4 to 5 time
greater electrical connectivity, which allows high current densities to be employed and
lowers electrical losses. Graphite electrodes begin to oxidize at higher temperatures, can
be easily machined, and their consumption per tonne of steel is only one half that of
carbon electrodes. Graphite electrode consumption varies between 6 to 9 kg/ton, and that
of carbon electrodes between 15 to 18 kg or more. Due to this reason, even with its high
cost, graphite electrodes are popular. It has been observed that the consumption of
electrodes increases initially with increasing capacity of furnace and then start decreasing
beyond capacity of 40 tonne. At capacities more than 100 t, the electrode consumption
comes around 5 kilogram per tonne (kg/T) for properly designed furnaces.

The factors that determine consumption of electrodes are as follows:

̇ Oxidation of surface of electrodes in the furnace by oxygen in the sucked in air

̇ Mechanical losses owing to fracture of electrodes
̇ Atomization by electric arc
̇ Dissolution in the slag during bath boil
The consumption of electrodes depends on furnace capacities, method and conditions of a
heat, and also on the effective sealing of the electrode ports and the furnace doors.
Approximately, two third of the total consumption of electrodes result from their
oxidation due to poorly sealed furnace or a long operation with the furnace door left open.

The main rules of proper maintenance of electrodes during operation are as follows:

̇ Electrodes must be kept in dry place; if moisture is present in the electrodes,

longitudinal or transverse cracks can form during rapid heating of the furnace,
resulting in breakage

̇ The leakage of furnace gases through the gaps in the roof at the electrodes must be
eliminated; this will lower the heating of the electrodes and their oxidation by
atmospheric oxygen

̇ Electrode sections should be screwed tightly together

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-21 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

̇ The electrode holes in the roof should be positioned accurately; electrodes should
move freely without touching the sealing rings and roof lining; if an electrode is
subjected to lateral pressure during lowering, it may break

̇ The diameter of electrodes should correspond to the current supplied; if the current
density is excessively high, electrodes will be heated and oxidized vigorously; if the
electrode diameter is excessively large, energy consumption will be above normal

B. Electric Power / Oxygen

The performance of EAFs is assessed in terms of daily output in tons per 1000 kVA of
power. Daily output is a function of nominal furnace capacity, working conditions, and
the process adopted. On average, it is 3-14 tonnes per 1000 kVA. Energy consumption
is likewise governed by the three above factors and amounts to 500 – 700 kWh per tonne
for carbon steel up to 1000 kWh per tonne of alloy steel if only scrap is charged.

With increasing addition of liquid steel and HBI, considerable reduction in specific power
consumption has been recorded with increase of specific oxygen consumption. An
experiment with following performance procedure with changing charge mix was done as
shown in Table 3-6.

Table 3-6: Performance Procedure

Trial Hot metal HBI (Midrex) Scrap* (%)

step (%) (%)

1 30 30 40
2 40 40 20
3 45 35 20
4 50 35 15
* including 5% pool iron

With 30% hot metal, power consumption was around 400 kWh/t liquid steel and oxygen
consumption around 28 Nm3/t liquid steel. With 40% hot metal, this is around 300 kWh/
t liquid steel and around 35 Nm3/t liquid steel. The remarkable difference in power
consumption of approximately 100 kWh/t between 30% and 40% hot metal is not
significant because with 30% hot metal, it is necessary to first charge the scrap, then melt
down the scrap for approx. 9 min. to get space in the furnace for the hot metal. The
furnace is then switched off, the roof opened and the hot metal can be charged. This
operation causes additional losses compared to step 2 to 4 with 40% – 50% hot metal
input where the hot metal is poured to the scrap prior to power on after the end of
charging, the furnace is switched on and operated without interruption until the end of the
heat.

For 50% hot metal charging, specific power consumption values to approx. 250 kWh/t of
liquid steel and oxygen consumption of approximately 40 Nm3/t hot metal can be
achieved with silicon content of hot metal of 0.8%. Thus with higher hot metal charging
rates into the EAF, consumption of electric energy and electrodes can be reduced.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-22 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

3.2.4.3 Cupola furnace

Specific coke consumption norm in cupola per tonne of liquid metal is 135 kg/T (13.5
percentage charge coke). Experiments to replace coke with CNG are underway and no
specific patterns can be derived.

Energy audits of a range of cupolas were conducted by The Energy and Resources
Institute (TERI) in Howrah and Agra foundry clusters. The charge coke percentage,
which is a measure of energy efficiency of a cupola, was found to vary over a wide range.
The most energy efficient cupola was found to be using 13.6 % charge coke (coke:metal
:: 1:7.5) and the least energy efficient cupola was operating at a charge coke percentage of
26.5 (coke:metal :: 1:4).

3.3 Qualitative and quantitative analysis of rejects

3.3.1 Induction furnace

Considering the temperature of charge, the volume of pot and continuous charging of
input materials from the beginning up to a few minutes before tapping, it was found that
total volume of gases including inspiration of air from surrounding atmosphere may reach
a maximum of 6000 Nm3/h from a 1.5 to 2 t furnace. From test results it was found that
hydrocarbons are about 40 mg/l and CO+CO2 are less than 1 ppm. The SPM ranges from
125 to 450 mg/Nm3. If the charge consists of oily and highly rusted scrap, the SPM may
go to 1000 mg/Nm3. SO2 emission is less than 25 mg/Nm3. Suitable dust catcher like
cyclones and/or wet scrubbers may be needed.

Considering the mixed steel scrap and sponge iron charge used in melting, it is found out
that the particle size of dust varies from 0.7 to 80 µm and majority is between 0.7 to 7
µm. The SPM range in terms of weight will be 0.7 to 1.2 kg/t of steel or approximately
0.1% of steel scrap melted.

To make stainless steel ingots but using only induction furnace without using AOD
converters, the charge consist of stainless steel melting scrap and no mild steel or sponge
iron are used. To make up loss of manganese and chromium, low carbon ferrochrome
and ferromanganese are used. Some nickel and copper elements are added. None of
these inputs pose any environmental problems. Sometimes the turnings and borings in
stainless steel scrap may contain very small quantities of soapy substance or oil. Such
scrap is put in small furnace and heated to nearly 3000C. The test results show that SPM
level is low; nearly 120 mg/Nm3. In rare cases it increases more than 200 mg/Nm3. It is
learnt that some induction furnace units have installed simple exhaust systems and
cyclones to take care of the pollutants.

Though the emission from induction furnaces is much less as compared to EAF,
considering the probability of dirty charge composition and emission of pollutants, the
following is recommended:

̇ Induction furnaces should be provided with fume extraction and dedicated pollution
control systems consisting of swiveling hood, spark arrestor, bag filter or any other
suitable dust catcher, ID fan and stack of suitable height
̇ A secondary fume extraction system with adequate side suction should be provided to
prevent fugitive emissions during charging. The suction should be adequate to
control fugitive emissions

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-23 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Collected dust can be sold, provided it does not exhibit the properties of hazardous waste.

3.3.2 EAF

EAFs produce metal dusts, slag, and gaseous emissions. The primary hazardous
components of EAF dust are zinc, lead, and cadmium; nickel and chromium are present
when stainless steels are manufactured. The composition of EAF dust can vary greatly,
depending on scrap composition and furnace additives. EAF dust usually has a zinc
content of more than 15%, with a range of 5-35%. Other metals present in EAF dust
include lead (2-7%), cadmium (generally 0.1-0.2% but can be up to 2.5% where stainless
steel cases of nickel-cadmium batteries are melted), chromium (up to 15%), and nickel
(up to 4%). Generally, an EAF produces 10 kg of dust per ton (kg/T) of steel, with a
range of 5-30 kg/T, depending on factors such as furnace characteristics and scrap quality.

The EAF emissions are usually generated from three sources: charging, melting, and
tapping. Melting emission (primary gases) can be captured by a fourth hole suction on
the EAF casing. The quantity of primary gases exhausted from EAFs are to be calculated
based on the oxygen flow rate to decarburize the charge and fresh air needed to burn CO
to CO2 for safety. Though cooling of the gas is done by the water cooled ducts, additional
cooling air is needed to bring down temperature to suit fabric filter. In approximate
calculations, the amount of process gases exhausted from the furnaces, in case of
inspiration of air may be taken as 350 – 450 Nm3/T of crude steel.

Charging and tapping emissions are fugitive and gets released into the shop as a rising
plume. The quantity may be 10 times or more of the primary fumes generation. Fume
contained in the rising plume has to be exhausted from the melt shop by a roof mounted
canopy. The evacuation system should be able to extract these emissions instantaneously
as the arriving scrap bucket and cranes dispense them. The volume flow rate and
emission level in the mushroom cloud is also increased if the steel maker places additives
such as coal and lime into the scrap bucket. The following Table 3-7 summarizes the
most important air emissions in EAF. The high temperature generated in the furnaces by
the electric arc also brings about the formation of Cyanides and Fluorides.

Table 3-7: Air Emissions from Electric Arc Furnace

Emissions kg/T iron produced

CO 0.5 - 19
Nox 0.02 - 0.3
VOC 0.03 - 0.15
Pb 0.005 - 0.05
PM 6.3
Source: Egyptian Pollution Abatement Project (EPAP)

An immense amount of heat, gases and fumes are generated during melting. Carbon
monoxide (CO) can be generated in the production of steel in an EAF during
decarburization of charge. Carbon containing compounds in the additives, scrap
contamination, and particularly the foamy slag practice are the source of these emissions;
(2.5 kg CO, 50 g SO2, 0.25 kg NO2, 100 g particulate) per tonne cast product. As the
furnace contents are heated to approximately 1600oC, any metals that volatilize below this
temperature will be carried away by the furnace off-gases. Thus, extremely fine dust is

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-24 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

formed as the result of evaporation of metal in the field of action of electric arc; the metal
vapours are condensed and react with oxygen and nitrogen present in the furnace. The
coarser fractions of dust are produced from the slag forming materials and ground
reducing agents. When coke, coal, or limestone is injected into the furnace, fine
particulates of these commodities may be drawn into the off-gas system. In EAF steel
making, a fair amount of heavy solid particulate get injected into the off-gas. A furnace
using the foamy slag practice can expect to collect 12 kg of dust per tonne of molten steel,
but one could expect to collect more with unfavorable oxygen injection practices or too
small a fourth hole due to large suction velocity. Furnace spout and furnace bottom
tapping produce similar emissions. The emissions are mostly iron oxide and slag
particulate. However, almost all EAF steel making processes add alloying elements of
the ladle while tapping. This procedure can significantly increase tapping fume
evolution. Therefore, the emissions, also, contain particulate consisting of oxides of these
additives.

The Table 3-8 below shows the amount of dust exhausted from EAF per tonne of steel for
different capacities of EAFs:

Table 3-8: Amount of Dust Exhausted from EAF per Tonne of Steel

Capacity of Content of dust in gases,

furnace, (tons) (g/m3)

5 27
10 22
20 18
40 14
100 15

When steel is produced from dirty, rusty and small size scrap, the amount of dust can be
twice the amount as given in Table 3-8. However, when reaching the fabric filter, this
concentration will come down due to dilution by the addition of in leakage air, but may
still remain between 1 to 10 g/m3.

During the production of steel in electric furnaces, traces of zinc in the charge volatilize
due to the high temperature and condense in the dust collecting system as fine particles.
This dust was usually discarded or sent to landfill. However, it was realized later that
zinc in the dust may get solubilized and may contaminate surface or subterranean water.
Processes were therefore developed to treat the dust to recover its zinc values before
disposal.

3.3.3 Cupola furnace

Toxic emissions from cupolas include both organic and inorganic materials, which may
be emitted directly or indirectly. Cupolas are the primary process of melting in foundries
and also produce the most toxic emissions. It is estimated that 68.8 % of all the health
risk from foundries is from foundries with cupolas. The emission factors are as given in
Table 3-9.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-25 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Table 3-9: Cupola Furnace Emissions Criteria

Description Value (mg/Mg Metal Melted)

PM 10 6.2 x 106
VOC 9 x 104
NOx 5 X104
CO 7.25 X107
SO2 1.8 X103
(Source USEPA August 1990)

The cupola organic emissions factors which are of primary concern are:

̇ halogenated hydrocarbons: 1.92 mg/T metal melted

̇ aromatic hydrocarbons: 1.70 mg/T metal melted
̇ halogenated aromatics: 1.70 mg/T metal melted
̇ silicones: 0.43 mg/T metal melted
̇ heterocyclic N compounds: 0.16 mg/T metal melted
̇ amines: 0.14 mg/T metal melted
Inorganic emission factors for cupolas could not be obtained for most elements, however,
the following emission factors are available:

̇ Arsenic: 26.1 mg/T

̇ Lead: 5 x 104 - 5.5 x 105 mg/T
̇ Manganese: 1.25 x 105 mg/T
̇ Copper: 8.5 x 102 mg/T
Source: Criteria Emission, Cupola, USEPA August, 1990.
It is well-known that toxic inorganics such as cadmium and mercury are emitted during
melting processes, notably the cupola, if present in the raw materials charged into the
furnace. Individual cupola emissions vary widely, depending on the blast rate, blast
temperature, melt rate, the coke to melt ratio and raw material composition. Although
emission factors are not applicable to all cupolas because of this wide variation, emissions
data per specific cupola may be used to project future emissions in the presence of
process changes.

The impurities in raw materials may contribute to higher emission factors for halogenated
hydrocarbons in cupolas and EAFs. High emission readings for chromium, lead and
mercury are probably related to scrap quality and cleanliness. Dirty, oily and low quality
metallic raw materials fed to the furnace charge preparation process will result in more
emissions from the melting unit.

3.3.4 Exposure pathway

Exposure pathway is the path due to which exposure of the receptor takes place.
“Exposure” is defined as contact with a chemical or physical agent. It is the process by
which an organism acquires a dose. The estimation of exposure of a target organism
requires an exposure scenario that answers to four questions:

̇ given the output of fate models, which media (ecosystem components) are
significantly contaminated

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-26 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

̇ to which contaminated media are the target organisms exposed

̇ how are they exposed (pathways and rates of exposure)

̇ given an initial exposure, will the organism modify its behavior to modify exposure
pathways or rates (attraction or avoidance)?

For Environmental Risk Management there are three major risk factors and exposure
pathway is one of three factors. To determine whether risk management actions are
warranted, the following assessment approach should be applied to establish whether the
three risk factors of ‘contaminants’, ‘receptors’, and ‘exposure pathways’ co-exist, or are
likely to co-exist, at the project site after the operational phase of the proposed
development.

̇ Contaminant(s): Presence of pollutants and/or any hazardous materials, waste, or oil

in any environmental media at potentially hazardous concentrations

̇ Receptor(s): Actual or likely contact of humans, wildlife, plants, and other living
organisms with the contaminants of concern

̇ Exposure pathway(s): A combination of the route of migration of the contaminant

from its point of release (e.g., leaching into potable groundwater) and exposure routes

Table 3-10 identifies some of the major exposure pathways.

Table 3-10: Exposure Pathways

Media Pathways Comment

Air: Gases and Respiration Assuming accurate fate model

Aerosols estimates, exposure is relatively
predictable based on assumption of
homogenous distribution in air
Water (Soluble Respiration Assuming accurate fate model
Chemicals) estimates, exposure is relatively
predictable based on assumption of
homogenous distribution in water
Sediment Benthic animals absorb chemicals, Processes are very complicated and
(Solids and respire pore water or food or food usually simplifying assumptions are
pore water) from the water column. required
Plants rooted in the sediment may take
up material from sediments, surface
water and air
Soil (solids, Organisms in soils may absorb Processes are very complicated and
pore water and material from soil, pore water, pore usually simplifying assumptions are
pore air) air, ingest soil, soil – associated food. required.
Ingested Food Consumption by fish and wildlife Assume the test animal
and Water consumption rates in laboratory for
a given availability of food or water
are the same as those occurring
naturally in the environment.
Multimedia More than one of the above pathways It is often possible to assume one
pathway is dominant. In some

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-27 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Media Pathways Comment

cases, it will be necessary to
estimate the combined dosage.

EAF and induction furnace plant emissions or rejects (gaseous, solid & hazardous as well
as liquid effluents) can cause damage to human health, aquatic and terrestrial ecology as
well as material due to various exposure routes (pathways). For example adverse effects
of EAF and induction furnace plants on human health could be direct impact of noxious
gases on the organism and/or indirect impact via the food chain and changes in the
environment. Especially in connection with high levels of fine particulates, noxious gases
like SO2 and NOx can lead to respiratory diseases. SO2 and NOx can have health-
impairing effects even at concentrations below those of 2009 AAQ (24 hours avg.)
standard of 80 µg/m3 for SO2 and NOx. The duration of exposure is decisive. Injurious
heavy metals (e.g., lead, mercury and cadmium) can enter the food chain and thus, the
humans through drinking water/vegetables/animal products. Climatic changes such as
warming and acidification of surface waters, forest depletion may occur due to acid rain
and/or the greenhouse effect of CO2 and other trace gases can have long-term detrimental
effects on human health. Similarly important are the effects of climatic changes on
agriculture and forestry (and thus on people’s standard of living), e.g., large-scale shifts of
cultivation to other regions and/or deterioration of crop yields due to climate change
impacts. Hence, the construction and operation of EAF as well as the induction furnace
plants can have both socio-economic and socio-cultural consequences. Appropriate
preparatory studies, gender-specific and otherwise, are therefore required, and the state of
medical services within the project area must be clarified in advance. Besides, noise
pollution generated from turbines is an important source of Occupational exposure, has
direct effects on humans and animals.

3.4 Technological Aspects

3.4.1 Cleaner technologies

Steel melting in EAF or induction furnace uses large quantities of raw materials, energy
and water. As with any industry, these need to be managed well in order to maximize
productivity and profits. As such, improving energy and resource efficiency should be
approached from several directions. A strong corporate-wide energy and resource
management program is essential. While process technologies described in Section 3.2
present well-documented opportunities for improvement, equally important is fine-tuning
the production process, sometimes producing even greater savings. In section 3.3.1, are
some measures concerning these and other general crosscutting utilities that apply to this
industry.

3.4.1.1 DC arc furnace with water cooled furnace wall

Large energy saving is achieved in an EAF, which melts and refines ferrous materials
such as steel scrap, by changing its power source from conventional three-phase AC to
DC using a central electrode at top and bottom. The principle and mechanism are:

̇ it can melt materials uniformly

̇ the metal is melted and agitated by the electric current flowing through it and the
magnetic field

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-28 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

̇ by adopting water cooled furnace wall, high efficiency operation is achievable

Energy Saving

̇ Specific power consumption is reduced by 5 to 10%

̇ Furnace maintenance materials are reduced
̇ Specific electrode consumption is reduced by 40 to 50%
Observations

DC arc furnaces are being used sparingly in Indian steel plants in place of AC arc
furnaces, although energy efficient. ESSAR Steel in India is operating with DC-EAFs.
The reasons of low penetration are as follows:

̇ High maintenance requirements

̇ DC electrical equipments are critical in nature; moreover erosion of bottom electrode
is fast
̇ Investment cost is high and technology know-how is not easily available
̇ Grid has to be strengthened to absorb high surge
3.4.1.2 High frequency melting furnace

It is a melting furnace for steel such as stainless steel, cast steel, nickel, other alloy steel
(by direct melting method); copper, brass, aluminum, noble metals and other non-ferrous
metals (by indirect melting method in which carbon or metallic crucibles are used). The
principles and mechanism are:

̇ frequency and power are selected

̇ high frequency induction current, with enhanced current density which is 2 to 5 times
higher than that of low frequency method, is generated. The current generates heat by
internal resistance of the material, and performs melting

̇ steel and alloy steel are melted by resistance heat generated by the induction current
that flows in steel itself

̇ non-ferrous metals and nonmetals are heated and melted by conduction heat from
induction heating elements such as graphite and metallic crucibles

Table 3-11 below compares a high frequency melting furnace with a low frequency
melting furnace:

Table 3-11: Comparison of High and Low Frequency Melting Furnaces

Low Frequency Melting Furnace High Frequency Melting Furnace

Cannot perform rapid melting because the Can rapidly melt small-sized materials. This is
electric current density needs to be because high frequency current can penetrate
maintained low in view of the agitating deeper, and eddy current is generated even in small
force. As it is difficult to inject electric sized materials
power to small-sized materials, melting
takes longer time.
Batch type intermittent operation needs a Batch type intermittent operation is possible. A
starting block or heel starting block or heel is not needed;

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-29 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Low Frequency Melting Furnace High Frequency Melting Furnace

The equipment cost is lower than that of a As it needs a high frequency power source; the
high frequency furnace. equipment cost is higher than that of a low
frequency furnace.
With high frequency current, larger electric power
can be applied, and rapid melting is possible. As
radiation heat loss is small, energy is saved

Energy saving

̇ Saving of specific power consumption for 3 T furnace : 12.3%

̇ Melting speed for a 3 T furnace (kg/h): Increase by 19.5%
̇ Electricity 750 kW for low frequency furnace but 1500 kW for high frequency
furnace.
Observations

̇ High frequency melting furnace has inherent advantage of high melting rate of scrap
leading to improved furnace productivity. This also increases the production capacity
of the shop and reduces specific cost of production.

̇ Many of the induction furnace operators in India are engaged in production of various
types of cast irons/steels/special quality products. Adopting high frequency melting
furnaces through technology transfers would be quite beneficial from energy-saving-
point which reduces specific energy costs and improves bottom line.

3.4.1.3 Channel type induction furnace for cast iron melting

Induction furnaces are of two types: crucible type and channel type. Recently the channel
type is more widely used because of its higher overall heat efficiency. A crucible type
furnace was conventionally used for melting cast iron, using coke or low frequency non-
iron core induction as a heat source. The current trend is to perform continuous operation
and save energy using a channel type low frequency furnace. The comparison is given in
Table 3-12 and Table 3-13.

Table 3-12: Comparison of Crucible and Channel Type of Induction Furnace

Crucible Type Induction Furnace Channel Type Induction Furnace

The assembly of this type consists of a A closed channel furnace comprises a cylindrical
crucible within a water-cooled copper coil shaft, made of sheet iron and lined with refractory
and a framework on supports arranged for materials, and a bottom block which is enclosed in a
tilting during pouring. The primary detachable cast shell. An inductor is placed in the
circuit is formed by the coil, and the central portion of the iron core in hole provided in
secondary circuit is the crucible or, rather, the bottom block. The metal that fills a narrow
the charge in it. The lines of magnetic channel in the bottom block is heated by the
force link through the charge and induce induced current. After being placed into the shaft,
eddy current in it, and the later generates the charge is melted owing to the intensive
heat. circulation of molten metal.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-30 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Table 3-13: Comparison of Energy Saving between Crucible and Channel Type

Item Crucible Type Channel Type

Power efficiency 60% - 80% 95% - 97%

Overall efficiency 55% – 65% 75% - 85%
Specific power consumption High Low
Need of heel Not needed Needed
Intermittent operation Arbitrarily possible Principally two shift or
continuous operation

3.4.1.4 Ferroalloys Furnace for effective energy utilization

The electric furnace for smelting HC-FeCr (high carbon ferrochromium) refines
chromium ore using coke as a reducing agent. However, as the ratio of fine chromium
ore increased in recent years, permeability in the electric furnace decreased, and specific
consumption of electric power and coke increased. The system described here reduces
energy consumption for producing HC-FeCr, and recovers the combustible gas.

When fine chromium ore is agglomerated and calcined into pellets by an annular furnace,
and the pellets are charged into the EAF in place of fine chromium ore, permeability in
the furnace increases, which increases the heat exchange rate among charge materials,
and decreases specific power consumption. Exhaust gas from the furnace is used as fuel
of the burner for pellet calcinations. Excess gas is converted to steam for internal use.

Energy saving

̇ Electric power, etc.,

̇ Reduction in crude oil e.g., when applied to 7 EAFs of more than 1000 kVA each,
reduction in crude oil eq is 80,000 t/y.

3.4.1.5 Oxy-fuel burners/lancing

Oxy-fuel burners/lancing can be installed in EAFs to reduce electricity consumption by

substituting electricity with oxygen and hydrocarbon fuels. They reduce total energy
consumption because of:

̇ Reduced heat times, which save 2-3 kWh/tonne/min of holding time

̇ Increased heat transfer during the refining period
̇ Facilitates slag foaming, which increases efficiency of oxygen usage and injected
carbon
Care must be taken to use oxy-fuel burners correctly, otherwise there is the risk that total
energy consumption and greenhouse gases will increase.

Energy saving

̇ Electricity savings of 0.14 GJ/tonne crude steel, typical savings range from 2.5 to 4.4
kWh per Nm3 oxygen injection with common injection rates of 18 Nm3/t.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-31 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

̇ Natural gas injection is 10 scf/kWh (0.3 m3/kWh) with typical savings of 20 to 40

kWh/T

̇ Retrofit Capital Costs of $4.80/T crude steel on an EAF of 110 tonnes

̇ Improved heat distribution leads to reduced tap-to-tap times of about 6%, leading to
estimated annual cost savings of $4.0/T

̇ Reduction of nitrogen content of the steel, leading to improved product quality

3.4.1.6 Scrap preheating

Scrap preheating is a technology that can reduce the power consumption of EAFs through
from using the waste heat of the furnace to preheat the scrap charge. Old (bucket)
preheating systems had various problems, e.g., emissions, high handling costs, and a
relatively low heat recovery rate. Modern systems have reduced these problems and are
highly efficient. The energy savings depend on the preheat temperature of the scrap.
Various systems have been developed and are in use at various sites in the U.S. and
Europe, i.e., Consteel tunnel-type preheater, Fuchs Finger Shaft, and Fuchs Twin Shaft.
All systems can be applied to new constructions, and also to retrofit existing plants.

A. Tunnel furnace - CONSTEEL process

The Consteel process consists of a conveyor belt with the scrap going through a tunnel,
down to the EAF through a “hot heel”. Various U.S. plants have installed a Consteel
process, as well as one plant in Japan.

Energy/Environment/Cost/Other Benefits Consteel process:

̇ Productivity increase of 33%

̇ Reduced electrode consumption of 40%
̇ Reduced dust emissions
̇ Electricity savings estimated to be 60 kWh/t for retrofits
̇ Annual operating cost savings of $1.90/t crude steel (including productivity increase,
reduced electrode consumption, and increased yield)
̇ Retrofit Capital Costs $4.4 to $5.5/t ($2M for a capacity of 400,000 to 500,000 t/year)
B. Post consumption shaft furnace (FUCHS)

The FUCHS shaft furnace consists of a vertical shaft that channels the off-gases to
preheat the scrap. The scrap can be fed continuously or through a so-called system of
‘fingers’. The optimal recovery system is the ‘double shaft’ furnace, which can only be
applied for new construction. The Fuchs-systems make almost 100% scrap preheating
possible, leading to potential energy savings of 100-120 kWh/t. Carbon monoxide and
oxygen concentrations should be well controlled to reduce the danger of explosions, as
happened at one plant in the U.S.

Energy saving

̇ Electricity savings of 120 kWh/t and fuel increases of 0.7 GJ/t

̇ Annual operating cost savings of $4.5/t (excluding saved electricity costs)
̇ Retrofit Capital Costs of about $6/t crude steel for and existing 100 t furnace

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-32 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

̇ Reduced electrode consumption

̇ Yield improvement of 0.25-2%
̇ Up to 20% productivity increase
̇ 25% reduced flue gas dust emissions (reducing hazardous waste handling costs)
3.4.1.7 Electrochemical dezincing

Dezincing of steel scrap improves recycling process. This electrochemical dezincing

process provides an environmental friendly, economic method of removing zinc from
steel scrap to reuse both the steel and zinc. With the use of zinc coated prompt scrap
increasing, steelmakers are feeling the effect of increased contaminant loads on their
operations. The greatest concerns are the cost of treatment before disposal of waste dusts
and the water associated with remelting zinc coated scrap.

The process consists of two basic steps:

̇ dissolving the zinc coating from scrap in a hot, caustic solution, and

̇ recovering the zinc from the solution electrolytically.

Through a galvanic process, the zinc is removed from the steel and is in solution as
sodium zincate ions rather than zinc dust. The steel is then rinsed with water and ready for
reuse. Impurities are removed from the zinc solution, and then a voltage is applied in
order to grow metallic zinc via an oxidation reduction reaction. All waste streams in this
process are reused.

Benefits

̇ Pollution Reduction – Removal of zinc decreases steelmaking dust released to the air
as well as pollutants in wastewater streams. The process itself does not consume any
chemicals (other than drag out losses) and produces only a small amount of waste.

̇ Productivity – Removing zinc prior to processing of scrap saves time and money in
disposal of waste dusts and water. Without the zinc, this high quality scrap does not
require extra handling, blending, or sorting for remelting in steelmaking furnaces.

3.4.1.8 Divided blast cupola

Divided blast cupola (DBC) is a well-proven technology for improving the energy
performance at a modest investment. A DBC supplies blast air to the cupola furnace at
two levels through a double row of tuyeres almost equally divided between the top and
bottom row of tuyeres, and the spacing between the tuyeres is about one metre apart,
irrespective of the diameter of the cupola. Some comparative advantages of a DBC, as
found in studies conducted by BCIRA, are given below:

̇ a higher metal tapping temperature (approximately 45-50oC more) and higher carbon
pick-up (approximately 0.06%) are obtained for a given charge-coke consumption
̇ charge-coke consumption is reduced by 20-32% and the melting rate is increased
by11-23%, while maintaining the same metal tapping temperature
However, in the initial survey conducted at Agra and Howrah foundry clusters, it was
found that conventional cupolas are commonly used by Indian foundry units and DBCs,
where ever adopted, are of sub-optimal designs. Hence the intervention aims to

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-33 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

demonstrate and disseminate the benefits of a well - designed DBC among Indian
foundries.

TERI's DBC design

TERI's DBC design incorporates the specific melting requirements of the individual
foundry unit. Salient features of the cupola design include:

̇ Optimum selection of blower specifications (quantity and pressure)

̇ Optimum ratio of the air delivered to the top and bottom tuyers
̇ Minimum pressure drop and turbulence of the combustion air
̇ Separate wind-belts for top and bottom tuyeres
̇ Correct tuyere area, tuyere number and distance between the two rows of tuyeres
̇ Optimum well capacity
̇ Higher stack height
̇ Mechanical charging system
̇ Stringent material specifications

Energy savings and other benefits

A demonstration plant was installed at Bharat Engineering Works, Howrah, a unit

nominated by the Indian Foundry Association (IFA). The foundry, manufacturing ingot
moulds, had a charge coke percentage of 13.6 % (coke:metal :: 1:7.5) which was brought
down to 8 % (coke:metal :: 1:12.5). Hence, the energy saving achieved in the new plant
was about 40 % compared to their earlier cupola. On an average monthly melting of 430
tonnes, the yearly saving in coke is 270 tonnes which is equivalent to Rs. 8 lakh.

Additionally there was an increase in metal tapping temperature and reduction in silicon
and manganese losses.

Energy saving of about 40 % was achieved in a replication unit setup at a foundry unit in
Nagpur which makes thin-walled sanitary castings. The charge coke consumption
reduced from 22 % (coke:metal :: 1:4.5) earlier to about 13 % (coke:metal :: 1: 7.7). This
translates to a coke saving of 280 tonnes per annum (TPA) worth about Rs. 11 lakh on a
melting of 300 tonnes per month in the foundry. The total capital investment of the
cupola, inclusive of civil work, platforms, bucket charging system etc., was about Rs. 12
lakhs. Thus the payback on the investment is one year considering savings in coke only.
Additional benefits of DBC were – better analytical and temperature control of molten
metal leading to substantial reduction in rejection of finished castings. The payback is
more attractive, if the decrease in rejection rate of finished casting on account of better
analytical and temperature control is considered

3.4.2 Pollution control technologies

3.4.2.1 EAF

In EAF operation, scarp, reduced iron and now-a-days hot metal is charged from the top
into a refractory and water panel lined chamber. Swing roof, which is also lined with
TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-34 August 2010
 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

refractory and water-cooled panel, is placed over the chamber. Through the roof three
graphite electrodes are placed and connected to a powerful AC transformer which
supplies the power necessary to melt the charge using high power arc discharge. The
fume generated during the operation is aspirated through the fourth hole in the roof by
creating a vacuum of about 1.5 to 2.5 mm H2O inside the EAF casing, which is known as
primary air. In-leakage air enters the casing through door openings, gaps of electrode
holes, chute, etc. and decarburizes carbon. Additional oxygen may be supplied for
complete decarburization of charge. The air rich in CO at a temperature of around
1700oC then passes through double-walled water-cooled elbow. Additional air is
aspirated to combust balance CO to CO2 from elbow gap. Hot gases are cooled through a
water-cooled duct to around 550-600oC and then by a forced draft cooler before entering
the bag filter at 120 – 130oC. If needed, additional air is sucked to the system. The bag
filter is normally pulse jet type. Wet scrubbers were used earlier.

During charging, considerable amount of fugitive emissions arise which may be sucked
through roof mounted canopy of adequate size. The quantity of suction air may be 10-15
times more than that of the primary air. This air may be added to the gas collection
system through a mixing chamber, which also serves as a spark arrester, to cool the gases
and taken to the bag filter to avoid installation of additional bag filter system. The canopy
hood needs to suck less air during melting when the roof is closed and can be manipulated
by a damper.

In many cases, especially in case of smaller capacity furnaces and high alloy steel making
furnaces, where a small positive pressure is required in the furnace to create reducing
condition, it would be advantageous to control the emissions by means of a side draft
hood placed above the furnace roof or only by a roof mounted canopy, though its
effectiveness is less. If the EAF is provided with a ladle refining unit, gases may be
sucked from the refining ladle through a water-cooled duct and connected to the same
system at mixing chamber.

The dust from the bag filter unit and mixing chamber is conveyed to a dust silo by
mechanical or pneumatic conveying system. The dust is processed through a pug mill or
pelletized before its final disposal/reuse. Dust recycling in the rotary hearth furnace
(RHF) was applied at Nippon Steel’s Kimitsu Works in 2000. The dust and sludge, in
case of wet cleaning, along with iron oxide and carbon, are agglomerated into shaped
articles and the iron oxide is reduced at high temperatures. Zinc and other impurities in
the dust and sludge are expelled and exhausted into off-gas. Asahi Kyogyo in June 2007
used RHF to recycle 10,000 TPA EAF dust to EAF as DRI. So far, the EAF dust and slag
are not being recycled or utilized in any way in the Indian steel works. These two by-
products are being dumped. There is pressure from the regulatory body for alternate use
of EAF dust as these are hazardous in nature. Pelletising of EAF dust is generally not
practiced in Indian Electric Furnace steel making.

3.4.2.2 Induction furnace

From the description of pollution potential from induction furnaces, it may be observed
that volume, quantity and harmful emission of solid and gaseous contaminants are fairly
low as compared to EAF. The equipment need not be as elaborate as EAF so as to make
it cost-effective for small-scale induction furnace units. At the same time, the pollutants
emitted should be in conformity to regulations. The steps involved are: extraction of
fumes; cleaning by cyclone separator; further cleaning of finer particulates in wet
scrubber; and then allowing clean gases to pass to the environment. The last step is
disposal of solid matter left as sludge or dust.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-35 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

3.4.2.3 Cupola furnace

Emission reduction efforts include the use of bag houses, venturi scrubber, wet scrubbers,
and afterburners to reduce particulates, CO and VOCs in cupola off-gases. Fabric filters
are most effective in controlling cupola emissions, reducing manganese emissions from
250,000 to 300 mg/Mg. High energy scrubbers, impingement scrubbers and wet caps are
used with less favorable results. Use of gas for heat and graphite for carbon may reduce
emissions due to coke, which contributes to organics and trace inorganics.

The venturi scrubber is a highly efficient device for removing particulate matter and
sulphur dioxide from stack gases. Since cupola stack gases contain a significant
percentage of fine particulates, it was found that a venturi scrubber was the most effective
device to bring down the emissions below the more stringent PEL of 150 mg/Nm³. Lime
dosing can be done to maintain the pH of the recirculating water and reduce SO2.

SPM and sulphur dioxide of the outlet gas from the pollution control device was
measured which was installed at a foundry in Howrah. The SPM was found to be about
50 mg/Nm3 and sulphur dioxide was measured to be about 40 mg/Nm3.

Low cost wet scrubber dust emission control

National Productivity Council, Chennai has conducted a detailed investigation of the

emissions from the cupola furnaces at Coimbatore. A low-cost wet scrubber system was
designed and implemented by the units to control the dust emissions. It is a simple
fabricate and install online process. No operator attention is necessary for scrubber
operation. A water spray wet scrubber is designed concurrent to gas flow rate at the exit
of the cupola furnace (Figure 3-9). The natural draft created (300oC – 400oC) by the
cupola furnace is sufficient to draw the gases through the scrubber and there is no
additional ID fan is necessary. A set of water spray nozzles scrub the dust laden gases.
However to create additional draft to the cooled gases to discharge into atmosphere, an
extended stack of diameter 1.0 ft and 6 ft high is installed at the exit of the scrubber. The
scrubber water is collected in a sump to allow settling and separate the sludge and the
clear water is re-circulated to the scrubber by 1HP centrifugal pump. Periodically the
settled sludge is collected dried and disposed.

The water loss due to evaporation and along with sludge is about 5 m3 for 8 hours
operation of cupola. The operating cost is only the power consumption by the
recirculating pump, which is about < 10 units per day. The cost of the system is about Rs
70,000/- to Rs 80,000/-.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-36 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Scrubber at top

Figure 3-9: Low Cost Scrubber

Performance efficiency of the wet scrubber

The performance efficiency of the scrubber was assessed by collecting stack emission
dust samples from the sampling port provided at the extended stack. Following are the
emission monitoring results:

Table 3-12: Emission Monitoring Results

S. Parameter Designed Measured Emission Standard

No values values by TNPCB

1 Flow rate of gases, 3000 2,300 -

Nm3/hr
2 Dust emissions after the < 150 47 150
scrubber, mg/Nm3
3 Sulphur dioxide 300 - 400 < 50 -
concentration, mg/Nm3

3.5 Summary of Applicable National Regulatory Requirements

3.5.1 General description of major statutes

Government of India has published specific regulations and norms for the induction and
electric arc furnace, submerged arc furnace and cupola in the Environmental (Protection)
Rules, 1986 and its amendments. Detailed list is provided as Annexure I.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-37 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

3.5.2 General standards for discharge of environmental pollutants

General standards for discharge of environmental pollutants as per CPCB are given in
Annexure II.

3.5.3 Industry-specific standards

The electric furnace plays an important role in the recovery and recycling of waste iron
resources. In areas where an abundant supply of scrap and electric power is available, the
proportion of steel making via the electric furnace route is relatively high, because both
energy consumption and equipment investment are substantially smaller in the integrated
route using a blast furnace and basic oxygen furnace process to produce steel from ore.

Electric furnaces are classified as arc furnaces or induction furnaces. The arc furnace is
used far more extensively for steelmaking, because its capacity is large and production
efficiency is high. In addition to melting, both oxidation refining and reduction refining
are possible in the arc furnace. The arc furnace is used for decarburization,
dephosphorization, and dehydrogenation, and the induction furnace for desulphurization
and deoxidation. The arc furnace is also capable of melting higher fraction of alloy
scraps. The cupola is the only furnace using coke and is extensively used by foundries.

With the rapid industrialization, the consumption of steel continues to grow and as a
result scrap generation will also continue to increase. Increased scrap generation in India
and import from foreign countries means increased use of such furnaces, which requires
adequate emission control and collection methods.

The objectives of the regulatory requirements are:

̇ To study and characterize fumes and emissions from induction and electric arc
furnace, submerged arc furnace and cupola

̇ To study fugitive emissions during raw material handling, additives handling and
tilting of pot/crucible for molten metal testing or during transferring

̇ To study noise pollution, minimization of fugitive emission and noise pollution,

issues concerning generation, handling and disposal of slag (solid waste), suitable
cost-effective modifications for better performance, effluent handling for ETPs (i.e.
provided for air pollution control system); and

̇ To evolve with suitable environmental standards (emission, noise, effluent and solid
waste) and good practice for induction and electric arc furnace, submerged arc
furnace and cupola

Emission Standards

Table 3-13: Emission Standards - Foundries

Pollutant Concentration (mg/Nm3)

(a) Cupola Capacity (melting particulate matter 450

rate): Less than 3 tonne/hr
3 tonne/hr and above -do- 150

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-38 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

(b) Arc Furnaces Capacity: All particulate matter 150

sizes
(c) Induction Furnaces -do- 150
Capacity: All sizes
Source: CPCB

Table 3-14: Emission Standards – Cupola Furnace

Parameter Emission limit

3
Sulphur dioxide (SO2) 300 mg/Nm at 12% CO2 corrections
Source: CPCB

Table 3-15: OSHA standards for Permissible Noise Exposure

Duration Per Day, in Hours Sound Level dB, Slow Response

8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1-1/2 102
1 105
1/2 110
1/4 or less 115
Note: When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or more periods of noise exposure of
different levels, their combined effect should be considered, rather than the individual effect of
each.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-39 August 2010

 4.
OPERATIONAL ASPECTS OF EIA

Prior environmental clearance process contained in the Notification issued on 14th

September, 2006, and amended as on 1st December, 2009, fall into following four major
stages i.e., screening, scoping, public consultation and appraisal. Each stage has certain
procedures to be followed. This section deals with all the procedural and technical
guidance, for conducting objective-oriented EIA studies, their review and decision-
making. Besides, the Notification also classifies projects into Category A, which requires
prior environmental clearance from MoEF and Category B from SEIAA/UTEIAA.

Consistency with other requirements

̇ Clearance from other regulatory bodies is not a pre-requisite for obtaining the prior
environmental clearance and all such clearances will be treated as parallel statutory
requirements.
̇ Consent for Establishment (CFE) and Prior Environmental Clearance are two
different legal requirements, a project proponent should acquire. Therefore, these two
activities can be initiated and proceeded with simultaneously.
̇ If a falls within the purview of CRZ and EIA Notifications, then the project
proponent is required to take separate clearances from the concerned Authorities.
̇ Rehabilitation and Resettlement (R&R) issues need not be dealt under the EIA
Notification as other statutory bodies deal with these issues. However, socio-
economic studies may be considered while taking environmental decisions.

4.1 Coverage of Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces under the Purview of the

Notification

All Induction/arc/cupola furnace projects including expansion and modernization require

prior environmental clearance. Based on pollution potential and capacities of the project,
these are classified into Category A and Category B. Figure 4-1 shows the Categorization
of projects.

Note:
(i) The recycling units registered under the HSM Rules, are exempted from purview of notification.
(ii) Plants/units other than power plants (given against entry no. 1 (d) of the Notification
schedule), based on municipal solid waste (non-hazardous) are exempted. (Municipal solid waste
in the context of this specific sector refers to segregated organic portion of municipal solid waste
excluding recyclables and converted to pellets for use as a fuel.)

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 4-1 August 2010

 Operational Aspects of an EIA

Figure 4-1: Categorization of Projects Under the Purview of Notification

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-2
 Operational Aspects of an EIA

Besides there are general conditions, when it applies, a Category B project will be
appraised at the MoEF similar to that of Category A projects. These conditions are
discussed in subsequent sections.

The sequence of steps in the process of prior environmental clearance for Category A
projects and the Category B projects are shown in Figure 4-2 and Figure 4-3 respectively.
The timelines indicated against each stage in the figures are the maximum permissible
time lines set in the Notification for said task. In case the said task is not cleared/objected
by the concerned Authority, within the specified time, said task is deemed to be cleared,
in accordance to the proposal submitted by the proponent. Each stage in the process of
prior environmental clearance for the induction and electric arc furnace, submerged arc
furnace and cupola industries is discussed in subsequent sections.

In case of Expansion or Modernization of the developmental Activity:

̇ Any developmental activity, which has an EIA clearance (existing plant), when
undergoes expansion or modernization (change in process or technology) with
increase in production capacity or any change in product mix beyond the list of
products cleared in the issued clearance is required to submit new application for EIA
clearance.
̇ Any developmental activity, which is listed in Schedule of the EIA Notification and
due to expansion of its total capacity, if falls under the purview of either Category B
or Category A, then such developmental activity requires clearance from respective
Authorities.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-3
 Operational Aspects of an EIA

Figure 4-2: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities

Falling Under Category A

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 4-4 August 2010

 Operational Aspects of an EIA

Figure 4-3: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities

Falling Under Category B

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 4-5 August 2010

 Operational Aspects of an EIA

4.2 Screening

Screening of the project shall be performed at the initial stage of the project development
so that proponents are aware of their obligations before deciding on the budget, project
design and execution plan.

This stage is applicable only for Category ‘B’ developmental activity i.e. if general
conditions are applicable for a Category B project, then it will be treated as Category A
project. Besides, screening also refers to the classification of Category B projects into
either Category B1 or Category B2. Category B1 projects require to follow all stages
applicable for a Category A project, but are processed at the SEIAA/UTEIAA. Category
B2 projects, on the other hand, do not require either EIA or public consultation.

As per the Notification, classification of the Category B projects falls under the purview
of the SEAC. This manual provides certain guidelines to the stakeholders for
classification of Category B1 and Category B2.

4.2.1 Applicable conditions for Category B projects

General condition

̇ Any induction and electric arc furnace, submerged arc furnace and cupola project
(usually falling under Category B) will be treated as Category A, if located in whole
or in part within 10 km from the boundary of:
− Protected areas notified under the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972,
− Protected areas notified under the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972
− Critically polluted areas as notified by the CPCB from time to time
− Eco-sensitive areas as notified under Section 3 of the E(P) Act, 1986, such as
Mahabaleshwar Panchgani, Matheran, Panchmarhi, Dahanu, Doon valley
− Inter-State boundaries and international boundaries – provided that the
requirement regarding distance of 10 km of the inter-state boundaries can be
reduced or completely done away with by an agreement between the respective
States/UTs sharing the common boundary
̇ If any of the conditions listed in above general condition applies, then a Category B
project will be treated as Category A
̇ The SEIAA shall base its decision on the recommendations of a State/UT level EAC
for the purpose of prior environmental clearance
̇ In absence of a duly constituted SEIAA or SEAC, a Category B project shall be
appraised at the Central level i.e., at the MoEF
̇ The EAC at the State/UT level shall screen the projects or activities in Category B.
SEAC shall meet at least once every month

4.2.2 Criteria for classification of Category B1 and B2 projects

The classification of Category B projects or activities of induction and electric arc

furnace, submerged arc furnace and cupola into B1 or B2 will be determined based on
whether or not the project or activity requires further environmental studies for
preparation of an EIA for its appraisal prior to the grant of prior environmental clearance.
The necessity of this will be decided, depending upon the nature and location specificity

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 4-6 August 2010

 Operational Aspects of an EIA

of the project, by SEAC after scrutiny of the applications seeking prior environmental
clearance for Category B projects or activities.

The projects requiring an EIA report shall be included in Category B1 and remaining
projects will fall under Category B2 and will not require an EIA report and public
consultation.

Situations which could be considered for Category B2 are:

For stand-alone units, furnaces of capacity > 30,000 TPA may be considered as B1
needing clearance. Furnaces of capacity ≤30,000 TPA should be appraised by SEAC/
SEIAA based on the submission of Form 1, conceptual plan and one season monitoring
data by the project proponent to the State Authorities.

4.2.3 Application for prior environmental clearance

̇ The project proponent, after identifying the site and carrying out a pre-feasibility
study, is required to apply for the prior environmental clearance using Form 1 given
in Annexure III. The proponent has to submit the filled in Form 1 along with the pre-
feasibility report and draft ToR for EIA studies to the concerned Authority i.e. MoEF,
Government of India for Category A projects and the SEIAA in case of Category B
projects. Please refer subsequent sections for the information on how to fill the Form
1, contents of pre-feasibility report and draft ToR for Induction/Cupola/Arc Furnaces
industry.
̇ Prior environmental clearance is required before starting any construction work, or
preparation of land on the identified site/project or activity by the project
management, except for securing the land.
̇ If the application is made for a specific developmental activity, which has an inherent
area development component as a part of its project proposal and the same project
also attracts the construction and area development provisions under 8a and 8b of the
Schedule, then the project will be seen as a developmental activity other than 8a and
8b of the Schedule.

4.2.4 Siting guidelines

These are the guidelines, stakeholders may consider while siting the developmental
projects, to minimize the associated possible environmental impacts. In some situations,
adhering to these guidelines is difficult and unwarranted. Therefore, these guidelines may
be kept in the background, as far as possible, while taking the decisions.

Areas may be avoided

While siting industries, care should be taken to minimize the adverse impact of the
industries on immediate neighborhood as well as distant places. Some of the natural life
sustaining systems and some specific landuses are sensitive to industrial impacts because
of the nature and extent of fragility. With a view to protect such sites, the industries may
maintain the following distances, as far as possible, from the specific areas listed:

̇ Ecologically and/or otherwise sensitive areas: Preferably 5 km; depending on the geo-
climatic conditions the requisite distance may be decided appropriately by the agency.
̇ Coastal areas: Preferably ½ km away from high tide line (HTL).

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 4-7 August 2010

 Operational Aspects of an EIA

̇ Flood plain of the riverine system: Preferably ½ km away from flood plain or
modified flood plain affected by dam in the upstream or flood control systems.
̇ Transport/Communication System: Preferably ½ km away from highway and railway
line.
̇ Major settlements (3,00,000 population): Distance from major settlements is difficult
to maintain because of urban sprawl. At the time of siting of the industry, if the
notified limit of any major settlement is found to be within 50 km from the project
boundary, the spatial direction of growth of the settlement for at least a decade must
be assessed. Subsequently, the industry may be sited at least 25 km from the projected
growth boundary of the settlement.
̇ Critically polluted areas identified by MoEF, from time to time. Current list of
critically polluted areas is given in Annexure IV.
Note:

Ecological and/or otherwise sensitive areas include (i) Religious and Historic Places; (ii)
Archaeological Monuments (e.g. identified zone around Taj Mahal); (iii) Scenic Areas; (iv) Hill
Resorts; (v) Beach Resorts; (vi) Health Resorts; (vii) Coastal Areas rich in Corals, Mangroves,
Breeding Grounds of Specific Species; (viii) Estuaries rich in Mangroves, Breeding grounds of
Specific Species; (ix) Gulf Areas; (x) Biosphere Reserves; (xi) National Parks and Sanctuaries;
(xii) Natural lakes, Swamps; (xiii) Seismic Zones; (xiv) Tribal Settlements; (xv) Areas of Scientific
and Geological Interest; (xvi) Defence Installations, specially those of security importance and
sensitive to pollution; (xvii) Border Areas (International) and (xviii) Air Ports.

Pre-requisite: State and Central Governments are required to identify such areas on a priority
basis.

4.3 Scoping for EIA Studies

Scoping exercise is taken up soon after the project contours are defined. The primary
purpose of scoping is to identify the concerns and issues which may affect the project
decisions. Besides, scoping defines the requirements and boundaries of an EIA study.

Scoping refers to the process by which the EAC, in case of Category ‘A’ projects or
activities, and SEAC in case of Category ‘B1’ projects, including applications for
expansion and/or modernization of existing projects, determine ToR for EIA studies
addressing all relevant environmental concerns for preparation of an EIA Report for a
particular project.

̇ Project proponent shall submit application to concerned Authority. The application

(Form 1 as given in Annexure III) shall be attached with pre-feasibility report and
proposed ToR for EIA Studies. The proposed sequence to arrive at the draft ToR is
discussed below:
– Pre-feasibility report summarizes the project details and also the likely
environmental concerns based on secondary information, which will be availed
for filling Form 1.
– From pre-feasibility report and Form 1, valued environmental components
(VECs) may be identified for a given project (the receiving environment/social
components, which are likely to get affected due to the project operations/
activities).

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 4-8 August 2010

 Operational Aspects of an EIA

– Once the project details from the pre-feasibility report & Form 1; and VECs are
identified, a matrix establishing the interactions which can lead to the
effects/impacts could be developed (Qualitative analysis).
– For each identified possible effect in the matrix, significance analysis could be
conducted to identify the impacts, which needs to be studied further (quantitative
analysis) in the subsequent EIA studies. All such points will find a mention in
the draft ToR to be proposed by the project proponent along with the application
form. The draft ToR shall include applicable baseline parameters (refer annexure
VI) and impact prediction tools proposed to be applied (refer annexure VIII).
– The information to be provided in pre-feasibility report, guidelines for filling
Form 1 and guidelines for developing draft ToR is summarized in the subsequent
sections.
– Authority consults the respective EAC/SEAC to reply to the proponent. The
EAC/SEAC concerned reviews the application form, pre-feasibility report and
proposed draft ToR by the proponent and make necessary additions/deletions to
make it a comprehensive ToR that suits the statutory requirements for conducting
the EIA studies.
̇ The concerned EAC/SEAC may constitute a sub-committee for a site visit, if
considered necessary. The sub-committee will act up on receiving a written approval
from chairperson of the concerned EAC/SEAC. Project proponent shall facilitate
such site visits of the sub-committees.
̇ EAC/SEAC shall provide an opportunity to the project proponent for presentation and
discussions on the proposed project and related issues as well as the proposed ToR for
EIA studies. If the State Government desires to present its views on any specific
project in the scoping stage, it can depute an officer for the same at the scoping stage
to EAC, as an invitee but not as a member of EAC. However, non-appearance of the
project proponent before EAC/SEAC at any stage will not be a ground for rejection of
the application for the prior environmental clearance.
̇ If a new or expansion project is proposed in a problem area as identified by the
CPCB, then the Ministry may invite a representative of SEIAA to present their views,
if any at the stage of scoping, to the EAC.
̇ The final set of ToR for EIA Studies shall be conveyed to the proponent by the EAC/
SEAC within sixty days of the receipt of Form 1 and pre-feasibility report. If the
finalized ToR for EIA studies is not conveyed to the proponent within sixty days of
the receipt of Form 1, the ToR suggested by the proponent shall be deemed as the
final and will be approved for the EIA studies.
̇ Final ToR for EIA Studies shall be displayed on the website of the MoEF/SEIAA.
̇ Applications for prior environmental clearance may be rejected by the concerned
Authority based on the recommendations by the concerned EAC/SEAC at the scoping
stage itself. In case of such rejection, the decision together with reasons for the same
shall be communicated to the proponent in writing within sixty days of the receipt of
the application.
̇ The final EIA report and other relevant documents submitted by the applicant shall be
scrutinized by the concerned Authority strictly with reference to the approved ToR
for EIA studies.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 4-9 August 2010

 Operational Aspects of an EIA

4.3.1 Pre-feasibility report

The pre-feasibility report should include, but not limited to highlight the proposed project
information, keeping in view the environmental sensitivities of the selected site, raw
material, technology options and its availability. Information required in pre-feasibility
report varies from case to case even in same sector depending upon the local
environmental setting within which the plant is located/proposed. However, the
environmental information which may be furnished in the pre-feasibility report may
include as under:

I. Executive summary

II. Project details: Description of the project including in particular;

̇ a description of the main characteristics of the production processes, for instance,

nature and quantity of materials used,
̇ an estimate, by type and quantity, of expected residues and emissions (water, air and
soil pollution, noise, vibration, light, heat, radiation, etc.) resulting from the operation
of the proposed project.
̇ a description of the physical characteristics of the whole project and the land-use
requirements during the construction and operational phases
III. Selection of site based on least possible impacts

̇ An outline of the main alternatives studied by the developer and an indication of the
main reasons for this choice, taking into account the environmental effects.
IV. Anticipated impacts based on project operations on receiving environment

̇ A description of the aspects of the environment likely to be significantly affected by

the proposed project, including, in particular, population, fauna, flora, soil, water, air,
climatic factors, material assets, including the architectural and archaeological
heritage, landscape and the inter-relationship between the above factors.
̇ A description of the likely significant effects of the proposed project on the
environment resulting from:
− existence of the project
− use of natural resources
− emission of pollutants, the creation of nuisances and the elimination of waste
− project proponent’s description of the forecasting methods used to assess the
effects on the environment
V. Proposed broad mitigation measures which could effectively be internalized as
project components to have environmental and social acceptance of the proposed
site

̇ A description of key measures envisaged to prevent, reduce and where possible offset
any significant adverse effects on the environment
VI. An indication of any difficulties (technical deficiencies or lack of know-how)
encountered by the developer in compiling the required information

Details of the above listed points which may be covered in pre-feasibility report are listed
in Annexure V.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 4-10 August 2010

 Operational Aspects of an EIA

4.3.2 Guidance for providing information in Form 1

The information given in specifically designed pre-feasibility report for this

developmental activity may also be availed for filling Form 1.

Form 1 is designed to help users identify the likely significant environmental effects of
proposed projects right at the scoping stage. There are two stages for providing
information under two columns:

̇ First - identifying the relevant project activities from the list given in column 2 of
Form 1. Start with the checklist of questions set out below and complete Column 3
by answering:
− Yes - if the activity is likely to occur during implementation of the project
− No - if it is not expected to occur
− May be - if it is uncertain at this stage whether it will occur or not

̇ Second - Each activity for which the answer in Column 3 is “Yes” the next step is to
refer to the fourth column which quantifies the volume of activity which could be
judged as significant impact on the local environmental characteristics, and identify
the areas that could be affected by that activity during construction /operation /
decommissioning of the project. Form 1 requires information within 15 km around
the project, whereas actual study area for EIA will be as prescribed by respective
EAC/SEAC. Project proponent will need information about the surrounding VECs in
order to complete this Form 1.

4.3.3 Identification of appropriate valued environmental components

VECs are components of natural resources and human world that are considered valuable
and are likely to be affected by the project activities. Value may be attributed for
economic, social, environmental, aesthetic or ethical reasons. VECs represent the
investigative focal point for further EIA process. The indirect and/or cumulative effects
can be concerned with indirect, additive or even synergistic effects due to other projects
or activities or even induced developments on the same environmental components as
would be considered direct effects. But such impacts tend to involve larger scale VECs
such as within entire region, river basins or watersheds; and, broad social and economic
VECs such as quality of life and the provincial economy. Once VECs are identified then
appropriate indicators are selected for impact assessments on the respective VECs.

4.3.4 Methods for identification of impacts

There are various factors which influence the approach adopted for the assessment of
direct, indirect, cumulative impacts, etc. for a particular project. The method should be
practical and suitable for the project given the data, time and financial resources available.
However, the method adopted should be able to provide a meaningful conclusion from
which it would be possible to develop, where necessary, mitigation measures and
monitoring. Key points to consider when choosing the method(s) include:

̇ Nature of the impact(s)

̇ Availability and quality of data
̇ Availability of resources (time, finance and staff)

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 4-11 August 2010

 Operational Aspects of an EIA

The method chosen should not be complex, but should aim at presenting the results in a
way that can be easily understood by the developer, decision maker and the public. A
comparative analysis of major impact identification methods is given in Table 4-1:

Table 4-1: Advantages and Disadvantages of Impact Identification Methods

Description Advantages Disadvantages

Checklists ̇ Annotate the ̇ Simple to ̇ Do not distinguish
environmental features that understand and between direct and
need to be addressed when use indirect impacts
identifying the impacts of ̇ Good for site ̇ Do not link action
activities in the project selection and and impact
priority setting ̇ The process of
̇ Simple ranking incorporating values
and weighting can be controversial
Matrices ̇ Identify the interaction ̇ Link action to ̇ Difficult to
between project activities impact distinguish direct
(along one axis) and ̇ Good method and indirect impacts
environmental for displaying ̇ Significant potential
characteristics (along other EIA results for double-counting
axis) using a grid like table of impacts
̇ Entries are made in the
cells which highlights
impact severity in the form
of symbols or numbers or
descriptive comments
Networks ̇ Illustrate cause effect ̇ Link action to ̇ Can become very
relationship of project impact complex if used
activities and ̇ Useful in beyond simplified
environmental simplified form version
characteristics for checking for
̇ Useful in identifying second order
secondary impacts impacts
̇ Useful for establishing ̇ Handles direct
impact hypothesis and and indirect
other structured science impacts
based approaches to EIA
Overlays ̇ Map the impacts spatially ̇ Easy to ̇ Address only direct
and display them understand impacts
pictorially ̇ Good to display ̇ Do not address
̇ Useful for comparing site method impact duration or
and planning alternatives ̇ Good siting probability
for routing linear tool
developments
̇ Can address cumulative
effects
̇ Information incentive
GIS ̇ Maps the impacts spatially ̇ Easy to ̇ Do not address
and display them understand impact duration or
pictorially ̇ Good to display probability
̇ Useful for comparing site method ̇ Heavy reliance on
and planning alternatives ̇ Good siting knowledge and data
for routing linear tool ̇ Often complex and
developments ̇ Excellent for expensive
̇ Can address cumulative impact

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 4-12 August 2010

 Operational Aspects of an EIA

Description Advantages Disadvantages

effects identification
̇ Information incentive and analysis
Expert ̇ Assist diagnosis, problem ̇ Excellent for ̇ Heavy reliance on
System solving and decision impact knowledge and data
making identification ̇ Often complex and
̇ Needs inputs from user by and analysis expensive
answering systematically ̇ Good for
developed questions to experimenting
identify impacts and
determine their mitigability
and significance
̇ Information intensive, high
investment methods of
analysis

The project team made an attempt to construct an impact matrix considering major project
activities (generic operations) and stage-specific likely impacts which is given in Table 4-
2.

While the impact matrix is each project-specific, Table 4-2 may facilitate the stakeholders
in identifying a set of components and phase-specific project activities for determination
of likely impacts. However, the location-specific concerns may vary from case to case;
therefore, the components even without likely impacts are also retained in the matrix for
the location-specific reference.

The matrix lists the major project activities (impact producing actions) of the project in
columns and the major environmental components likely to be impacted, either positively
or negatively, in rows. Certain project activities have possible interactions with certain
environmental components and these cells are marked with asterisk (*).

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 4-13 August 2010

 Operational Aspects of an EIA

Table 4-2: Matrix of Impacts

PHASE I PHASE II PHASE III
Pre -Construction Construction/ Installation Operation and Maintenance

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Raw material storage, piling and

EAF dust, Solid and Hazardous

Component

structures including temporary

Disposal of construction wastes

Influx of construction workers

Burning of wastes, refuse and
Detailed Topographic Survey

Heavy Equipment operations

Site Preparation / Change in
Project

Transportation of material

Installation of equipment
Civil works such as earth

Crushing and Screening

Emissions from process

moving and building of

Effluent from process

Generation of sewage
Activities

waste management
cleared vegetation
ENVIRONMENT

Land Acquisition

Deforestation
Site Clearing

Topography

structures

handling
Parameter/
factor

Soil Erosion Risks * *

Contamination * * * * * *
Soil Quality * * * *
Resources Fuels/ Electricity * * *
Raw materials * *
Land especially
undeveloped or * * *
agricultural land
Water
Water Interpretation or Alteration
of River Beds * *
Alteration of surface run-
off and interflow * * *
Alteration of aquifers * *
Physical

Water quality * * * * *

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-14
 Operational Aspects of an EIA

PHASE I PHASE II PHASE III

Pre -Construction Construction/ Installation Operation and Maintenance

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Temperature *
Air Air quality * * * *
Noise * * * * * * *
Climate * * * * * * *
Terrestrial Flora Effect on grass & flowers * * * *
Effect on trees & shrubs * * * * * *
Effect on farmland * * * * * *
Endangered species * * * * *
Aquatic Biota Habitat removal * * *
Contamination of habitats * * *
Reduction of aquatic biota * * * * *
Terrestrial Fragmentation of terrestrial
Fauna habitats * *
Disturbance of habitats by
Biological

noise or vibration * * * * *
Reduction of Biodiversity * * * *
Economy Creation of new economic
activities * * * *
Commercial value of
properties * * * *
Conflict due to negotiation
and/ compensation *
payments
Social

Generation of temporary
and permanent jobs * * * * * *

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-15
 Operational Aspects of an EIA

PHASE I PHASE II PHASE III

Pre -Construction Construction/ Installation Operation and Maintenance

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Effect on crops * * * * * * *
Reduction of farmland
productivity * * *
Income for the state and
private sector
Savings in foreign
currency for the state
Education Training in new
technologies * * * *
Training in new skills to
workers * * * * *
Public Order Political Conflicts *
Unrest, Demonstrations &
Social conflicts * * * * * *
Infrastructure Conflicts with projects of
and Services urban, commercial or * *
Industrial development
Security and
Safety
Increase in Crime *
Accidents * * * *
Health
* *
Cultural Land use * * * * *
Recreation * * * * *
Aesthetics and human
interest * * * * * * *
Cultural status * * *

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-16
 Operational Aspects of an EIA

Note:

1. Above table represents a model for likely impacts, which will have to be arrived at on a case-to-
case basis, considering VECs and significance analysis (Ref Section 2.9).

2. Project activities are shown as indicative. However, in Form 1 (application for EIA Clearance),
for any question for which answer is ‘Yes’, then the corresponding activity shall reflect in project
activities. Similarly ‘parameters’/’factors’ will also be changed within a component in order to
reflect the target species of prime concern in the receiving local environment.

4.3.5 Testing the significance of impacts

The following set of conditions may be used as the checklist for testing the significance of
the impacts and also to provide information in (II) Activity, Column IV of Form 1.

̇ Will there be a large change in environmental conditions?

̇ Will new features be out-of-scale with the existing environment?
̇ Will the effect be unusual in the area or particularly complex?
̇ Will the effect extend over a large area?
̇ Will there be any potential for trans-frontier impact?
̇ Will many people be affected?
̇ Will many receptors of other types (fauna and flora, businesses, facilities) be
affected?
̇ Will valuable or scarce features or resources be affected?
̇ Is there a risk that environmental standards will be breached?
̇ Is there a risk that protected sites, areas, features will be affected?
̇ Is there a high probability of the effect occurring?
̇ Will the effect continue for a long time?
̇ Will the effect be permanent rather than temporary?
̇ Will the impact be continuous rather than intermittent?
̇ If it is intermittent will it be frequent rather than rare?
̇ Will the impact be irreversible?
̇ Will it be difficult to avoid, or reduce or repair or compensate for the effect?
For each “Yes” answer in column 3, the nature of effects and reasons for it should be
recorded in the column 4. The questions are designed so that an “Yes” answer in column
3, will generally point towards the need for analyzing for the significance and
requirement for conducting impact assessment for the effect.

4.3.6 Terms of reference for EIA studies

ToR for EIA studies in respect of the Induction/arc furnaces/cupola furnaces industry may
include, but not limited to the following:

1. Executive summary of the project – giving a prima facie idea of the objectives of the
proposal, use of resources, justification, etc. In addition, it should provide a
compilation of EIA report including EMP and the post-project monitoring plan in
brief.

Project description

2. Justification for selecting the proposed unit size.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-17
 Operational Aspects of EIA

3. Land requirement for the project including its break up for various purposes and its
availability and optimization.
4. Details of proposed layout clearly demarcating various units within the plant.
5. Complete process flow diagram describing each unit, its processes and operations,
along with material and energy inputs and outputs (material and energy balance).
6. Details on design and manufacturing process for all the units.
7. Details on environmentally sound technologies for recycling of hazardous materials,
as per CPCB Guidelines, may be mentioned in case of handling scrap and other
recycled materials.
8. Details on proposed source-specific pollution control schemes and equipments to
meet the national standards.
9. Details on requirement of raw materials, its source and storage at the plant.
10. Details on requirement of energy and water along with its source and authorization
from the concerned department. Location of water intake and outfall points (with
coordinates).
11. Details on water balance including quantity of effluent generated, recycled & reused.
Efforts to minimize effluent discharge and to maintain quality of receiving water
body.
12. Details of effluent treatment plant, inlet and treated water quality with specific
efficiency of each treatment unit in reduction in respect of all concerned/regulated
environmental parameters.
13. Details of the proposed methods of water conservation and recharging.
14. Sources of emissions, adequacy of control measures and monitoring protocol.
15. Details on composition, generation and utilization of waste/fuel gases.
16. Management plan for solid/hazardous waste generation, storage, utilization and
disposal.
17. Details on toxic metal content in the waste material and its composition and end use
(particularly of slag).
18. Details on toxic content (TCLP), composition and end use of chrome slag. Details on
the recovery of the Ferro chrome from the slag and its proper disposal.
19. Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel storage, restroom,
etc., to be provided to the workers during construction as well as to the casual
workers including truck drivers during operation phase.
20. In case of expansion of existing industries, remediation measures adopted to restore
the environmental quality if the groundwater, soil, crop, air, etc., are affected and a
detailed compliance to the prior environmental clearance/consent conditions.
21. Any litigation pending against the project and /or any direction /order passed by any
Court of Law related to the environmental pollution and impacts in the last two years,
if so, details thereof.

Description of the environment

22. The study area shall be up to a distance of 10 km from the boundary of the proposed
project site.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-18
 Operational Aspects of EIA

23. Topography of the study area.

24. Location of the project site, township and nearest villages with distances from the site
to be demarcated on a toposheet (1: 50000 scale).
25. Land use based on satellite imagery including location of residential, national parks /
wildlife sanctuary, villages, industries, all ecologically sensitive areas, etc. for the
study area.
26. Demography details of all the villages falling within study area.
27. Baseline data to be collected from the study area w.r.t. different components of
environment viz. air, noise, water, land, biology and socio-economics (please refer
Section 4.4.2 for guidance for assessment of baseline components and identify
attributes of concern). Actual monitoring of baseline environmental components shall
be strictly according to the parameters prescribed in the ToR after considering the
proposed coverage of parameters by the proponent in draft ToR and shall commence
after finalization of ToR by the competent Authority.
28. Geological features and geo-hydrological status of the study area at solid waste dump
zone.
29. Surface water quality of nearby water sources and other surface drains.
30. Details on ground water quality.
31. Details on water quality for parameters pH, temperature, COD, Biochemical oxygen
demand (27oC, 3 days), TDS*, Suspended solids*, Phenolic compounds (As
C6H5OH)*, Cyanides (As CN)*, Oil & grease*, Ammonical nitrogen (As N)*,
chlorides*, sulphides*, etc. (* - As applicable)
32. Details of exsiting ambient air quality for the parameters, SO2*, NOx*, PM10*,
PM2.5*, O3*, Pb*, CO*, C6H6*, benzo(a)pyrene (BaP)*, etc. and evaluation of the
adequacy of the proposed pollution control devices to meet gaseous emissions and
dust fall data with heavy metal analysis. (* - as applicable)
33. Details on stack and fugitive emissions for SPM*, PM10*, PM2.5*, SO2*, NOx*,
HC*, CO*, acid mist*, VOC* and Benzopyrenes* (at ground level) and evaluation of
the adequacy of the proposed pollution control devices to meet gaseous emissions and
dust fall data with heavy metal analysis. (* - as applicable)
34. The air quality contours may be plotted on a location map showing the location of
project site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if any and wind roses.
35. At least one season data of three continuous months with average, range and 98
percentile value for each parameter of concern for gaseous emissions for existing
plants other than monsoon season.
36. Details on noise level at sensitive/commercial receptors.
37. Proposed baseline monitoring network for the consideration and approval of the
Competent Authority.
38. Site-specific or published secondary micro-meteorological data including mixing
height.
39. Ecological status (terrestrial and aquatic) of the study area such as habitat type and
quality, species, diversity, rarity, fragmentation, ecological linkage, age, abundance,
etc.
40. If any incompatible land use attributes fall within the study area, proponent shall
describe the sensitivity (distance, area and significance) and propose the additional

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-19
 Operational Aspects of EIA

points based on significance for review and acceptance by the EAC/SEAC.

Incompatible land use attributes include:
− Public water supply areas from rivers/surface water bodies, from ground water
− Scenic areas/tourism areas/hill resorts
− Religious places, pilgrim centers that attract over 10 lakh pilgrims a year
− Protected tribal settlements (notified tribal areas where industrial activity is not
permitted)
− Monuments of national significance, World Heritage Sites
− Cyclone, Tsunami prone areas (based on last 25 years)
− Airport areas
− Any other feature as specified by the State or local government and other features
as locally applicable, including prime agricultural lands, pastures, migratory
corridors, etc.
41. If ecologically sensitive attributes fall within the study area, proponent shall describe
the sensitivity (distance, area and significance) and propose the additional points
based on significance for review and acceptance by the EAC/SEAC. Ecological
sensitive attributes include:
− National parks
− Wild life sanctuaries Game reserve
− Tiger reserve/elephant reserve/turtle nesting ground
− Mangrove area
− Wetlands
− Zoological gardens
− Reserved and protected forests
− Any other closed/protected area under the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972,
− Any other eco-sensitive areas.
42. If the location falls in Valley, specific issues connected to the natural resources
management shall be studied and presented.
43. If the location falls in CRZ area: A CRZ map duly authenticated by one of the
authorized agencies demarcating LTL, HTL, CRZ area, location of the project and
associate facilities w.r.t. CRZ, coastal features such as mangroves, if any.
– Provide the CRZ map in 1:10000 scale in general cases and in 1:5000 scale for
specific observations.
– Proposed site for disposal of dredged material and environmental quality at the
point of disposal/impact areas.
– Fisheries study should be done w.r.t. Benthos and Marine organic material and
coastal fisheries.

Anticipated environmental impacts and mitigation measures

44. Anticipated generic environmental impacts due to the project are indicated in Table 4-
2, which may be evaluated for significance and based on corresponding likely
impacts VECs may be identified. Baseline studies may be conducted for all these
concerned VECs and likely impacts will have to be assessed for their magnitude in
order to identify mitigation measures (please refer Chapter 4 of the manual for
guidance).

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-20
 Operational Aspects of EIA

45. Tools as given in Section 4.4.3 may be referred for the appropriate assessment of
environmental impacts and same may be submitted in draft ToR for consideration and
approval by EAC/SEAC.
46. While identifying the likely impacts, also include the following for analysis of
significance and required mitigation measures:
− impacts due to transport of raw materials and end/finished products
− impacts due to fugitive emissions, stack emissions and other emissions on
ambient air quality
− impacts due to furnace operations
− impacts due to wastewater discharge
− impact due to project activities on health of workers/nearby residents
− impacts due to noise
− impact on local infrastructure due to project and any other project-specific
significant impacts
47. In case of likely impact from the proposed facility on the surrounding reserve forests,
if any, conservation Plan for wild fauna in consultation with the State Forest
Department.
48. For identifying the mitigation measures, please refer Chapter III for source control
and treatment. Besides typical mitigation measures which may also be considered are
discussed in Table 4-5.
49. Proposed measures for occupational health and safety of the workers
50. Action plan for green cover development including the details of species, width of
plantation, planning schedule, etc., in accordance to CPCB published guidelines
51. Details on treatment of wastewater from different units, recycle and reuse for
different purposes.
52. Hazard identification taking resources to hazardous indices, inventory analysis,
natural hazardous probability, etc., Consequent analysis of failure and accidents
resulting in release of hazardous substances.
53. Details on surface as well as roof top rainwater harvesting and groundwater recharge.
54. Action plan for solid/hazardous waste generation, storage, utilization and disposal.
55. Training programs to employers for regulated areas regarding occupational safety and
health hazards, exposure to emissions, purpose, proper use and limitations of
respiratory protective devices, etc.

Analysis of alternative resources and technologies

56. Comparison of alternate sites considered and the reasons for selecting the proposed
site. Conformity of the site with the prescribed guidelines in terms of CRZ, river,
highways, railways, etc.
57. Details on improved technologies.

Environmental monitoring program

58. Monitoring at source/control equipment

59. Monitoring of pollutants at receiving environment (ambient and work zone) for all the
appropriate notified parameters – air quality, groundwater, surface water, etc., during
operational phase of the project.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-21
 Operational Aspects of EIA

60. Identifying the regulated areas in the plant and regular monitoring of these areas for
concerned pollutants.
61. Details of monitoring network proposed for regulatory compliance and to assess the
residual impacts on VECs, if any.
62. Details of in-house monitoring capabilities and the recognized agencies if proposed
for regular monitoring.

Additional studies

63. Details on risk assessment and damage control during different phases of the project
and proposed safeguard measures.
64. Details on socio-economic development activities such as commercial property
values, generation of jobs, education, social conflicts, cultural status, accidents, etc.
65. Proposed plan to handle the socio-economic influence on the local community. The
plan should include quantitative dimension as far as possible.
66. Details on compensation package for the people affected by the project, considering
the socio-economic status of the area, homestead oustees, land oustees, and landless
labourers.
67. Points identified in the public hearing and commitment of the project proponent to the
same. Detailed action plan addressing the issues raised, and the details of necessary
allocation of funds.
68. Details on plan for corporate social responsibility including the villages, population
spread, SC/ST/backward communities, upgradation of existing schools, establishing
new schools with facilities (such as laboratories, toilets, etc.), link roads, community
halls, primary health facilities, health camps, etc.

Environmental management plan

69. Administrative and technical organizational structure to ensure proposed post-project

monitoring programme for approved mitigation measures.
70. EMP devised to mitigate the adverse impacts of the project should be provided along
with item-wise cost of its implementation (Capital and recurring costs).
71. Allocation of resources and responsibilities for plan implementation.
72. Details of the emergency preparedness plan and on-site and off-site disaster
management plan.
Note:

Above points shall be adequately addressed in the EIA report at corresponding chapters, in
addition to the contents given in the reporting structure (Table: 4-6).

4.4 Environmental Impact Assessment

The generic approach for accomplishing EIA studies is shown in Figure 4-4. Each stage is
discussed, in detail in subsequent sections.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-22
 Operational Aspects of EIA

Figure 4-4: Approach for EIA Study

4.4.1 EIA team

The success of a multi-functional activity like an EIA primarily depends on constitution

of a right team at the right time (preferable at the initial stages of an EIA) in order to
assess the significant impacts (direct, indirect as well as cumulative impacts).

The professional Team identified for a specific EIA study should consist of qualified and
experienced professionals from various disciplines in order to address the critical aspects
identified for the specific project. Based on the nature and the environmental setting,
following professionals may be identified for EIA studies:

̇ Environmental management specialist/regulator

̇ Mineral exploration and beneficiation specialist
̇ Metal technologist
̇ Air and noise quality specialist
̇ Occupational health specialist
̇ Ecologist
̇ Transportation specialist
̇ Safety and health specialist
̇ Social scientist, etc.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-23
 Operational Aspects of EIA

4.4.2 Baseline quality of the environment

EIA Notification 2006 specifies that an EIA Report should contain a description of the
existing environment that would be or might be affected directly or indirectly by the
proposed project. Environmental Baseline Monitoring (EBM) is a very important stage of
EIA. On one hand EBM plays a very vital role in EIA and on the other hand it provides
feedback about the actual environmental impacts of a project. EBM, during the
operational phase, helps in judging the success of mitigation measures in protecting the
environment. Mitigation measures, in turn are used to ensure compliance with
environmental standards, and to facilitate the needed project design or operational
changes.

Description of the existing environment should include natural, cultural, socio-economic

systems and their interrelationships. The intention is not to describe all baseline
conditions, but to focus the collection and description of baseline data on those VECs that
are important and are likely to be affected by the proposed industrial activity.

4.4.2.1 Objective of EBM in EIA context

The term ‘baseline’ refers to conditions existing before development. EBM studies are
carried out to:

̇ identify environmental conditions which might influence project design decisions

(e.g., site layout, structural or operational characteristics);
̇ identify sensitive issues or areas requiring mitigation or compensation;
̇ provide input data to analytical models used for predicting effects;
̇ provide baseline data against which the results of future monitoring programs can be
compared.
At this stage of EIA process, EBM is primarily discussed in the context of first purpose
wherein feedback from EBM programs may be used to:

̇ determine available assimilative capacity of different environmental components

within the designated impact zone and whether more or less stringent mitigation
measures are needed
̇ improve predictive capability of EIAs
There are many institutional, scientific, quality control, and fiscal issues that must be
addressed in implementation of an environmental monitoring program. Careful
consideration of these issues in the design and planning stages will help avoid many of
the pitfalls associated with environmental monitoring programs.

4.4.2.2 Environmental monitoring network design

Monitoring refers to the collection of data through a series of repetitive measurements of

environmental parameters (or, more generally, to a process of systematic observation).
Design of the environmental quality monitoring programme depends up on the
monitoring objectives specified for the selected area of interest. Types of monitoring and
network design considerations are discussed in Annexure VI.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-24
 Operational Aspects of EIA

4.4.2.3 Baseline data generation

List of important physical environmental components and indicators of EBM are given in
Table 4-3.

Table 4-3: List of Important Physical Environment Components

and Indicators of EBM

Environmental Component Environmental Indicators

Climatic variables ̇ Rainfall patterns – mean, mode, seasonality
̇ Temperature patterns
̇ Extreme events
̇ Climate change projections
̇ Prevailing wind - direction, speed, anomalies
̇ Relative humidity
̇ Stability conditions and mixing height etc.
Topography ̇ Slope form
̇ Landform and terrain analysis
̇ Specific landform types etc.
Coastal dynamics and ̇ Wave patterns
morphology ̇ Currents
̇ Shoreline morphology – near shore, foreshore
̇ Sediment – characteristics and transport etc.
Soil ̇ Type and characteristics
̇ Porosity and permeability
̇ Sub-soil permeability
̇ Run-off rate
̇ Infiltration capacity
̇ Effective depth (inches/centimeters)
̇ Inherent fertility
̇ Suitability for method of sewage disposal etc.
Drainage ̇ Surface hydrology
̇ Natural drainage pattern and network
̇ Rainfall runoff relationships
̇ Hydrogeology
̇ Groundwater characteristics – springs, etc.
Water quality ̇ Raw water availability
̇ Water quality
̇ Surface water (rivers, lakes, ponds, gullies) – quality,
water depths, flooding areas, etc.
̇ Ground water – water table, local aquifer storage
capacity, specific yield, specific retention, water level
depths and fluctuations, etc.
̇ Coastal
̇ Floodplains
̇ Wastewater discharges
̇ Thermal discharges
̇ Waste discharges, etc.
Air quality ̇ Ambient
̇ Work zone
̇ Airshed importance
̇ Odour levels, etc.
Noise ̇ Identifying sources of noise

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-25
 Operational Aspects of EIA

Environmental Component Environmental Indicators

̇ Noise due to traffic/transportation of vehicles
̇ Noise due to heavy euipment operations
̇ Duration and variations in noise over time, etc.
Biological ̇ Species composition of flora and fauna
̇ Flora – type, density, exploitation, etc.
̇ Fauna – distribution, abundance, rarity, migratory,
species diversity, habitat requirements, habitat
resilience, economic significance, commercial value, etc.
̇ Fisheries – migratory species, species with commercial/
recreational value etc.
Landuse ̇ Landuse pattern, etc.

Guidance for assessment of baseline components and attributes describing sampling

network, sampling frequency, method of measurement is given in Annexure VII.

Infrastructure requirements for EBM

In addition to devising a monitoring network design and monitoring plans/program, it is

also necessary to ensure adequate resources in terms of staffing, skills, equipment,
training, budget, etc., for its implementation. Besides assigning institutional
responsibility, reporting requirements, QA/QC plans and its enforcement capability are
essential. A monitoring program that does not have an infrastructural support and QA/QC
component will have little chance of success.

Defining data statistics/analyses requirements

The data analyses to be conducted are dictated by the objectives of environmental

monitoring program. Statistical methods used to analyze data should be described in
detail prior to data collection. This is important because repetitive observations are
recorded in time and space. Besides, the statistical methods could also be chosen so that
uncertainty or error estimates in the data can be quantified. For e.g., statistical methods
useful in an environmental monitoring program include: 1) frequency distribution
analysis; 2) analysis of variance; 3) analysis of covariance; 4) cluster analysis; 5) multiple
regression analysis; 6) time series analysis; 7) the application of statistical models.

Use of secondary data

The EBM program for EIA can at best address temporal and/or spatial variations limited
to a limited extent because of cost implications and time limitations. Therefore analysis
of all available information or data is essential to establish the regional profiles. So all the
relevant secondary data available for different environmental components should be
collated and analyzed.

To facilitate stakeholders, IL&FS Ecosmart Ltd., has made an attempt to compile the list
of information required for EIA studies and sources of secondary data, which are given in
Annexure VIIIA and Annexure VIIIB.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-26
 Operational Aspects of EIA

4.4.3 Impact prediction tools

The scientific and technical credibility of an EIA relies on the ability of EIA practitioners
to estimate the nature, extent, and magnitude of change in environmental components that
may result from project activities. Information about predicted changes is needed for
assigning impact significance, prescribing mitigation measures, and designing &
developing EMPs and monitoring programs. The more accurate the predictions, the more
confident the EIA practitioner will be in prescribing specific measures to eliminate or
minimize the adverse impacts of development project.

Choice of models/methods for impact predictions in respect to air, noise, water, land,
biological and socio-economic environment are tabulated in Annexure IX.

4.4.4 Significance of the impacts

Evaluating the significance of environmental effects is perhaps the most critical

component of impact analysis. The interpretation of significance bears directly on the
subsequent EIA process and also during prior environmental clearance on project
approvals and condition setting. At an early stage, it also enters into screening and
scoping decisions on what level of assessment is required and which impacts and issues
will be addressed.

Impact significance is also a key to choosing among alternatives. In total, the attribution
of significance continues throughout the EIA process, from scoping to EIS review, in a
gradually narrowing “cone of resolution” in which one stage sets up the next. But at this
stage it is the most important as better understanding and quantification of impact
significance is required.

One common approach is based on determination of the significance of predicted changes

in the baseline environmental characteristics and compares these w.r.t regulatory
standards, objective criteria and similar ‘thresholds’ as eco-sensitivity, cultural /religious
values. Often, these are outlined in guidance. A better test proposed by the CEAA
(1995) is to determine if ‘residual’ environmental effects are adverse, significant, and
likely (given under). But at this stage, the practice of formally evaluating significance of
residual impacts, i.e., after predicting the nature and magnitude of impacts based on
before-versus-after-project comparisons, and identifying measures to mitigate these
effects is not being followed in a systematic way.

i. Step 1: Are the environmental effects adverse?

Criteria for determining if effects are “adverse” include:

̇ effects on biota health

̇ effects on rare or endangered species
̇ reductions in species diversity
̇ habitat loss
̇ transformation of natural landscapes
̇ effects on human health
̇ effects on current use of lands and resources for traditional purposes by aboriginal
persons
̇ foreclosure of future resource use or production

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-27
 Operational Aspects of EIA

ii. Step 2: Are the adverse environmental effects significant?

Criteria for determining ‘significance’ are to judge that the impacts:

̇ are extensive over space or time

̇ are intensive in concentration or proportion to assimilative capacity
̇ exceed environmental standards or thresholds
̇ do not comply with environmental policies, landuse plans, sustainability strategy
̇ adversely and seriously affect ecologically sensitive areas
̇ adversely and seriously affect heritage resources, other landuses, community lifestyle
and/or indigenous peoples traditions and values

iii. Step 3: Are the significant adverse environmental effects likely?

Criteria for determining ‘likelihood’ include:

̇ probability of occurrence, and

̇ scientific uncertainty

4.5 Social Impact Assessment

Social Impact Assessment (SIA) is an instrument used to analyze social issues and solicit
stakeholder views for the design of projects. SIA helps in making the project responsive
to social development concerns, including options that enhance benefits for poor and
vulnerable people while mitigating risk and adverse impacts. It analyzes distributional
impacts of intended project benefits on different stakeholder groups, and identifies
differences in assets and capabilities to access the project benefits.

The scope and depth of SIA should be determined by the complexity and importance of
the issues studied, taking into account the skills and resources available. SIA should
include studies related to involuntary resettlement, compulsory land acquisition, impact of
imported workforces, job losses among local people, damage to sites of cultural, historic
or scientific interest, impact on minority or vulnerable groups, child or bonded labour, use
of armed security guards. However, SIA may primarily include the following:

Description of the socio-economic, cultural and institutional profile

Conduct a rapid review of available sources of information to describe the socio-

economic, cultural and institutional interface in which the project operates.

Socio-economic and cultural profile: Describe the most significant social, economic and
cultural features that differentiate social groups in the project area. Describe their
different interests in the project, and their levels of influence. Explain specific effects that
the project may have on the poor and underprivileged. Identify any known conflicts
among groups that may affect project implementation.

Institutional profile: Describe the institutional environment; consider both the presence
and function of public, private and civil society institutions relevant to the operation. Are
there important constraints within existing institutions e.g. disconnect between
institutional responsibilities and the interests and behaviors of personnel within those
institutions? Or are there opportunities to utilize the potential of existing institutions, e.g.
private or civil society institutions, to strengthen implementation capacity.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-28
 Operational Aspects of EIA

Legislative and regulatory considerations

To review laws and regulations governing the project’s implementation and access of
poor and excluded groups to goods, services and opportunities provided by the project. In
addition, review the enabling environment for public participation and development
planning. SIA should build on strong aspects of legal and regulatory systems to facilitate
program implementation and identify weak aspects while recommending alternative
arrangements.

Key social issues

SIA provides baseline information for designing the social development strategy. The
analysis should determine the key social and Institutional issues which affect the project
objectives; identify the key stakeholder groups in this context and determine how
relationships between stakeholder groups will affect or be affected by the project; and
identify expected social development outcomes and actions proposed to achieve those
outcomes.

Data collection and methodology

Describe the design and methodology for social analysis. In this regard:

̇ Build on existing data;

̇ Clarify the units of analysis for social assessment: intra-household, household level,
as well as communities/settlements and other relevant social aggregations on which
data is available or will be collected for analysis;
̇ Choose appropriate data collection and analytical tools and methods, employing
mixed methods wherever possible; mixed methods include a mix of quantitative and
qualitative methods.
Strategy to achieve social development outcomes

Identify the likely social development outcomes of the project and propose a social
development strategy, including recommendations for institutional arrangements to
achieve them, based on the findings of the social assessment. The social development
strategy could include measures that:

̇ strengthen social inclusion by ensuring inclusion of both poor and excluded groups
and intended beneficiaries are included in the benefit stream; offer access to
opportunities created by the project
̇ empower stakeholders through their participation in design and implementation of the
project, their access to information, and their increased voice and accountability (i.e. a
participation framework); and
̇ enhance security by minimizing and managing likely social risks and increasing the
resilience of intended beneficiaries and affected persons to socioeconomic shocks

Implications for analysis of alternatives

Review proposed approaches for the project, and compare them in terms of their relative
impacts and social development outcomes. Consider what implications the findings of the
social assessment might have on those approaches. Should some new components be
added to the approach, or other components be reconsidered or modified?

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-29
 Operational Aspects of EIA

If SIA and consultation processes indicate that alternative approaches may have better
development outcomes, such alternatives should be described and considered, along with
the likely budgetary and administrative effects these changes might have.

Recommendations for project design and implementation arrangements

Provide guidance to project management and other stakeholders on how to integrate

social development issues into project design and implementation arrangements. As much
as possible, suggest specific action plans or implementation mechanisms to address
relevant social issues and potential impacts. These can be developed as integrated or
separate action plans, for example, as Resettlement Action Plans, Indigenous Peoples
Development Plans, Community Development Plans, etc.

Developing a monitoring plan

Through SIA process, a framework for monitoring and evaluation should be developed.
To the extent possible, this should be done in consultation with key stakeholders,
especially beneficiaries and affected people.

The framework shall identify expected social development indicators, establish

benchmarks, and design systems and mechanisms for measuring progress and results
related to social development objectives. The framework shall identify organizational
responsibilities in terms of monitoring, supervision, and evaluation procedures. Wherever
possible, participatory monitoring mechanisms shall be incorporated. The framework
should establish:

̇ a set of monitoring indicators to track the progress achieved. The benchmarks and
indicators should be limited in number, and should combine both quantitative and
qualitative types of data. The indicators for outputs to be achieved by the social
development strategy should include indicators to monitor the process of stakeholder
participation, implementation and institutional reform
̇ indicators to monitor social risk and social development outcomes; and indicators to
monitor impacts of the project’s social development strategy. It is important to
suggest mechanisms through which lessons learnt from monitoring and stakeholder
feedback can result in changes to improve the operation of the project. Indicators
should be of such a nature that results and impacts can be disaggregated by gender
and other relevant social groups
̇ define transparent evaluation procedures. Depending on context, these may include a
combination of methods, such as participant observation, key informant interviews,
focus group discussions, census and socio-economic surveys, gender analysis,
Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA), Participatory Poverty Assessment (PPA)
methodologies, and other tools. Such procedures should be tailored to the special
conditions of the project and to the different groups living in the project area;
Estimate resource and budget requirements for monitoring and evaluation activities,
and a description of other inputs (such as institutional strengthening and capacity
building) needs to be carried out

4.6 Risk Assessment

Industrial accidents results in great personal and financial loss. Managing these
accidental risks in today’s environment is the concern of every industry including

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-30
 Operational Aspects of EIA

induction and electric arc furnace, submerged arc furnace and cupola industry, because
either real or perceived incidents can quickly jeopardize the financial viability of a
business. Many facilities involve various manufacturing processes that have the potential
for accidents which may be catastrophic to the plant, work force, environment, or public.

The main objective of risk assessment study is to propose a comprehensive but simple
approach to carry out risk analysis and conducting feasibility studies for industries,
planning and management of industrial prototype hazard analysis study in Indian context.

Risk analysis and risk assessment should provide details on Quantitative Risk
Assessment (QRA) techniques used world-over to determine risk posed to people who
work inside or live near hazardous facilities, and to aid in preparing effective emergency
response plans by delineating a Disaster Management Plan (DMP) to handle onsite and
offsite emergencies. Hence, QRA is an invaluable method for making informed risk-
based process safety and environmental impact planning decisions, as well as being
fundamental to any decision while siting a facility. QRA whether, site-specific or risk-
specific for any plant is complex and needs extensive study that involves process
understanding, hazard identification, consequence modeling, probability data,
vulnerability models/data, local weather and terrain conditions and local population data.
QRA may be carried out to serve the following objectives:

̇ Identification of safety areas

̇ Identification of hazard sources
̇ Generation of accidental release scenarios for escape of hazardous materials from the
facility
̇ Identification of vulnerable units with recourse to hazard indices
̇ Estimation of damage distances for the accidental release scenarios with recourse to
Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) analysis
̇ Hazard and Operability studies (HAZOP) in order to identify potential failure cases of
significant consequences
̇ Estimation of probability of occurrences of hazardous event through fault tree
analysis and computation of reliability of various control paths
̇ Assessment of risk on basis of above evaluation against the risk acceptability criteria
relevant to the situation
̇ Suggest risk mitigation measures based on engineering judgement, reliability and risk
analysis approaches
̇ Delineation / upgradation of DMP
̇ Safety Reports: with external safety report/ occupational safety report
The risk assessment report may cover the following in terms of the extent of damage with
resource to MCA analysis and delineation of risk mitigations measures with an approach
to DMP.

̇ Hazard identification – identification of hazardous activities, hazardous materials,

past accident records, etc.
̇ Hazard quantification – consequence analysis to assess the impacts
̇ Risk Presentation
̇ Risk Mitigation Measures
̇ Disaster Management Plans

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-31
 Operational Aspects of EIA

Figure 4-5: Risk Assessment – Conceptual Framework

Methods of risk prediction should cover all the design intentions and operating
parameters to quantify risk in terms of probability of occurrence of hazardous events and
magnitude of its consequence. Table 4-4 shows the predictive models for risk
assessment.

Table 4-4: Choice of Models for Impact Predictions: Risk Assessment

Name Application Remarks

EFFECT Consequence Analysis for Heat load, press wave &

Visualization of accidental chemical toxic release exposure
release scenarios & its consequence neutral gas dispersion
Consequence Analysis for
WHAZAN Visualization of accidental chemical
release scenarios & its consequence
DEGADIS Consequence Analysis for Dense gas dispersion
Visualization of accidental chemical
release scenarios & its consequence
HAZOP and Fault Tree For estimating top event probability Failure frequency data is
Assessment required
Pathways reliability and For estimating reliability of Markov models
protective system hazard equipments and protective systems
analysis
Vulnerability Exposure Estimation of population exposure Uses probit equation for
models population exposure
F-X and F-N curves Individual / Societal risks Graphical Representation

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-32
 Operational Aspects of an EIA

Figure 4-6: Comprehensive Risk Assessment - At a Glance

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-33
 Operational Aspects of an EIA

4.7 Mitigation Measures

The purpose of mitigation is to identify measures that safeguard the environment and the
community affected by the proposal. Mitigation is both a creative and practical phase of
the EIA process. It seeks to find the best ways and means of avoiding, minimizing and
remedying impacts. Mitigation measures must be translated into action in right way and
at the right time, if they are to be successful. This process is referred to as impact
management and takes place during project implementation. A written plan should be
prepared for this purpose, and should include a schedule of agreed actions. Opportunities
for impact mitigation will occur throughout the project cycle.

4.7.1 Important considerations for mitigation methods

The responsibility of project proponents to ‘internalize’ the full environmental costs of

development proposals is now widely accepted under “Polluter Pay” principle. In
addition, many proponents have found that good design and impact management can
result in significant savings applying the principles of cleaner production to improve their
environmental performance.

̇ The predicted adverse environmental as well as social impacts for which mitigation
measures are required should be identified and briefly summarized along with cross
referencing them to the significance, prediction components of the EIA report or
other documentation.
̇ Each mitigation measure should be briefly described w.r.t the impact of significances
to which it relates and the conditions under which it is required (for example,
continuously or in the event of contingencies). These should also be cross-referenced
to the project design and operating procedures which elaborate on the technical
aspects of implementing the various measures.
̇ Cost and responsibilities for mitigation and monitoring should be clearly defined,
including arrangements for coordination among various Authorities responsible for
mitigation.
̇ The proponent can use the EMP to develop environmental performance standards and
requirements for the project site as well as supply chain. An EMP can be
implemented through EMS for the operational phase of the project.

Prior to selecting mitigation plans it is appropriate to study the mitigation alternatives for
cost-effectiveness, technical and socio-political feasibility. Such mitigation measures
could include:

̇ avoiding sensitive areas such as eco-sensitive area e.g. fish spawning areas, dense
mangrove areas or areas known to contain rare or endangered species
̇ adjusting work schedules to minimize disturbance
̇ engineered structures such as berms and noise attenuation barriers
̇ pollution control devices such as scrubbers bag filters, dust suppression systems and
electrostatic precipitators
̇ changes in fuel feed, manufacturing, process, technology use, or waste management
practices, etc.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-34
 Operational Aspects of EIA

4.7.2 Hierarchy of elements of mitigation plan

Figure 4-7: Elements of Mitigation

A good EIA practice requires technical understanding of relevant issues and the measures
that work in such given circumstances. The priority of selection of mitigation measures
should be in the order:

Step One: Impact avoidance

This step is most effective when applied at an early stage of project planning. It can be
achieved by:

̇ not undertaking certain projects or elements that could result in adverse impacts
̇ avoiding areas that are environmentally sensitive
̇ putting in place the preventative measures to stop adverse impacts from occurring, for
example, release of water from a reservoir to maintain a fisheries regime

Step Two: Impact minimization

This step is usually taken during impact identification and prediction to limit or reduce
the degree, extent, magnitude, or duration of adverse impacts. It can be achieved by:

̇ scaling down or relocating the proposal

̇ redesigning elements of the project
̇ taking supplementary measures to manage the impacts

Step Three: Impact compensation

This step is usually applied to remedy unavoidable residual adverse impacts. It can be
achieved by:

̇ rehabilitation of the affected site or environment, for example, by habitat

enhancement and restocking fish
̇ restoration of the affected site or environment to its previous state or better, as
typically required for mine sites, forestry roads and seismic lines
̇ replacement of the same resource values at another location. For example, by
wetland engineering to provide an equivalent area to that lost to drainage or infill

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-35
 Operational Aspects of EIA

Important compensation elements

Resettlement Plans: Special considerations apply to mitigation of proposals that displace

or disrupt people. Certain types of projects, such as reservoirs and irrigation schemes and
public works, are known to cause involuntary resettlement. This is a contentious issue
because it involves far more than re-housing people; in addition, income sources and
access to common property resources are likely to be lost. Almost certainly, a
resettlement plan will be required to ensure that no one is worse off than before, which
may not be possible for indigenous people whose culture and lifestyle is tied to a locality.
This plan must include the means for those displaced to reconstruct their economies and
communities and should include an EIA of the receiving areas. Particular attention
should be given to indigenous, minority and vulnerable groups who are at higher risk
from resettlement.

In-kind compensation

When significant or net residual loss or damage to the environment is likely, in kind
compensation is appropriate. As noted earlier, environmental rehabilitation, restoration or
replacement have become standard practices for many proponents. Now, increasing
emphasis is given to a broader range of compensation measures to offset impacts and
assure the sustainability of development proposals. These include impact compensation
‘trading’, such as offsetting CO2 emissions by planting forests to sequester carbon.

4.7.3 Typical mitigation measures

Choice of location for the developmental activity plays an important role in preventing
adverse impacts on surrounding environment. Detailed guidelines on siting of industries
are provided in Section 4.2. However, if the developmental activity produces any more
adverse impacts, mitigation measures should be taken.

Previous sub-sections of the Section 4.7 could be precisely summarized into following:

̇ Impacts from a developmental project could have many dimensions. As most of the
direct impacts are caused by releases from developmental projects, often control at
source is the best opportunity to either eliminate or mitigate the impacts, in case these
are cost-effective. In other words, the best way to mitigate impacts is to prevent them
from occurring. Choice of raw materials/technologies/processes which produce least
impact would be one of the options to achieve it.
̇ After exploring cost-effective feasible alternatives to control impacts at source,
various interventions to minimize adverse impacts may be considered. These
interventions, primarily aim at reducing the residual impacts on VECs of the
receiving environment to acceptable concentrations.
̇ Degree of control at source and external interventions differs from situation-to-
situation and is largely governed by techno-economic feasibility. While the
regulatory bodies stress for further source control (due to high reliability), the project
proponents bargain for other interventions which may be relatively cost-effective than
further control at source (in any case, project authority is required to meet the
industry-specific standards by adopting the best practicable technologies. However,
if the location demands further control at source, then the proponents are required to
adopt further advanced control technologies, i.e. towards best available control
technologies). After having discussions with the project proponent, EAC/SEAC

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-36
 Operational Aspects of EIA

reaches to an agreed level of source control + other interventions (together called as

mitigation measures in the given context) that achieve the targeted protection levels
for the VECs in the receiving environment. These levels will become the principal
clearance conditions.
̇ Chapter 3 of this TGM offers elaborate information on cleaner technologies, waste
minimization opportunities, and control technologies for various kinds of polluting
parameters that emanate from this developmental activity. This information may be
used to draw appropriate control measures applicable at source.
The choice of interventions for mitigation of impacts may also be numerous and depend
on various factors. Mitigation measures based on location-specific suitability and some
other factors are discussed in sub-sections 4.7.1 and 4.7.2. A few typical measures which
may also be explored for mitigation of impacts are listed in Table 4-5.

Table 4-5: Typical Mitigation Measures

Impacts Typical Mitigation steps

Soil erosion ̇ Windscreens, maintenance, and installation of ground cover

̇ Installation of drainage ditches
̇ Runoff and retention ponds
̇ Minimize disturbances and scarification of the surface
̇ Usage of appropriate monitoring and control facilities for
construction equipments deployed
̇ Methods to reuse earth material generated during excavation, etc.
Resources- fuel/ ̇ Availing the resources which could be replenished by natural
construction material, systems, etc.
etc.
Deforestation ̇ Plant or create similar areas
̇ Initiate a tree planning program in other areas
̇ Donate land to conservationalist groups, etc.
Water pollution and ̇ Channeling and retention of water to reduce erosion and situation
issues ̇ Collection and treatment of sewage and organic waste
̇ Increased recycling and reuse of water
̇ Use of biodegradable or otherwise readily treatable additives
̇ Cooling ponds, towers and canals to reduce temperatures of
cooling water discharge
̇ Neutralization and sedimentation of wastewater
̇ Dewatering of sludges and appropriate disposal of solids
̇ Use deep well injection below potable levels
̇ Construct liners of ponds and solids waste disposal
̇ To avoid to dilute water at point of discharge, etc.
Air pollution ̇ Periodic checking of vehicles and construction machinery to
ensure compliance to emission standards
̇ Attenuation of pollution/protection of receptor through green
belts/green cover
̇ Regular monitoring of air polluting concentrations
̇ Wetting of roadways to reduce traffic dust and reentrained
particles
̇ Installation of windscreens to breakup the wind flow
̇ Burning of refuse in incinerators on days when meteorological
conditions provide for good mixing and dispersion
̇ Proper dust collection and gas cleaning equipment meeting
emission limits, etc.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-37
 Operational Aspects of EIA

Impacts Typical Mitigation steps

Ambient Noise ̇ Heavy duty muffler systems on heavy equipment to reduce noise
pollution power level to specification
̇ Noise proof enclosures
̇ Plant trees as green belt
̇ Limiting certain activities
̇ Periodic maintenance of equipments/repalcing whenever
necessary/lubrication of rotating parts, etc.
̇ Maintain noise levels from below 90 dB(A)
̇ Provide ear protection if in excess
̇ Limit duty hours
Chemical discharges ̇ Develop spill prevention plans
and spills ̇ Develop traps and containment system and chemically treat
discharges on site, etc.
Worker exposure to ̇ Provide dust extraction equipment
dust from ash and ̇ Maintain dust levels less than 10 mg/m3 or as stipulated by
coal Factories Act.
̇ Monitor for free silica content
̇ Provide dust masks when levels are exceeded, etc.
Worker exposure to ̇ Maintain plant properly
toxic gases leaking ̇ Monitor concentrations of pollutants with levels not to exceed
from the plant TWA 8 hrs. threshold levels as stipulated by Factories Act, e.g.,
̇ SO2 – 2 ppm
̇ CO – 50 ppm
̇ NO2 – 3 ppm
Induced secondary ̇ Provide infrastructure plan and financial support for increased
development puts demands
increased demand on ̇ Construct facilities to reduce demands
infrastructure
Occupational health ̇ Provision of worker camps with proper santiation and medical
and safety facilities, as well as making the worker camps self- sufficient with
resources like water supply, power supply, etc.
̇ Arrangement of periodic health check-ups for early detection and
control of communicatble diseases.
̇ Arrangement to dispose off the wastes at approved disposal sites.
̇ Provide preventive measures for potentital fire hazards with
requisite fire detection, fire-fighting facilities and adequate water
storage, etc.
Social ̇ Health and safety measures for workers
̇ Development of traffic plan that minimizes road use by workers
̇ Upgrade of roads and intersections
̇ Provide suffiecient counselling and time to the affected population
for relocation
̇ Discuss and finalize alternate arrangements and associated
infrastructure in places of religious importance
̇ Exploration of alternative approach routes in consultation with
local community and other stakeholders
̇ Provision of alternate jobs in unskilled and skilled categories

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-38
 Operational Aspects of EIA

4.8 Environmental Management Plan

A typical EMP shall be composed of the following:

1. summary of potential impacts of the proposal

2. description of recommended mitigation measures
3. description of monitoring programme to ensure compliance with relevant standards
and residual impacts
4. allocation of resources and responsibilities for plan implementation
5. implementation schedule and reporting procedures
6. contingency plan when impacts are greater than expected

Summary of impacts: The predicted adverse environmental and social impacts for which
mitigation measures are identified in earlier sections to be briefly summarized with cross
referencing to the corresponding sections in EIA report.

Description of mitigation measures: Each mitigation measure should be briefly

described w.r.t. the impact to which it relates and the conditions under which it is
required. These should be accompanied by/referenced to, project design and operating
procedures which elaborate on the technical aspects of implementing various measures.

Description of monitoring programme to ensure compliance with relevant standards

and residual impacts: Environmental monitoring refers to compliance monitoring and
residual impact monitoring. Compliance monitoring refers to meeting the industry-
specific statutory compliance requirements (Ref. Applicable National regulations as
detailed in Chapter 3).

Residual impact monitoring refers to monitoring of identified sensitive locations with

adequate number of samples and frequency. The monitoring programme should clearly
indicate the linkages between impacts identified in the EIA report, measurement
indicators, detection limits (where appropriate), and definition of thresholds that signal
the need for corrective actions.

Allocation of resources and responsibilities for plan implementation: These should be

specified for both the initial investment and recurring expenses for implementing all
measures contained in the EMP, integrated into the total project costs, and factored into
loan negotiation.

The EMP should contain commitments that are binding on the proponent in different
phases of project implementation i.e., pre-construction or site clearance, construction,
operation, decommissioning.

Responsibilities for mitigation and monitoring should be clearly defined, including

arrangements for coordination between various actors responsible for mitigation. Details
should be provided w.r.t deployment of staff (detailed organogram), monitoring network
design, parameters to be monitored, analysis methods, associated equipments, etc.

Implementation schedule and reporting procedures: The timing, frequency and

duration of mitigation measure should be specified in an implementation schedule,
showing links with overall project implementation. Procedures to provide information on

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-39
 Operational Aspects of EIA

progress and results of mitigation and monitoring measures should also be clearly
specified.

Contingency Plan when the impacts are greater than expected: There shall be a
contingency plan for attending the situations where the residual impacts are higher than
expected. It is an imperative requirement for all project Authorities to plan additional
programmes to deal with the situation, after duly intimating the concerned local
regulatory bodies.

4.9 Reporting

Structure of the EIA report (Appendix III of the EIA Notification), applicable for
induction and electric arc furnace, submerged arc furnace and cupola industry is given in
the Table 4.6. Each task prescribed in ToR shall be incorporated appropriately in the
contents in addition to the contents described in the table.

Table 4-6: Structure of EIA Report

S.NO EIA STRUCTURE CONTENTS

1. Introduction ̇ Purpose of the report
̇ Identification of project & project proponent
̇ Brief description of nature, size, location of the project and
its importance to the country, region
̇ Scope of the study – details of regulatory scoping carried
out (As per Terms of Reference)
2. Project Description Condensed description of those aspects of the project (based on
project feasibility study), likely to cause environmental effects.
Details should be provided to give clear picture of the following:
̇ Type of project
̇ Need for the project
̇ Location (maps showing general location, specific location,
project boundary & project site layout)
̇ Size or magnitude of operation (incl. Associated activities
required by or for the project)
̇ Proposed schedule for approval and implementation
̇ Technology and process description
̇ Project description including drawings showing project
layout, components of project etc. Schematic representations
of the feasibility drawings which give information important
for EIA purpose
̇ Description of mitigation measures incorporated into the
project to meet environmental standards, environmental
operating conditions, or other EIA requirements (as required
by the scope)
̇ Assessment of new & untested technology for the risk of
technological failure
3. Description of the ̇ Study area, period, components & methodology
Environment ̇ Establishment of baseline for VECs, as identified in the
scope
̇ Base maps of all environmental components
4. Anticipated ̇ Details of Investigated Environmental impacts due to project
Environmental location, possible accidents, project design, project
Impacts & construction, regular operations, final decommissioning or

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-40
 Operational Aspects of EIA

S.NO EIA STRUCTURE CONTENTS

Mitigation Measures rehabilitation of a completed project
̇ Measures for minimizing and / or offsetting adverse impacts
identified
̇ Irreversible and irretrievable commitments of environmental
components
̇ Assessment of significance of impacts (Criteria for
determining significance, Assigning significance)
̇ Mitigation measures
5. Analysis of Incase, the scoping exercise results in need for alternatives:
Alternatives
(Technology & Site) ̇ Description of each alternative
̇ Summary of adverse impacts of each alternative
̇ Mitigation measures proposed for each alternative and
selection of alternative
6. Environmental ̇ Technical aspects of monitoring the effectiveness of
Monitoring Program mitigation measures (incl. measurement methodologies,
frequency, location, data analysis, reporting schedules,
emergency procedures, detailed budget & procurement
schedules)
7. Additional Studies ̇ Public consultation
̇ Risk assessment
̇ Social impact assessment, R&R action plans
8. Project Benefits ̇ Improvements in physical infrastructure
̇ Improvements in social infrastructure
̇ Employment potential –skilled; semi-skilled and unskilled
̇ Other tangible benefits
9. Environmental Cost ̇ If recommended at the scoping stage
Benefit Analysis
10. EMP ̇ Description of the administrative aspects that ensures proper
implementation of mitigative measures are implemented and
their effectiveness monitored, after approval of the EIA
11. Summary & ̇ Overall justification for implementation of the project
Conclusion (This ̇ Explanation of how, adverse effects have been mitigated
will constitute the
summary of the EIA
Report)
12. Disclosure of ̇ Names of the Consultants engaged with their brief resume
Consultants engaged and nature of Consultancy rendered

4.10 Public Consultation

Public consultation refers to the process by which the concerns of local affected people
and others who have plausible stake in the environmental impacts of the project or
activity are ascertained.

̇ Public consultation is not a decision taking process, but is a process to collect views
of the people having plausible stake. If the SPCB/Public agency conducting public
hearing is not convinced with the plausible stake, then such expressed views need not
be considered.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-41
 Operational Aspects of EIA

̇ Public consultation involves two components, one is public hearing, and other one is
inviting written responses/objections through Internet/by post, etc., by placing the
summary of EIA report on the web site.
̇ All Category A and Category B1 projects require public hearing except the following:
− Once prior environmental clearance is granted to industrial estates/SEZs/EPZs
etc., for a given composition (type and capacity) of industries, then individual
units will not require public hearing
− Expansion of roads and highways, which do not involve any further acquisition of
land.
− Maintenance dredging provided the dredged material shall be disposed within
port limits
− All building/ construction projects/ area development projects/townships
− All Category B2 projects
− All projects concerning national defense and security or involving other strategic
considerations as determined by the Central Government
̇ Public hearing shall be carried out at the site or in its close proximity, district-wise,
for ascertaining concerns of local affected people.
̇ Project proponent shall make a request through a simple letter to the
Member Secretary of the SPCB/UTPCC to arrange public hearing.
̇ Project proponent shall enclose with the letter of request, at least 10 hard copies and
10 soft copies of the draft EIA report including the summary EIA report in English
and in official language of the state/local language prepared as per the approved
scope of work, to the concerned Authority.
̇ Simultaneously, project proponent shall arrange to send, one hard copy and one soft
copy, of the above draft EIA report along with the summary EIA report to the
following Authorities within whose jurisdiction the project will be located:
− District magistrate/District Collector/Deputy Commissioner (s)
− Zilla parishad and municipal corporation or panchayats union
− District industries office
− Urban local bodies (ULBs)/PRIs concerned/development authorities
− Concerned regional office of the MoEF/SPCB
̇ Above mentioned Authorities except regional office of MoEF shall arrange to widely
publicize the draft EIA report within their respective jurisdictions requesting the
interested persons to send their comments to the concerned regulatory Authorities.
They shall also make draft EIA report for inspection electronically or otherwise to the
public during normal office hours till the public hearing is over.
̇ Concerned regulatory Authority (MoEF/SEIAA/UTEIA) shall display the summary
of EIA report on its website and also make full draft EIA report available for
reference at a notified place during normal office hours at their head office.
̇ SPCB or UTPCC concerned shall also make similar arrangements for giving publicity
about the project within the State/UT and make available the summary of draft EIA
report for inspection in select offices, public libraries or any other suitable location,
etc. They shall also additionally make available a copy of the draft EIA report to the
above five authorities/offices as mentioned above.
̇ The Member Secretary of the concerned SPCB or UTPCC shall finalize the date,
time and exact venue for the conduct of public hearing within seven days of the date
of the receipt of the draft EIA report from the project proponent and advertise the

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-42
 Operational Aspects of EIA

same in one major National Daily and one Regional vernacular Daily/Official State
Language.
̇ A minimum notice period of 30 (thirty) days shall be provided to the public for
furnishing their responses.
̇ No postponement of the date, time, venue of the public hearing shall be undertaken,
unless some untoward emergency situation occurs. Only in case of emergencies and
up on recommendation of the concerned District Magistrate/District Collector/
Deputy Commissioner, the postponement shall be notified to the public through the
same National and Regional vernacular dailies and also prominently displayed at all
the identified offices by the concerned SPCB/ UTPCC
̇ In the above exceptional circumstances fresh date, time and venue for the public
consultation shall be decided by the Member–Secretary of the concerned SPCB/
UTPCC only in consultation with the District Magistrate/District Collector/Deputy
Commissioner and notified afresh as per the procedure.
̇ The District Magistrate/District Collector/Deputy Commissioner or his or her
representative not below the rank of an Additional District Magistrate assisted by a
representative of SPCB or UTPCC, shall supervise and preside over the entire public
hearing process.
̇ The SPCB/UTPCC shall arrange to video film the entire proceedings. A copy of the
videotape or a CD shall be enclosed with the public hearing proceedings while
forwarding it to the Regulatory Authority concerned.
̇ The attendance of all those who are present at the venue shall be noted and annexed
with the final proceedings
̇ There shall be no quorum required for attendance for starting the proceedings
̇ Persons present at the venue shall be granted the opportunity to seek information or
clarifications on the project from the Proponent. The summary of the public hearing
proceedings accurately reflecting all the views and concerns expressed shall be
recorded by the representative of the SPCB/UTPCC and read over to the audience at
the end of the proceedings explaining the contents in the local/vernacular language
and the agreed minutes shall be signed by the District Magistrate/District
Collector/Deputy Commissioner or his or her representative on the same day and
forwarded to the SPCB/UTPCC concerned.
̇ A statement of the issues raised by the public and the comments of the proponent
shall also be prepared in the local language or the official State language, as the case
may be and in English and annexed to the proceedings.
̇ The proceedings of the public hearing shall be conspicuously displayed at the office
of the Panchayats within whose jurisdiction the project is located, office of the
concerned Zilla Parishad, District Magistrate/District Collector/Deputy
Commissioner, and the SPCB or UTPCC. The SPCB/UTPCC shall also display the
proceedings on its website for general information. Comments, if any, on the
proceedings, may be sent directly to the concerned regulatory authorities and the
Applicant concerned.
̇ The public hearing shall be completed within a period of 45 (forty five) days from
date of receipt of the request letter from the Applicant. Therefore the SPCB or
UTPCC concerned shall send public hearing proceedings to the concerned regulatory
authority within eight (8) days of the completion of the public hearing.
Simultaneously, a copy will also be provided to the project proponent. The proponent
may also directly forward a copy of the approved public hearing proceedings to the

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-43
 Operational Aspects of EIA

regulatory authority concerned along with the final EIA report or supplementary
report to the draft EIA report prepared after the public hearing and public
consultations incorporating the concerns expressed in the public hearing along with
action plan and financial allocation, item-wise, to address those concerns.
̇ Upon receipt of the same, the Authority will place executive summary of the report
on the website to invite responses from other concerned persons having a plausible
stake in the environmental aspects of the project or activity.
̇ If SPCB/UTPCC is unable to conduct public hearing in the prescribed time, the
Central Government in case of Category A projects and State Government or UT
administration in case of Category B projects at the request of the SEIAA may engage
any other agency or Authority for conducting the public hearing process within a
further period of 45 days. The respective governments shall pay the appropriate fee
to the public agency for conducting public hearing.
̇ A public agency means a non-profit making institution/ body such as
technical/academic institutions, government bodies not subordinate to the concerned
Authority.
̇ If SPCB/Public Agency authorized for conducting public hearing informs the
Authority, stating that it is not possible to conduct the public hearing in a manner,
which will enable the views of the concerned local persons to be freely expressed,
then Authority may consider such report to take a decision that in such particular
case, public consultation may not have the component of public hearing.
̇ Often restricting the public hearing to the specific district may not serve the entire
purpose, therefore, NGOs who are local and registered under the Societies Act in the
adjacent districts may also be allowed to participate in public hearing, if they so
desire.
̇ Confidential information including non-disclosable or legally privileged information
involving intellectual property right, source specified in the application shall not be
placed on the website.
̇ The Authority shall make available on a written request from any concerned person
the draft EIA report for inspection at a notified place during normal office hours till
the date of the public hearing.
̇ While mandatory requirements will have to be adhered to, utmost attention shall be
given to the issues raised in the public hearing for determining the modifications
needed in the project proposal and the EMP to address such issues.
̇ Final EIA report after making needed amendments, as aforesaid, shall be submitted
by the applicant to the concerned Authority for prior environmental clearance.
Alternatively, a supplementary report to draft EIA and EMP addressing all concerns
expressed during the public consultation may be submitted.

4.11 Appraisal

Appraisal means the detailed scrutiny by the EAC/SEAC of the application and the other
documents like the final EIA report, outcome of the public consultation including public
hearing proceedings submitted by the applicant for grant of prior environmental
clearance.

̇ The appraisal shall be made by EAC to the Central Government or SEAC to SEIAA.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-44
 Operational Aspects of EIA

̇ Project proponent either personally or through consultant can make a presentation to

EAC/SEAC for the purpose of appraising the features of the project proposal and also
to clarify the issues raised by the members of the EAC/SEAC.
̇ On completion of these proceedings, concerned EAC/SEAC shall make categorical
recommendations to the respective Authority, either for grant of prior environmental
clearance on stipulated terms & conditions, if any, or rejection of the application with
reasons.
̇ In case EAC/SEAC needs to visit the site or obtain further information before being
able to make categorical recommendations, EAC/SEAC may inform the project
proponent accordingly. In such an event, it should be ensured that the process of
prior environmental clearance is not unduly delayed to go beyond the prescribed
timeframe.
̇ Up on the scrutiny of the final report, if EAC/SEAC opines that ToR for EIA studies
finalized at the scoping stage are covered by the proponent, then the project
proponent may be asked to provide such information. If such information is declined
by the project proponent or is unlikely to be provided early enough so as to complete
the environmental appraisal within prescribed time of 60 days, the EAC/SEAC may
recommend for rejection of the proposal with the same reason.
̇ Appraisal shall be strictly in terms of ToR for EIA studies finalized at the scoping
stage and the concerns expressed during public consultation.
̇ This process of appraisal shall be completed within 60 days from the receipt of the
updated EIA and EMP reports, after completing public consultation.
̇ The EIA report will be typically examined for following:
– Project site description supported by topographic maps & photographs – detailed
description of topography, land use and activities at the proposed project site and
its surroundings (buffer zone) supported by photographic evidence.
– Clarity in description of drainage pattern, location of eco-sensitive areas,
vegetation characteristics, wildlife status - highlighting significant environmental
attributes such as feeding, breeding and nesting grounds of wildlife species,
migratory corridor, wetland, erosion and neighboring issues.
– Description of the project site – how well the interfaces between the project
related activities and the environment have been identified for the entire project
cycle i.e. construction, operation and decommissioning at the end of the project
life.
– If it is envisaged that the project is to be closed after a specified period in case of
mining projects, the interface at the closure stage also needs to be described.
– How complete and authentic are the baseline data pertaining to flora and fauna
and socio-economic aspects?
– Citing of proper references, with regard to the source(s) of baseline data as well
as the name of the investigators/investigating agency responsible for collecting
the primary data.
– How consistent are the various values of environmental parameters with respect
to each other?
– Is a reasonable assessment of the environmental and social impact made for the
identified environmental issues including project affected people?

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-45
 Operational Aspects of EIA

– To what extent the proposed environmental plan will mitigate the environmental
impact and at what estimated cost, shown separately for construction, operation
and closure stages and also separately in terms of capital and recurring expenses
along with details of agencies that will be responsible for the implementation of
environmental plan/ conservation plan.
– How well the concerns expressed/highlighted during public hearing have been
addressed and incorporated in the EMP giving item wise financial provisions and
commitments (in quantified terms)?
– How far the proposed environmental monitoring plan will effectively evaluate the
performance of EMP? Are details for environmental monitoring plan provided in
the same manner as the EMP?
– Identification of hazard and quantification of risk assessment and whether
appropriate mitigation plan has been included in the EMP?
– Does the proposal include a well formulated time bound green belt development
plan for mitigating environmental problems such as fugitive emission of dust,
gaseous pollutants, noise, odour, etc.
– Does EIA make a serious attempt to guide the project proponent for minimizing
the requirement of natural resources including land, water energy and other non
renewable resources?
– How well has the EIA statement been organized and presented so that the issues,
their impact and environmental management strategies emerge clearly from it and
how well organized was the power point presentation made before the expert
committee?
– Is the information presented in the EIA adequately and appropriately supported
by maps, imageries and photographs highlighting site features and environmental
attributes?

4.12 Decision Making

The Chairperson reads the sense of the Committee and finalizes the draft minutes of the
meeting, which are circulated by the Secretary to all expert members invited to the
meeting. Based on the response from the members, the minutes are finalized and signed
by the Chairperson. This process for finalization of the minutes should be so organized
that the time prescribed for various stages is not exceeded.

Approval / Rejection / Reconsideration

̇ The Authority shall consider the recommendations of concerned appraisal Committee

and convey its decision within 45 days of the receipt of recommendations.
̇ If the Authority disagrees with the recommendations of the Appraisal Committee,
then reasons shall be communicated to concerned Appraisal Committee and applicant
within 45 days from the receipt of the recommendations. The Appraisal Committee
concerned shall consider the observations of the Authority and furnish its views on
the observations within further period of 60 days. The Authority shall take a decision
within the next 30 days based on the views of appraisal Committee.
̇ If the decision of the Authority is not conveyed within the time, then the proponent
may proceed as if the prior environmental clearance sought has been granted or
denied by the regulatory authority in terms of the final recommendation of the

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-46
 Operational Aspects of EIA

concerned appraisal Committee. For this purpose, the decision of the Appraisal
Committee will be a public document, once the period specified above for taking the
decision by the Authority is over.
̇ In case of Category B projects, application shall be received by the
Member Secretary of the SEIAA and clearance shall also be issued by the same
SEIAA.
̇ Deliberate concealment and/or submission of false or misleading information or data
which is material to screening or scoping or appraisal or decision on the application
shall make the application liable for rejection, and cancellation of prior environmental
clearance granted on that basis. Rejection of an application or cancellation of a prior
environmental clearance already granted, on such ground, shall be decided by the
regulatory authority, after giving a personal hearing to the applicant, and following
the principles of natural justice.

If approved

̇ MoEF or concerned SEIAA will issue the environmental clearance for the project.
̇ The project proponent should make sure that the award of prior environmental
clearance is properly publicized in at least two local newspapers of the district or state
where the proposed project is located. For instance, the executive summary of the
prior environmental clearance may be published in the newspaper along with the
information about the location (website/office where it is displayed for public) where
the detailed prior environmental clearance is made available. The MoEF and
SEIAA/UTEIAA, as the case may be, shall also place the prior environmental
clearance in the public domain on Government Portal. Further copies of the prior
environmental clearance shall be endorsed to the Heads of local bodies, Panchayats
and Municipal bodies in addition to the relevant offices of the Government.
̇ The prior environmental clearance will be valid from the start date to actual
commencement of the production of the developmental activity.
̇ Usual validity period will be 5 years from the date of issuing environmental
clearance, unless specified by EAC/SEAC.
̇ A prior environmental clearance issued to a project proponent can be transferred to
another legal person entitled to undertake the project, upon application by the
transferor to the concerned Authority or submission of no-objection of the transferor
by the transferee to the concerned Authority for the concurrence. In this case,
EAC/SEAC concurrence is not required, but approval from the concerned authority is
required to avail the same project configurations, validity period transferred to the
new legally entitled person to undertake the project.

4.13 Post-clearance Monitoring Protocol

The MoEF, Government of India will monitor and take appropriate action under the EP
Act, 1986.

̇ In respect of Category A projects, it shall be mandatory for the project proponent to

make public the environmental clearance granted for their project along with the
environmental conditions and safeguards at their cost by advertising it at least in two
local newspapers of the district or State where the project is located and in addition,
this shall also be displayed in the project proponents website permanently.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-47
 Operational Aspects of EIA

̇ In respect of Category B projects, irrespective of its clearance by MoEF/SEIAA, the

project proponent shall prominently advertise in the newspapers indicating that the
project has been accorded environment clearance and the details of MoEF website
where it is displayed.
̇ The MoEF and the SEIAAs/UTEIAAs, as the case may be, shall also place the
environmental clearance in the public domain on Government Portal.
̇ Copies of environmental clearance shall be submitted by the project proponents to the
Heads of the local bodies, Panchayats and Municipal bodies in addition to the
relevant offices of the Government who in turn have to display the same for 30 days
from the date of receipt.
The project proponent must submit half-yearly compliance reports in respect of the
stipulated prior environmental clearance terms and conditions in hard and soft copies to
the regulatory authority concerned, on 1st June and 1st December of each calendar year.

All such compliance reports submitted by the project management shall be public
documents. Copies of the same shall be given to any person on application to the
concerned regulatory authority. Such latest compliance report shall also be displayed on
the website of the concerned regulatory Authority

The SPCB shall incorporate EIA clearance conditions into consent conditions in respect
of Category A and Category B projects and in parallel shall monitor and enforce the
same.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

4-48
 5.
STAKEHOLDERS’ ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Prior environmental clearance process involves many stakeholders i.e., Central

Government, State Government, SEIAA, EAC at the National Level, SEAC, Public
Agency, SPCB, the project proponent, and the public.

̇ Roles and responsibilities of the organizations involved in different stages of prior

environmental clearance are listed in Table 5-1.
̇ Organization-specific functions are listed in Table 5-2.
In this Chapter, constitution, composition, functions, etc., of the Authorities and the
Committees are discussed in detail.

Table 5-1: Roles and Responsibilities of Stakeholders Involved in

Prior Environmental Clearance

Stage MoEF/ EAC/ Project EIA Consultant SPCB/ Public And

SEIAA SEAC Proponent Public Interest
Agency Group
Screening Receives Advises the Submits Advises and
application MoEF/ application assists the
and takes SEIAA (Form 1) and proponent by
advice of provides providing
EAC/ necessary technical
SEAC information information
Scoping Approves Reviews the Submits the Prepares ToR
the ToR, ToR, visits draft ToR to
communic the proposed SEIAA and
ates the site, if facilitates the
same to required and visit of the
the project recommends EAC/SEAC
proponent the ToR to members to the
and places the MoEF/ project site
the same SEIAA
in the
website
EIA Report Reviews Submits Prepares the EIA Reviews Participates
& Public and detailed EIA report EIA report in public
Hearing forwards report as per and hearings and
Presents and
copies of the finalized conducts offers
appraises the
the EIA ToR public comments
likely impacts
report to hearing in and
Facilitates the and pollution
SPCB the manner observations
public hearing control measures
/public prescribed .
by arranging proposed in the
agency for
presentation on public hearing Submits Comments
conducting
the project, proceeding can be sent
public
EIA and EMP s and views directly to
hearing
– takes note of of SPCB, SEIAA
Places the objections and to the through
summary updates the Authority Internet in

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

5-1
 Stakeholders’ Roles and Responsibilities

Stage MoEF/ EAC/ Project EIA Consultant SPCB/ Public And

SEIAA SEAC Proponent Public Interest
Agency Group
of EIA EMP and the response to
report in accordingly project the
the website proponent summary
as well placed in the
Conveys
website
objections
to the
project
proponent
for update,
if any
Appraisal Receives Critically Submits Provides
and updated examines updated EIA, technical advise
Clearance EIA the reports, EMP reports to to the project
presentation MoEF/SEIAA. proponent and if
Takes
of the necessary
advice of Presents the
proponent presents the
EAC/ overall EIA
and proposed
SEAC, and EMP
appraises measures for
approves including
MoEF/ mitigation of
EIA and public
SEIAA likely impacts
attaches concerns to
(recommend (terms and
the terms EAC/SEAC
ations are conditions of
and
forwarded to clearance)
conditions
MoEF/
SEIAA)
Post- Implements Conducts Incorporate
clearance environmental periodic s the
Monitoring protection monitoring clearance
measures conditions
prescribed and into
submits appropriate
periodic consent
monitoring conditions
results and ensures
implementa
tion

Table 5-2: Organization-specific Functions

Organization Functions
Central ̇ Constitutes the EAC
Government ̇ Considering recommendations of the State Government, constitutes the SEIAA &
SEAC
̇ Receives application from the project proponent in case of Category A projects or
Category B projects attracting general condition
̇ Communicates the ToR finalized by the EAC to the project proponent.
̇ Receives EIA report from the project proponent and soft copy of summary of the
report for placing in the website
̇ Summary of EIA report will be placed in website. Forwards the received responses to
the project proponent
̇ Engages other public agency for conducting public hearings in cases where the SPCB
does not respond within time

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

5-2
 Stakeholders’ Roles and Responsibilities

Organization Functions
̇ Receives updated EIA report from project proponent incorporating the considerations
from the proceedings of public hearing and responses received through other media
̇ Forwards updated EIA report to the EAC for appraisal
̇ Either accepts the recommendations of EAC or asks for reconsideration of specific
issues for review by the EAC.
̇ Takes the final decision – acceptance/ rejection – of the project proposal and
communicates the same to the project proponent
State ̇ Identifies experts as per the composition specified in the Notification and subsequent
Government guidelines to recommend to the the Central Government.
̇ Extends funding support to fulfill the functions of SEIAA/SEAC
̇ Engages other public agency for conducting public hearings in cases where the SPCB
does not respond within time
̇ State Governments will suitably pay the public agency for conducting such activity
EAC ̇ Reviews Form 1 and its attachments
̇ Visits site(s), if necessary
̇ Finalizes ToR and recommends to the Central Government, which in turn
communicates the finalized ToR to the project proponent, if not exempted by the
Notification
̇ Reviews EIA report, proceedings and appraises their views to the Central government
̇ If the Central Government has any specific views, then the EAC reviews again for
appraisal
SEIAA ̇ Receives application from the project proponent
̇ Considers SEAC’s views for finalization of ToR
̇ Communicates the finalized ToR to the project proponent
̇ Receives EIA report from project proponent
̇ Uploads the summary of EIA report in the website in cases of Category B projects
̇ Forwards the responses received to the project proponent
̇ Receives updated EIA report from project proponent incorporating the considerations
from the proceedings of public hearing and responses received through other media
̇ Forwards updated EIA report to SEAC for appraisal
̇ Either accepts the recommendations of SEAC or asks for reconsideration of specific
issues for review by SEAC.
̇ Takes the final decision and communicates the same to the project proponent
SEAC ̇ Reviews Form 1
̇ If necessary visits, site(s) for finalizing the ToR
̇ Reviews updated EIA - EMP report and
̇ Appraises the SEIAA
SPCB ̇ Receives request from project proponent and conducts public hearing in the manner
prescribed.
̇ Conveys proceedings to concerned authority and project proponent
Public Agency ̇ Receives request from the respective Governments to conduct public hearing
̇ Conducts public hearing in the manner prescribed.
̇ Conveys proceedings to the concerned Authority/EAC /Project proponent

5.1 SEIAA

̇ SEIAA is constituted by the MoEF to take final decision regarding the

acceptance/rejection of prior environmental clearance to the project proposal for all
Category ‘B’ projects.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

5-3
 Stakeholders’ Roles and Responsibilities

̇ The state government may decide whether to house them at the Department of
Environment or at any other Board for effective operational support.
̇ State Governments can decide whether the positions are permanent or part-time. The
Central Government (MoEF) continues to follow the model of paying fee (TA/DA,
accommodation, sitting fee) to the Chairperson and the members of EAC. As such,
the State Government is to fund SEIAA & SEAC and decide the appropriate
institutional support for them.

A. Constitution

̇ SEIAA is constituted by the Central Government comprising of three members

including a Chairperson and Member Secretary to be nominated by the State
Government or UT Administration concerned.
̇ The Central Government will notify as and when the nominations (in order) are
received from the State Governments, within 30 days from the date of receipt.
̇ The Chairperson and the non-official member shall have a fixed term of three years,
from the date of Notification by the Central Government constituting the Authority.
The form used by the State Governments to submit nominations for Notification by the
Central Government is provided in Annexure X.

B. Composition

̇ Chairperson shall be an expert in the EIA process

̇ Member Secretary shall be a serving officer of the concerned State Government/ UT
Administration familiar with the environmental laws.
̇ Member Secretary may be of a level equivalent to the Director, Dept. of
Environment or above – a full time member.
̇ All the members including the Chairperson shall be the experts as per the criteria set
in the Notification.
̇ The Government servants can only serve as the Member Secretary to SEIAA and the
Secretary to SEAC. All other members including Chairperson of the SEIAA and
SEAC shall not be comprised of serving Government Officers; industry
representatives; and the activists.
̇ Serving faculty (academicians) is eligible for the membership in the Authority and/or
the Committees, if they fulfill the criteria given in Appendix VI to the Notification.
̇ This is to clarify that the serving Government officers shall not be nominated as
professional/expert member of SEIAA/SEAC/EAC.
̇ Professionals/Experts in the SEIAA and SEAC shall be different.
̇ Summary regarding the eligibility criteria for Chairperson and Members of the
SEIAA is given in Table 5-3.

C. Decision-making process

̇ The decision of the Authority shall be arrived through consensus.

̇ If there is no consensus, the Authority may either ask SEAC for reconsideration or
may reject the approval.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

5-4
 Stakeholders’ Roles and Responsibilities

̇ All decisions of the SEIAA shall be taken in a meeting and shall ordinarily be
unanimous. In case a decision is taken by majority, details of views, for and against
the decision, shall be clearly recorded in minutes of meeting and a copy thereof shall
be sent to MoEF.
Table 5-3: SEIAA: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson/ Members/ Secretary

S. No. Attribute Requirement

Members Member Secretary Chairperson
1 Professional qualification as Compulsory Compulsory Compulsory
per the Notification
2 Experience a Professional Professional Professional
Qualification + 15 Qualification + 15 Qualification + 15
(Fulfilling any one of
years of experience in years of experience in years of experience
a, b, c)
one of the expertise one of the expertise in one of the
area mentioned in the area mentioned in the expertise area
Appendix VI Appendix VI mentioned in the
Appendix VI
b Professional Professional Professional
Qualification Qualification Qualification
+PhD+10 years of +PhD+10 years of +PhD+10 years of
experience in one of experience in one of experience in one of
the expertise area the expertise area the expertise area
mentioned in mentioned in the mentioned in the
Appendix VI Appendix VI Appendix VI
c Professional Professional -------------
Qualification +10 Qualification +10
years of experience in years of experience in
one of the expertise one of the expertise
area mentioned in the area mentioned in the
Appendix VI + 5 years Appendix VI + 5 years
interface with interface with
environmental issues, environmental issues,
problems and their problems and their
management management
3 Test of independence Shall not be a serving Only serving officer Shall not be a
(conflict of interest) and government officer from the State serving government
minimum grade of the Government (DoE) officer
Shall not be a person
Secretary of the Authority familiar with
engaged in industry Shall not be a
environmental laws
and their associations person engaged in
not below the level of
industry and their
Shall not be a person Director
associations
associated with
environmental Shall not be a
activism person associated
with environmental
activism
4 Age Below 67 years at the As per State Below 72 Years at
time of Notification of Government Service the time of the
the Authority Rules Notification of the
Authority
5 Other memberships in Shall not be a member Shall not be a member Shall not be a
Central/State Expert in any in any member in any

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

5-5
 Stakeholders’ Roles and Responsibilities

S. No. Attribute Requirement

Members Member Secretary Chairperson
Appraisal Committee SEIAA/EAC/SEAC SEIAA/EAC/SEAC SEIAA/EAC/SEAC
6 Tenure of earlier Only one term before Not applicable Only one term
appointment (continuous) this in continuity is before this in
permitted continuity is
permitted
7 Eminent environmental Desirable Desirable Compulsory
expertise with understanding
on environmental aspects
and impacts
8 Expertise in the Desirable Desirable Compulsory
environmental clearance
process
Note:

1. A member after continuous membership in two terms (6 years) shall not be considered for
further continuation. His/her nomination may be considered after a gap of one term (three years),
if other criteria meet.

2. Chairperson/Member once notified may not be removed prior to the tenure of three years
without cause and proper enquiry.

5.2 EAC and SEAC

EAC and SEAC are independent Committees to review each developmental activity and
offer its recommendations for consideration of the Central Government and SEIAA
respectively.

A. Constitution

̇ EAC and SEAC shall be constituted by the Central Government comprising a

maximum of 15 members including a Chairperson and Secretary. In case of SEAC,
the State Government or UT Administration is required to nominate the
professionals/experts for consideration and Notification by the Central Government.
̇ The Central Government will notify as and when the nominations (in order) are
received from the State Governments, within 30 days from the date of receipt.
̇ The Chairperson and the non-official member shall have a fixed term of three years,
from the date of Notification by the Central Government.
̇ The Chairperson shall be an eminent environmental expert with understanding on
environmental aspects and environmental impacts. The Secretary of the SEAC shall
be a State Government officer, not below the level of a Director/Chief Engineer.
̇ The members of the SEAC need not be from the same State/UT.
̇ In case the State Governments/UTs so desire, the MoEF can form regional EAC to
serve the concerned States/UTs.
̇ State Governments may decide to their convenience to house SEAC at the
Department of Environment or at SPCB or at any other department, to extend support
to the SEAC activities.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

5-6
 Stakeholders’ Roles and Responsibilities

B. Composition

̇ Composition of EAC/SEAC as per the Notification is given in Annexure XI.

̇ Secretary to EAC/SEAC may invite a maximum of two professionals/experts with the
prior approval of the Chairperson, if desired, for taking the advisory inputs for
appraisal. In such case, the invited experts will not take part in the decision making
process.
̇ The Secretary of each EAC/SEAC preferably be an officer of the level equivalent to
or above the level of Director, MoEF, GoI.

C. Decision making

The EAC and SEAC shall function on the principle of collective responsibility. The
Chairperson shall endeavour to reach a consensus in each case, and if consensus cannot
be reached, the view of the majority shall prevail.

D. Operational issues

̇ Secretary may deal with all correspondence, formulate agenda and prepare agenda
notes. Chairperson and other members may act only for the meetings.
̇ Chairperson of EAC/SEAC shall be one among the expert members having
considerable professional experience with proven credentials.
̇ EAC/SEAC shall meet at least once every month or more frequently, if so needed, to
review project proposals and to offer recommendations for the consideration of the
Authority.
̇ EAC/SEAC members may inspect the site at various stages i.e. during screening,
scoping and appraisal, as per the need felt and decided by the Chairperson of the
Committee.
̇ The respective Governments through the Secretary of the Committee may
pay/reimburse the participation expenses, honorarium etc., to the Chairperson and
members.

i. Tenure of EAC/SEIAA/SEAC

The tenure of Authority/Committee(s) shall be for a fixed period of three years. At the
end of the three years period, the Authority and the committees need to be re-constituted.
However, staggered appointment dates may be adopted to maintain continuity of
members at a given point of time.

ii. Qualifying criteria for nomination of a member to EAC/SEIAA/SEAC

While recommending nominations and while notifying the members of the Authority and
Expert Committees, it shall be ensured that all the members meet the following three
criteria:

̇ Professional qualification
̇ Relevant experience/Experience interfacing with environmental management
̇ Absence of conflict of interest
These are elaborated subsequently.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

5-7
 Stakeholders’ Roles and Responsibilities

a) Professional qualification
The person should have at least (i) 5 years of formal University training in the concerned
discipline leading to a MA/MSc Degree, or (ii) in case of Engineering/Technology/
Architecture disciplines, 4 years formal training in a professional training course together
with prescribed practical training in the field leading to a B.Tech/B.E./B.Arch. Degree, or
(iii) Other professional degree (e.g. Law) involving a total of 5 years of formal University
training and prescribed practical training, or (iv) Prescribed apprenticeship/articleship and
pass examinations conducted by the concerned professional association (e.g.
MBA/IAS/IFS). In selecting the individual professionals, experience gained by them in
their respective fields will be taken note of.

b) Relevant experience
̇ Experience shall be related to professional qualification acquired by the person and be
related to one or more of the expertise mentioned for the expert members. Such
experience should be a minimum of 15 years.
̇ When the experience mentioned in the foregoing sub-paragraph interfaces with
environmental issues, problems and their management, the requirement for the length
of the experience can be reduced to a minimum of 10 years.

c) Absence of conflict of interest

For the deliberations of the EAC/SEAC to be independent and unbiased, all possibilities
of potential conflict of interests have to be eliminated. Therefore, serving government
officers; persons engaged in industry and their associations; persons associated with the
formulation of development projects requiring prior environmental clearance, and persons
associated with environmental activism shall not be considered for membership of
SEIAA/ SEAC/ EAC.

iii. Age

Below 70 years for the members and below 72 years for the Chairperson of the
SEIAA/SEAC/EAC. The applicability of the age is at the time of the Notification of the
SEIAA/SEAC/EAC by the Central Government.

Summary regarding the eligibility criteria for Chairperson and Members of the
EAC/SEAC is given in Table 5-4.

Table 5-4: EAC/SEAC: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson / Members / Secretary

S. Requirement
No.
Attribute Expert members Secretary Chairperson
1 Professional Compulsory Compulsory Compulsory
qualification as per
the Notification
2 Experience a Professional Professional Professional
Qualification + 15 Qualification + 15 years Qualification + 15
(Fulfilling any
years of experience in of experience in one of years of experience in
one of a, b, c)
one of the expertise the expertise area one of the expertise
area mentioned in the mentioned in the area mentioned in the
Appendix VI Appendix VI Appendix VI

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

5-8
 Stakeholders’ Roles and Responsibilities

S. Requirement
No.
Attribute Expert members Secretary Chairperson
b Professional Professional Professional
Qualification +PhD+10 Qualification +PhD+10 Qualification
years of experience in years of experience in +PhD+10 years of
one of the expertise one of the expertise area experience in one of
area mentioned in the mentioned in the the expertise area
Appendix VI Appendix VI mentioned in
Appendix VI
c Professional Professional -------------
Qualification +10 years Qualification +10 years
of experience in one of of experience in one of
the expertise area the expertise area
mentioned in the mentioned in the
Appendix VI + 5 years Appendix VI + 5 years
interface with interface with
environmental issues, environmental issues,
problems and their problems and their
management management
3 Test of independence Shall not be a serving In case of EAC, not less Shall not be a serving
(conflict of interest) government officer than a Director from the government officer
and minimum grade MoEF, Government of
Shall not be a person Shall not be a person
of the Secretary of the India
engaged in industry engaged in industry
Committees
and their associations and their associations
Shall not be a person Incase of SEAC, not Shall not be a person
associated with below the level of associated with
environmental activism Director/Chief Engineer environmental
from the State activism
Government (DoE)
4 Age Below 67 years at the As per state Government Below 72 Years at the
time of Notification of Service Rules time of the
the Committee Notification of the
Committee
5 Membership in Only one other than Shall not be a member in Shall not be a
Central/State Expert this nomination is other SEIAA/EAC/SEAC member in any other
Appraisal committees permitted SEIAA/EAC/SEAC
6 Tenure of earlier Only one term before Not applicable Only one term before
appointment this in continuity is this in continuity is
(continuous) permitted permitted
7 Eminent Desirable Not applicable Compulsory
environmental
expertise with
understanding on
environmental aspects
and impacts
Notes:

1. A member after continuous membership in two terms (six years) shall not be considered for
further continuation. His/her nomination may be reconsidered after a gap of one term (three
years), if other criteria meet.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

5-9
 Stakeholders’ Roles and Responsibilities

2. Chairperson/Member once notified may not be removed prior to the tenure of 3 years with out
cause and proper enquiry. A member after continuous membership in two terms (6 years) shall
not be considered for further continuation. The same profile may be considered for nomination
after a gap of three years, i.e., one term, if other criteria are meeting.

E. Other conditions that may be considered

̇ An expert member of one State/UT, can have at the most another State/UT
Committee membership, but in no case more than two Committees at a given point of
time.
̇ An expert member of a Committee shall not have membership continuously in the
same committee for more than two terms, i.e. six years. They can be nominated after
a gap of three years, i.e., one term. When a member of Committee has been
associated with any development project, which comes for prior environmental
clearance, he/she may not participate in the deliberations and the decisions in respect
to that particular project.
̇ At least four members shall be present in each meeting to fulfill the quorum
̇ If a member does not consecutively attend six meetings, without prior intimation to
the Committee his/her membership may be terminated by the Notifying Authority.
Prior information for absence due to academic pursuits, career development and
national/state-endorsed programmes may be considered as genuine grounds for
retention of membership.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

5-10
 ANNEXURE I
A Compilation of Legal Instruments
Sl. Legal Instrument Responsible Chemical Use Categories/ Objective of Legislation Relevant Articles/Provisions
No. (Type, Reference, Ministries or Bodies Pollutants
Year)

1 Air (Prevention and Central Pollution Air pollutants from The prevention, control and Section 2: Definitions
Control of Control Board and chemical industries abatement of air pollution Section 21: Consent from State Boards
Pollution) Act, 1981 State Pollution Control Section 22: Not to allow emissions exceeding
amended 1987 Boards prescribed limits
Section 24: Power of Entry and Inspection
Section 25: Power to Obtain Information
Section 26: Power to Take Samples
Section 37-43: Penalties and Procedures
2 Air (Prevention and Central Pollution Air pollutants from The prevention, control and Rule 2: Definitions
Control of Control Board and chemical industries abatement of air pollution Rule 9: Consent Applications
Pollution) (Union State Pollution Control
Territories) Rules, Boards
1983
3 Water (Prevention Central Pollution Water Pollutants from The prevention and control of Section 2: Definitions
and Control of Control Board and water polluting industries water pollution and also Section 20: Power to Obtain Information
Pollution) Act, 1974 State Pollution Control maintaining or restoring the Section 21: Power to Take Samples
amended 1988 Boards wholesomeness of water Section 23: Power of Entry and Inspection
Section 24: Prohibition on Disposal
Section 25: Restriction on New Outlet and New
Discharge
Section 26: Provision regarding existing
discharge of sewage or trade effluent
Section 27: Refusal or withdrawal of consent by
state boards
Section 41-49: Penalties and Procedures
4 Water (Prevention Central Pollution Water Pollutants from The prevention and control of Rule 2: Definitions
and Control of Control Board and water polluting industries water pollution and also
Rule 30: Power to take samples
Pollution) Rules, State Pollution Control maintaining or restoring the
1975 Boards wholesomeness of water Rule 32: Consent Applications

i
5 The Environment Ministry of All types of environmental Protection and Improvement Section 2: Definitions
(Protection) Act, Environment and pollutants of the Environment
Section 7: Not to allow emission or discharge of
1986, amended Forests, Central
environmental pollutants in excess of prescribed
1991 Pollution Control
standards
Board and State
Pollution Control Section 8: Handing of Hazardous Substances
Boards
Section 10: Power of Entry and Inspection
Section 11: Power to take samples
Section 15-19: Penalties and Procedures
6 Environmental Ministry of All types of Environmental Protection and Improvement Rule 2: Definitions
(Protection) Rules, Environment and Pollutants of the Environment
Rule 3: Standards for emission or discharge of
1986 (Amendments Forests, Central
environmental pollutants
in 1999, 2001, 2002, Pollution Control
2002, 2002, 2003, Board and State Rule 5: Prohibition and restriction on the
2004) Pollution Control location of industries and the carrying on
Boards process and operations in different areas
Rule 13: Prohibition and restriction on the
handling of hazardous substances in different
areas
Rule 14: Submission of environmental statement
7 Hazardous Waste MoEF, CPCB, SPCB, Hazardous Wastes Management & Handling of Rule 2: Application
(Management and DGFT, Port Authority generated from industries hazardous wastes in line with Rule 3: Definitions
Handling) Rules, and Customs using hazardous chemicals the Basel convention Rule 4: Responsibility of the occupier and
1989 amended 2000 Authority operator of a facility for handling of wastes
and 2003 Rule 4A: Duties of the occupier and operator of
a facility
Rule 4B: Duties of the authority
Rule 5: Grant of authorization for handling
hazardous wastes
Rule 6: Power to suspend or cancel
authorization
Rule 7: Packaging, labeling and transport of
hazardous wastes
Rule 8: Disposal sites

ii
 Rule 9: Record and returns
Rule 10: Accident reporting and follow up
Rule 11: Import and export of hazardous waste
for dumping and disposal
Rule 12: Import and export of hazardous waste
for recycling and reuse
Rule 13: Import of hazardous wastes
Rule 14: Export of hazardous waste
Rule 15: Illegal traffic
Rule 16: Liability of the occupier, transporter
and operator of a facility
Rule 19: Procedure for registration and renewal
of registration of recyclers and re-refiners
Rule 20: Responsibility of waste generator
8 Manufacture Ministry of Hazardous Chemicals - Regulate the manufacture, Rule 2: Definitions
Storage and Import Environment & Toxic, Explosive, storage and import of Rule 4: responsibility of the Occupier
of Hazardous Forests, Chief Flammable, Reactive Hazardous Chemicals Rule 5: Notification of Major Accidents
Chemicals Rules, Controller of Imports Rule 7-8: Approval and notification of site and
1989 amended 2000 and Exports, CPCB, updating
SPCB, Chief Inspector Rule 10-11: Safety Reports and Safety Audit
of Factories, Chief reports and updating
Inspector of Dock Rule 13: Preparation of Onsite Emergency Plan
Safety, Chief Inspector Rule 14: Preparation of Offsite Emergency Plan
of Mines, AERB, Rule 15: Information to persons likely to get
Chief Controller of affected
Explosives, District Rule 16: Proprietary Information
Collector or District Rule 17: Material Safety Data Sheets
Emergency Authority, Rule 18: Import of Hazardous Chemicals
CEES under DRDO
9 Chemical Accidents CCG, SCG, DCG, Hazardous Chemicals - Emergency Planning Rule 2: Definitions
(Emergency LCG and MAH Units Toxic, Explosive, Preparedness and Response to Rule 5: Functions of CCG
Planning, Flammable, Reactive chemical accidents Rule 7: Functions of SCG
Preparedness and Rule 9: Functions of DCG
Response) Rules, Rule 10: Functions of LCG
1996
10 Ozone Depleting Ministry of Ozone depleting Regulate the production, Rule 2: Definitions
Substances Environment & substances import, use, sale, purchase and Rule 3: Regulation of production and

iii
 (Regulation and Forests phase-out of the ODS consumption of ozone depleting substances
Control) Rules, Rule 4: Prohibition on export to or import from
2000 countries not specified in Schedule VI
Rule 5: Ozone depleting substances are to be
exported to or imported from countries specified
in Schedule VI under a license
Rule 6: Regulation of the sale of ozone depleting
substances
Rule 7: Regulation on the purchase of ozone
depleting substances
Rule 8: Regulation on the use of ozone depleting
substance
Rule 9: Prohibition on new investments with
ozone depleting substances
Rule 10: Regulation of import, export and sale
of products made with or containing ozone
depleting substances
Rule 11: Regulation on reclamation and
destruction of ozone depleting substances
Rule 12: Regulation on manufacture, import and
export of compressors
Rule 13: Procedure for registration, cancellation
of registration and appeal against such orders
Rule 14: Monitoring and reporting requirements
11 EIA Notification, MoEF, SPCB For all the identified Requirement of environmental Requirements and procedure for seeking
2006 developmental activities in clearance before establishment environmental clearance of projects
the notification of or modernization /
expansion of identified
developmental projects.
12 Batteries SPCB, CPCB and Lead Acid Batteries To control the hazardous Rule 2: Application
(Management and MoEF waste generation (lead waste) Rule 3: Definitions
Handling) Rules, from used lead acid batteries Rule 4: Responsibilities of manufacturer,
2001. importer, assembler and re-conditioner
Rule 5: Registration of Importers
Rule 7: Responsibilities of dealer
Rule 8: Responsibilities of recycler
Rule 9: Procedure for registration / renewal of

iv
 registration of recyclers
Rule 10: Responsibilities of consumer or bulk
consumer
Rule 11: Responsibilities of auctioneer
Rule 14: Computerization of Records and
Returns
13 Public Liability Ministry of Hazardous Substances To provide immediate relief to Section 2: Definitions
Insurance Act, 1991 Environment & persons affected by accident Section 3: Liability to give relief in certain cases
amended 1992 Forests, District involving hazardous on principle of no fault
Collector substances Section 4: Duty of owner to take out insurance
policy
Section 7A: Establishment of Environmental
Relief Fund
Section 14-18: Penalties and Offences
14 Public Liability Ministry of Hazardous Substances To provide immediate relief to Rule 2: Definitions
Insurance Rules, Environment & persons affected by accident Rule 6: Establishment of administration of fund
1991 amended 1993 Forests, District involving hazardous Rule 10: Extent of liability
Collector substances and also for Rule 11: Contribution of the owner to
Establishing an Environmental environmental relief fund
Relief fund
15 Factories Act, 1948 Ministry of Labour, Chemicals as specified in Control of workplace Section 2: Interpretation
DGFASLI and the Table environment, and providing Section 6: Approval, licensing and registration
Directorate of for good health and safety of of factories
Industrial Safety and workers Section 7A: General duties of the occupier
Health/Factories Section 7B: General duties of manufacturers
Inspectorate etc., as regards articles and substances for use in
factories
Section 12: Disposal of wastes and effluents
Section 14: Dust and fume
Section 36: Precautions against dangerous
fumes, gases, etc.
Section 37: Explosion or inflammable dust, gas,
etc.
Chapter IVA: Provisions relating to Hazardous
processes
Section 87: Dangerous operations
Section 87A: Power to prohibit employment on

v
 account of serious hazard
Section 88: Notice of certain accident
Section 88A: Notice of certain dangerous
occurrences
Chapter X: Penalties and procedures
16 The Explosives Act, Ministry of Commerce Explosive substances as To regulate the manufacture, Section 4: Definition
1884 and Industry defined under the Act possession, use, sale, Section 6: Power for Central government to
(Department of transport, export and import of prohibit the manufacture, possession or
Explosives) explosives with a view to importation of especially dangerous explosives
prevent accidents Section 6B: Grant of Licenses
17 The Explosive Ministry of Commerce Explosive substances as To regulate the manufacture, Rule 2: Definition
Rules, 1983 and Industry and Chief defined under the Act possession, use, sale, Chapter II: General Provisions
Controller of transport, export and import of Chapter III: Import and Export
Explosives, port explosives with a view to Chapter IV: Transport
conservator, customs prevent accidents Chapter V: Manufacture of explosives
collector, railway Chapter VI: Possession sale and use
administration Chapter VII: Licenses
18 The Motor Vehicle Ministry of Shipping, Hazardous and Dangerous To consolidate and amend the Section 2: Definition
Act, 1988 Road Transport and Goods law relating to motor vehicles Chapter II: Licensing of drivers of motor vehicle
Highways Chapter VII: Construction equipment and
maintenance of motor vehicles
19 The Central Motor Ministry of Shipping, Hazardous and Dangerous To consolidate and amend the Rule 2: Definition
Vehicle Rules, 1989 Road Transport and Goods law relating to motor vehicles Rule 9: Educational qualification for driver’s of
Highways including to regulate the goods carriages carrying dangerous or hazardous
transportation of dangerous goods
goods with a view to prevent Rule 129: Transportation of goods of dangerous
loss of life or damage to the or hazardous nature to human life
environment Rule 129A: Spark arrestors
Rule 130: Manner of display of class labels
Rule 131: Responsibility of the consignor for
safe transport of dangerous or hazardous goods
Rule 132: Responsibility of the transporter or
owner of goods carriage
Rule 133: Responsibility of the driver
Rule 134: Emergency Information Panel
Rule 135: Driver to be instructed

vi
 Rule 136: Driver to report to the police station
about accident
Rule 137: Class labels
20 The Custom Act, CBEC, Ministry of Hazardous Goods To prevent entry of illegal Section 2: definitions
1962 Finance hazardous goods or banned Section 11: Power to Prohibit Importation or
goods including hazardous or Exportation of Goods
banned chemicals
21 The Merchant Ministry of Shipping, All packaged cargo For safe handling and Section 3: Definitions
Shipping Act, 1958 Road Transport and including Dangerous and transportation of cargo Section 331: Carriage of Dangerous Goods
amended in 2002 Highways hazardous goods as defined including dangerous goods to
and 2003 in the rules prevent accident
22 Merchant Shipping Ministry of Shipping, All packaged cargo For safe handling and
(carriage of Cargo) Road Transport and including Dangerous and transportation of cargo
Rules 1995 Highways hazardous goods as defined including dangerous goods to
in the rules prevent accident
23 The Indian Port Act, Ministry of Shipping, All Chemicals - handling For control of activities on Section 2: Definitions
1908 Road Transport and and storage ports including safety of Chapter IV: Rules for the safety of shipping and
Highways shipping and conservation of the conservation of ports
ports Chapter VII: Provisions with respect to penalties
24 The Dock Workers, Ministry of Labour, All Chemicals termed as Safety of Dock workers
(Safety, Health and DGFASLI and dangerous goods including handling of
Welfare) Act, 1986 Directorate of Dock dangerous goods
Safety
25 The Dock Workers, Ministry of Labour, All Chemicals termed as Safety of Dock workers
(Safety, Health and DGFASLI and dangerous goods including handling of
Welfare) Rules, Directorate of Dock dangerous goods
1990 Safety

vii
 ANNEXURE II
General Standards for Discharge of Environmental Pollutants as per
CPCB
 Table: Water Quality Standards

1. Colour and odour See Note-1 --- See Note-1 See Note-1
2. Suspended Solids, mg/l, Max 100 600 200 (a) For process waste
water-100
(b) For cooling water
effluent-10 per cent
above total suspended
matter of influent
cooling water.
3. Particle size of suspended solids Shall pass 850 micron --- --- (a) Floatable solids,
IS Sieve Max 3 mm
(b) Settleable solids
Max 850 microns.
4. Dissolved solids (inorganic), mg/a, mac 2100 2100 2100 ---
5. pH value 5.5 to 9.0 5.5 to 9.0 5.5 to 9.0 5.5 to 9.0
6. Temperature oC, Max Shall not exceed 40 in 45 at the point of --- 45 at the point of
any section of the discharge discharge
stream within 15
meters down stream
from the effluent
outlet
7. Oil and grease, mg/l, max 10 20 10 20
8. Total residual chlorine, mg/l, Max. 1.0 --- --- 1.0
9. Ammonical nitrogen (as N), mg/l, Max. 50 50 --- 50
10. Total Kjeldahl nitrogen (as N), mg/l, 100 --- --- 100
Max.
11. Free Ammonia (as NH3), mg/l, Max. 5.0 --- --- 5.0
12. Biochemical Oxygen Demand (5 days at 30 350 100 100
20oC) Max.
13. Chemical Oxygen Demand, mg/l, Max. 250 --- --- 250
14. Arsenic (as As), mg/l, Max. 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
15. Mercury (as Hg), mg/l, Max. 0.01 0.01 --- 0.01
16. Lead (as Pb), mg/l, Max. 0.1 1.0 --- 1.0
17. Cadmium (as Cd), mg/l, Max. 2.0 1.0 --- 2.0

i
18. Hexavalent chromium (as Cr+6) mg/l, 0.1 2.0 --- 1.0
Max.
19. Total chromium as (Cr), mg/l, Max. 2.0 2.0 --- 2.0
20. Copper (as Cu), mg/l, Max. 3.0 3.0 --- 3.0
21. Zinc (as Zn), mg/l, Max. 5.0 15 --- 15
22. Selenium (as Se), mg/l, Max. 0.05 0.05 --- 0.05
23. Nickel (as Ni), mg/l, Max. 3.0 3.0 --- 5.0
24. Boron (as B), mg/l, Max. 2.0 2.0 2.0 ---
25. Percent Sodium, Max. --- 60 60 ---
26. Residual sodium carbonate, mg/l, Max. --- --- 5.0 ---
27. Cyanide (as CN), mg/l, Max. 0.2 2.0 0.2 0.2
28. Chloride (as Cl), mg/l, Max. 1000 1000 600 (a)
29. Fluoride (as F), mg/l, Max. 2.0 15 --- 15
30. Dissolved Phosphates (as P), mg/l, 5.0 --- --- ---
Max.
31. Sulphate (as SO4), mg/l, Max. 1000 1000 1000 ---
32. Sulphide (as S), mg/l, Max. 2.0 --- --- 5.0
33. Pesticides Absent Absent Absent Absent
34. Phenolic compounds (as C6H5OH), 1.0 5.0 --- 5.0
mg/l, Max.
35. Radioactive materials
(a) Alpha emitters MC/ml, Max. 10-7 10-7 10-8 10-7
(b) Beta emitters uc/ml, Max.
10-6 10-6 10-7 10-6
Note :-

1. All efforts should be made to remove colour and unpleasant odour as far as practicable.
2. The standards mentioned in this notification shall apply to all the effluents discharged such as industrial mining and mineral processing
activities municipal sewage etc.

ii
Ambient air quality standards in respect of noise

Area Code Category of Area Limits in dB (A) Leq

Day Time Night Time
(A) Industrial area 75 70
(B) Commercial area 65 55
(C) Residential area 55 45
(D) Silence zone 50 40
Note :
1. Day time is reckoned in between 6.00 AM and 9.00 PM
2. Night time is reckoned in between 9.00 PM and 6.00 AM
3. Silence zone is defined as areas upto 100 meters around such premises as hospitals,
educational institutions and courts. The Silence zones are to be declared by the
Competent Authority.
4. Use of vehicular horns, loudspeakers and bursting of crackers shall be banned in these
zones.
5. Mixed categories of areas should be declared as one of the four above mentioned
categories by the Competent Authority and the corresponding standards shall apply.

The total sound power level, Lw, of a DG set should be less than, 94+10 log10 (KVA), dB (A), at the
manufacturing stage, where, KVA is the nominal power rating of a DG set.

This level should fall by 5 dB (A) every five years, till 2007, i.e. in 2002 and then in 2007.

Noise from the DG set should be controlled by providing an acoustic enclosure or by treating the room
acoustically.

The acoustic enclosure/acoustic treatment of the room should be designed for minimum 25 dB(A) Insertion
Loss or for meeting the ambient noise standards, whichever is on the higher side (if the actual ambient noise
is on the higher side, it may not be possible to check the performance of the acoustic enclosure/acoustic
treatment. Under such circumstances the performance may be checked for noise reduction upto actual
ambient noise level, preferably, in the night time). The measurement for Insertion Loss may be done at
different points at 0.5m from the acoustic enclosure/room, and then averaged.

The DG set should also be provide with proper exhaust muffler with Insertion Loss of minimum 25 dB(A).

1. The manufacturer should offer to the user a standard acoustic enclosure of 25 dB(A) Insertion Loss
and also a suitable exhaust muffler with Insertion Loss of 25 dB(A).

i
 2. The user should make efforts to bring down the noise levels due to the DG set, outside his premises,
within the ambient noise requirements by proper siting and control measures.
3. The manufacturer should furnish noise power levels of the unlicensed DG sets as per standards
prescribed under (A)
4. The total sound power level of a DG set, at the user's end, shall be within 2 dB(A) of the total sound
power level of the DG set, at the manufacturing stage, as prescribed under (A).
5. Installation of a DG set must be strictly in compliance with the recommendation of the DG set
manufacturer.
6. A proper routine and preventive maintenance procedure for the DG set should be set and followed in
consultation with the DG set manufacturer which would help prevent noise levels of the DG set from
deteriorating with use.

(5th December, 2001)

In exercise of the powers conferred by section 5 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, (29 of 1986),
read with the Government of India, Ministry of Home Affairs notification S.O. 667 (E) bearing No. F.No. U-
11030/J/91-VTL dated 10th September, 1992, the Lt. Governor of Government of National Capital of Delhi
hereby directs to all owners/users of generators sets in the National Capital Territory of Delhi as follows :-

1. that generator sets above the capacity of 5 KVA shall not be operated in residential areas between
the hours of 10.00 PM to 6.00 AM;
2. that the generator sets above the capacity of 5 KVA in all areas residential/commercial/industrial
shall operate only with the mandatory acoustic enclosures and other standards prescribed in the
Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986;
3. that mobile generator sets used in social gatherings and public functions shall be permitted only if
they have installed mandatory acoustic enclosures and adhere to the prescribed standards for noise
and emission as laid down in the Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986.

The contravention of the above directions shall make the offender liable for prosecution under section 15 of
the said Act which stipulates punishment of imprisonment for a term which may extend to five years with
fine which may extend to one lakh rupees, or with both, and in case the failure of contravention continues,
with additional fine which may extend to five thousand rupees for every day during which such failure or
contravention continues after the conviction for the first such failure or contravention and if still the failure or
contravention continues beyond a period of one year after the date of contravention, the offender continues
beyond a period of one year after the date of contravention, the offender shall be punishable with
imprisonment for a term which may extend to seven years.

In exercise of the powers conferred by section 5 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 (29 of 1986) read
with the Govt. of India, Ministry of Home Affairs notification S.O. 667(E) bearing No. U-11030/J/91-VTL dated
the 10th September, 1992, the Lt. Governor Govt. of the National Capital Territory of Delhi hereby makes the
following amendment/modification in his order dated the 5th December, 2001 regarding the operation of
generator sets, namely:-

In the above said order, for clause(1), the following shall be substituted, namely:-

ii
“(1) that the generator sets above 5KVA shall not be operated in residential areas between the hours from
10.00 p.m. to 6.00 a.m. except generator sets of Group Housing Societies and Multi-storey residential
apartments”.

The minimum height of stack to be provided with each generator set can be worked out using the following
formula:

H = h +0.2 Ì √KVA

H = Total height of stack in metre

h = Height of the building in metres where the generator set is installed

KVA = Total generator capacity of the set in KVA

Based on the above formula the minimum stack height to be provided with different range of generator sets
may be categorized as follows:

For Generator Sets Total Height of stack in metre

50 KVA Ht. of the building + 1.5 metre

50-100 KVA Ht. of the building + 2.0 metre

100- 150 KVA Ht. of the building + 2.5 metre

150-200 KVA Ht. of the building + 3.0 metre

200-250 KVA Ht. of the building + 3.5 metre

250-300 KVA Ht. of the building + 3.5 metre

Similarly for higher KVA ratings a stack height can be worked out using the above formula

Source: Evolved By CPCB

[Emission Regulations Part IV: COINDS/26/1986-87]

iii
 ANNEXURE III
Form 1 (Application for Obtaining EIA Clearance)
 FORM 1

(I) Basic Information

S. No. Item Details

1. Name of the project/s

2. S.No. in the schedule
3. Proposed capacity/area/length/tonnage to be
handled/command area/lease area/number of
wells to be drilled
4. New/Expansion/Modernization
5. Existing Capacity/Area etc.
6. Category of Project i.e., ‘A’ or ‘B’
7. Does it attract the general condition? If yes,
please specify.
8. Does it attract the specific condition? If yes,
Please specify.
9. Location
Plot/Survey/Khasra No.
Village
Tehsil
District
State
10. Nearest railway station/airport along with
distance in kms.
11. Nearest Town, city, District headquarters along
with distance in kms.
12. Village Panchayats, Zilla Parishad, Municipal
Corporation, Local body (complete postal
addresses with telephone nos. to be given)
13. Name of the applicant
14. Registered Address
15. Address for correspondence:
Name
Designation (Owner/Partner/CEO)
Address
Pin Code
E-mail
Telephone No.

i
 S. No. Item Details

Fax No.
16. Details of alternative Sites examined, if any Village-District-State
location of these sites should be shown on a 1.
toposheet.
2.
3.
17. Interlined Projects
18. Whether separate application of interlined
project has been submitted
19. If yes, date of submission
20. If no, reason
21. Whether the proposal involves
approval/clearance under: if yes, details of the
same and their status to be given.
(a) The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 ?
(b) The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 ?
(c ) The C.R.Z. Notification, 1991 ?
22. Whether there is any Government Order/Policy
relevant/relating to the site?
23. Forest land involved (hectares)
24. Whether there is any litigation pending against
the project and/or land in which the project is
propose to be set up
(a) Name of the Court
(b) Case No.
(c ) Orders/directions of the Court, if any and its
relevance with the proposed project.

(II) Activity
1. Construction, operation or decommissioning of the Project involving actions,
which will cause physical changes in the locality (topography, land use, changes in water
bodies, etc.)

Details thereof (with

approximate quantities
/rates, wherever
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No possible) with source of
information data

1.1 Permanent or temporary change in land use,

land cover or topography including increase
in intensity of land use (with respect to local
land use plan)
1.2 Clearance of existing land, vegetation and

ii
 Details thereof (with
approximate quantities
/rates, wherever
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No possible) with source of
information data
buildings?
1.3 Creation of new land uses?
1.4 Pre-construction investigations e.g. bore
houses, soil testing?
1.5 Construction works?
1.6 Demolition works?
1.7 Temporary sites used for construction works
or housing of construction workers?
1.8 Above ground buildings, structures or
earthworks including linear structures, cut
and fill or excavations
1.9 Underground works including mining or
tunneling?
1.10 Reclamation works?
1.11 Dredging?
1.12 Offshore structures?
1.13 Production and manufacturing processes?
1.14 Facilities for storage of goods or materials?
1.15 Facilities for treatment or disposal of solid
waste or liquid effluents?
1.16 Facilities for long term housing of operational
workers?
1.17 New road, rail or sea traffic during
construction or operation?
1.18 New road, rail, air waterborne or other
transport infrastructure including new or
altered routes and stations, ports, airports etc?
1.19 Closure or diversion of existing transport
routes or infrastructure leading to changes in
traffic movements?
1.20 New or diverted transmission lines or
pipelines?
1.21 Impoundment, damming, culverting,
realignment or other changes to the hydrology
of watercourses or aquifers?
1.22 Stream crossings?
1.23 Abstraction or transfers of water form ground
or surface waters?

iii
 Details thereof (with
approximate quantities
/rates, wherever
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No possible) with source of
information data

1.24 Changes in water bodies or the land surface

affecting drainage or run-off?
1.25 Transport of personnel or materials for
construction, operation or decommissioning?
1.26 Long-term dismantling or decommissioning
or restoration works?
1.27 Ongoing activity during decommissioning
which could have an impact on the
environment?
1.28 Influx of people to an area in either
temporarily or permanently?
1.29 Introduction of alien species?
1.30 Loss of native species or genetic diversity?
1.31 Any other actions?

2. Use of Natural resources for construction or operation of the Project (such as

land, water, materials or energy, especially any resources which are non-renewable or
in short supply):

Details thereof (with

approximate quantities
S.No. Information/checklist confirmation Yes/No
/rates, wherever
possible) with source of
information data

2.1 Land especially undeveloped or agricultural

land (ha)

2.2 Water (expected source & competing users)

unit: KLD
2.3 Minerals (MT)
2.4 Construction material – stone, aggregates, sand /
soil (expected source – MT)
2.5 Forests and timber (source – MT)
2.6 Energy including electricity and fuels (source,
competing users) Unit: fuel (MT), energy (MW)
2.7 Any other natural resources (use appropriate
standard units)

3. Use, storage, transport, handling or production of substances or materials, which

could be harmful to human health or the environment or raise concerns about actual or
perceived risks to human health.

iv
 Details thereof (with
approximate
quantities/rates,
S.No Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No wherever possible) with
source of information
data

3.1 Use of substances or materials, which are

hazardous (as per MSIHC rules) to human health
or the environment (flora, fauna, and water
supplies)
3.2 Changes in occurrence of disease or affect disease
vectors (e.g. insect or water borne diseases)
3.3 Affect the welfare of people e.g. by changing
living conditions?
3.4 Vulnerable groups of people who could be
affected by the project e.g. hospital patients,
children, the elderly etc.,
3.5 Any other causes

4. Production of solid wastes during construction or operation or

decommissioning (MT/month)

Details thereof (with

approximate
quantities/rates,
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No wherever possible) with
source of information
data

4.1 Spoil, overburden or mine wastes

4.2 Municipal waste (domestic and or commercial
wastes)
4.3 Hazardous wastes (as per Hazardous Waste
Management Rules)
4.4 Other industrial process wastes
4.5 Surplus product
4.6 Sewage sludge or other sludge from effluent
treatment
4.7 Construction or demolition wastes
4.8 Redundant machinery or equipment
4.9 Contaminated soils or other materials
4.10 Agricultural wastes
4.11 Other solid wastes

v
5. Release of pollutants or any hazardous, toxic or noxious substances to air (kg/hr)

Details thereof (with

approximate
quantities/rates,
S.No Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No wherever possible) with
source of information
data

5.1 Emissions from combustion of fossil fuels from

stationary or mobile sources
5.2 Emissions from production processes
5.3 Emissions from materials handling including
storage or transport
5.4 Emissions from construction activities including
plant and equipment
5.5 Dust or odours from handling of materials
including construction materials, sewage and
waste
5.6 Emissions from incineration of waste
5.7 Emissions from burning of waste in open air (e.g.
slash materials, construction debris)
5.8 Emissions from any other sources

6. Generation of Noise and Vibration, and Emissions of Light and Heat:

S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No Details thereof (with

approximate
quantities/rates, wherever
possible) with source of
information data with
source of information data

6.1 From operation of equipment e.g. engines,

ventilation plant, crushers
6.2 From industrial or similar processes
6.3 From construction or demolition
6.4 From blasting or piling
6.5 From construction or operational traffic
6.6 From lighting or cooling systems
6.7 From any other sources

7. Risks of contamination of land or water from releases of pollutants into the

ground or into sewers, surface waters, groundwater, coastal waters or the sea:

vi
 Details thereof (with
approximate
quantities/rates,
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No wherever possible) with
source of information
data

7.1 From handling, storage, use or spillage of

hazardous materials
7.2 From discharge of sewage or other effluents to
water or the land (expected mode and place of
discharge)
7.3 By deposition of pollutants emitted to air into
the land or into water
7.4 From any other sources
7.5 Is there a risk of long term build up of pollutants
in the environment from these sources?

8. Risk of accidents during construction or operation of the Project, which could

affect human health or the environment

Details thereof (with

approximate
quantities/rates, wherever
S.No Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No possible) with source of
information data

8.1 From explosions, spillages, fires etc from

storage, handling, use or production of hazardous
substances
8.2 From any other causes
8.3 Could the project be affected by natural disasters
causing environmental damage (e.g. floods,
earthquakes, landslides, cloudburst etc)?

9. Factors which should be considered (such as consequential development) which

could lead to environmental effects or the potential for cumulative impacts with
other existing or planned activities in the locality

Details thereof (with

approximate
S. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No
quantities/rates, wherever
No.
possible) with source of
information data

vii
9.1 Lead to development of supporting facilities,
ancillary development or development
stimulated by the project which could have
impact on the environment e.g.:
̇ Supporting infrastructure (roads, power
supply, waste or waste water treatment,
etc.)
̇ housing development
̇ extractive industries
̇ supply industries
̇ other

9.2 Lead to after-use of the site, which could have an

impact on the environment
9.3 Set a precedent for later developments
9.4 Have cumulative effects due to proximity to
other existing or planned projects with similar
effects

(III) Environmental Sensitivity

S.No. Areas Name/ Aerial distance (within 15

km.)
Identity
Proposed project location
boundary

1 Areas protected under international conventions,

national or local legislation for their ecological,
landscape, cultural or other related value
2 Areas which are important or sensitive for
ecological reasons - Wetlands, watercourses or
other water bodies, coastal zone, biospheres,
mountains, forests
3 Areas used by protected, important or sensitive
species of flora or fauna for breeding, nesting,
foraging, resting, over wintering, migration

4 Inland, coastal, marine or underground waters

5 State, National boundaries
6 Routes or facilities used by the public for access
to recreation or other tourist, pilgrim areas
7 Defence installations
8 Densely populated or built-up area
9 Areas occupied by sensitive man-made land uses
(hospitals, schools, places of worship,

viii
 community facilities)

10 Areas containing important, high quality or

scarce resources (ground water resources,
surface resources, forestry, agriculture,
fisheries, tourism, minerals)
11 Areas already subjected to pollution or
environmental damage. (those where existing
legal environmental standards are exceeded)
12 Areas susceptible to natural hazard which could
cause the project to present environmental
problems (earthquakes, subsidence, landslides,
erosion, flooding or extreme or adverse climatic
conditions)

(IV) PROPOSED TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR EIA STUDIES

“I hereby given undertaking that the data and information given in the application and
enclosures are true to the best of my knowledge and belief and I am aware that if any part of
the data and information submitted is found to be false or misleading at any stage, the project
will be rejected and clearance give, if any to the project will be revoked at our risk and cost.

Date:______________
Place:______________
Signature of the applicant
With Name and Full Address
(Project Proponent / Authorized Signatory)

NOTE:
1. The projects involving clearance under Coastal Regulation Zone Notification,
1991 shall submit with the application a C.R.Z. map duly demarcated by one of
the authorized agencies, showing the project activities, w.r.t. C.R.Z. (at the stage
of TOR) and the recommendations of the State Coastal Zone Management
Authority (at the stage of EC). Simultaneous action shall also be taken to obtain
the requisite clearance under the provisions of the C.R.Z. Notification, 1991 for
the activities to be located in the CRZ.
2. The projects to be located within 10 km of the National Parks, Sanctuaries,
Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the project proponent
shall submit the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden showing these
features vis-à-vis the project location and the recommendations or comments of
the Chief Wildlife Warden thereon (at the stage of EC).”
3. All corrspondence with the Ministry of Environment & Forests including
submission of application for TOR/Environmental Clearance, subsequent
clarifications, as may be requried from time to time, participation in the EAC
Meeting on behalf of the project proponent shall be made by the authorized
signatory only. The authorized signatory should also submit a document in
support of his claim of being an authorized signatory for the specific project.”

ix
 ANNEXURE IV
Critically Polluted Industrial Areas and Clusters/Potential Impact
Zones
 Table 1: Details of Critically Polluted Industrial Areas and Clusters / Potential Impact Zone
(Ref: Office Memorandum No. J-11013/5/2010-IA.II(I) Dated 13.1.2010)

S. No. Critically Polluted Industrial Industrial Clusters/ Potential Impact Zones

Area and CEPI

1. Ankeshwar (Gujarat) ̇ GIDC Ankeshwar and GIDC, Panoli

CEPI-88.50(Ac_Wc_Lc)
2 Vapi (Gujarat) ̇ GIDC Vapi
CEPI-88.09(Ac_Wc_Lc)
3 Ghaziabad (Uttar Pradesh) Sub-cluster A
CEPI-87.37(Ac_Wc_Lc) ̇ Mohan nagar industrial area
̇ Rajinder nagar industrial area
̇ Sahibabad industrial area
Sub-cluster B
̇ Pandav nagar industrial area
̇ Kavi nagar industrial area
̇ Bulandshahar road industrial area
̇ Amrit nagar
̇ Aryanagar industrial area
Sub-cluster C
̇ Merrut road industrial are
Sub-cluster D
̇ Loni industrial area
̇ Loni Road industrial area
̇ Roop nagar industrial area
Sub-cluster E
̇ Hapur Road industrial area
̇ Dasna
̇ Philkura
Sub-cluster F (Other scattered industrial areas)
̇ South side of GT road
̇ Kavi Nagar
̇ Tronica city
̇ Anand Nagar
̇ Jindal Nagar
̇ Prakash Nagar
̇ Rural industrial estate
4 Chandrapur ̇ Chandrapur (MIDC Chandrapur, Tadali, Ghuggus,
Ballapur)
(Maharashtra)
CEPI-83.88 (Ac_Wc_Lc)
5 Kobra (Chhatisgarh) ̇ Industrial areas and their townships of NTPC, BALCO,
CEPI-83.00 (Ac_Ws_Lc) CSEB (East) & CSEB (West)
̇ Korba town
6 Bhiwadi (Rajasthan) ̇ RIICO industrial areas Phase I to IV
CEPI-82.91 (Ac_Wc_Ls) ̇ Bhiwadi town
̇ Other surrounding industrial areas: Chopanki, Rampura
Mundana, Khuskhera Phase I to III
7 Angul Talcer(Orissa) ̇ MCL Coal mining area, Augul – Talcer region
CEPI-82.09 (Ac_Wc_Lc) ̇ Industrial area (60 km x 45 km)
Following blocks of Augul district:
̇ Kohina block
̇ Talcher block

i
 ̇ Angul block
̇ Chhendipada block
̇ Banarpal block
̇ Odapada block of Dhenkamal district
8 Vellore (North Arcot) (Tamil ̇ Ranipet, SIPCOT industrial complex
Nadu)
CEPI-81.79 (Ac_Wc_Lc)
9 Singrauli (Uttar Pradesh) Sonebhadra (UP)
CEPI-81.73 (Ac_Wc_Ls) ̇ Dala-Tola
̇ Obra
̇ Renukoot
̇ Anpara
̇ Renusagar
̇ Kakri
̇ Dudhichuwa
̇ Bina
̇ Khadia
̇ Shakti nagar
̇ Rihand nagar
̇ Bijpur
Sigrauli (Madhya Pradesh)
Vindhyachal nagar and Jaynat, Nigahi, Dudhichua, Amlohri &
Jhingurdah townships
10 Ludhiana (Punjab) Ludhiana municipal limits covering industrial clusters:
CEPI-81.66 (Ac_Wc_Ls) ̇ Focal point along with NH-I- Total eight phase
̇ Industrial area-B- from sherpur chowk to Gill road & Gill
road to Miller Kotla road (left side of road)
̇ Mixed industrial area – right side of Gill road
̇ Industrial area –C (near Juglana village)
̇ Industrial area A & extension: area between old GT road
and Ludhiana bypass road
̇ Industrial estate: near Dholwal chowk
̇ Mixes industrial area (MIA) Miller gunj
̇ MIA – bypass road
̇ Bahdur industrial area
̇ Tejpur industrial complex
11 Nazafgarh drain basin, Delhi ̇ Industrial areas: Anand Parvat, Naraina, Okhla and
Wazirpur
CEPI-79.54 (As_Wc_Lc)
12 Noida (Uttar Pradesh) Territorial Jurisdiction of:
CEPI-78.90 (Ac_Wc_Lc) ̇ Noida Phase-1
̇ Noida Phase-2
̇ Noida Phase-3
̇ Surajpur industrial area
̇ Greater Noida industrial area
̇ Village- Chhaparaula
13 Dhanbad (Jharkhand) Four blocks of Dhanbad district:
CEPI-78.63 (Ac_Ws_Lc) ̇ Sadar (Dhanbad Municipality)
̇ Jharia (Jharia Municipality, Sindri industrial area)
̇ Govindpur (Govindpur industrial estate)
̇ Nirsa
14 Dombivalli (Maharashtra) ̇ MIDC Phase- I, Phase- II
CEPI-78.41 (Ac_Wc_Ls)

ii
15 Kanpur (Uttar Pradesh) Industrial areas:
CEPI-78.09 (Ac_Wc_Ls) ̇ Dada nagar
̇ Panki
̇ Fazalganj
̇ Vijay nagar
̇ Jajmau
16 Cuddalore (Tamil Nadu) ̇ SIPCOT industrial complex, Phase I & II
CEPI-77.45 (As_Wc_Lc)
17 Aurangabad (Maharashtra) ̇ MIDC Chikhalthana, MIDC Waluj, MIDC Shendra, and
Paithan road industrial area
CEPI-77.44 (Ac_Wc_Ls)
18 Faridabad (Haryana) ̇ Sector 27-A, B, C, D
CEPI-77.07 (Ac_Ws_Lc) ̇ DLF phase- 1, sector 31,32
̇ DLF phase- 2, sector 35
̇ Sector 4, 6, 24, 27, 31, 59
̇ Industrial area Hatin
̇ Industrial model township
19 Agra (Uttar Pradesh) ̇ Nunihai industrial estate, Rambag nagar, UPSIDC
industrial area, and Runukata industrial area
CEPI-76.48 (As_Wc_Ls)
20 Manali (Tamil Nadu) ̇ Manali industrial area
CEPI-76.32 (Ac_Ws_Ls)
21 Haldia (West Bengal) ̇ 5 km wide strip (17.4 x 5.0 km) of industrial area on the
CEPI-75.43 (As_Wc_Ls) southern side of the confluence point of Rivers Hugli and
Rupnarayan, covering
̇ Haldia municipal area & Sutahata block – I and II
22 Ahmedabad (Gujarat) ̇ GIDC Odhav
CEPI-75.28 (Ac_Ws_Ls) ̇ GIDC Naroda

23 Jodhpur (Rajasthan) ̇ Industrial areas including Basni areas (phase-I & II),
industrial estate, light & heavy industrial areas, industrial
CEPI-75.19 (As_Wc_Ls)
areas behind new power house, Mandore, Bornada,
Sangariya and village Tanwada & Salawas.
̇ Jodhpur city
24 Greater Cochin (Kerala) ̇ Eloor-Edayar industrial belt,
CEPI-75.08 (As_Wc_Ls) ̇ Ambala Mogal industrial areas

25 Mandi Gobind Garh (Punjab) ̇ Mandi Govindgarh municipal limit and khanna area
CEPI-75.08 (Ac_Ws_Lc)
26 Howrah (West Bengal) ̇ Liluah-Bamangachhi region, Howrah
CEPI-74.84 (As_Ws_Lc) ̇ Jalan industrial complex-1, Howrah

27 Vatva (Gujarat) ̇ GIDC Vatva, Narol industrial area (Villages Piplaj,

CEPI-74.77 (Ac_Wc_Ls) Shahwadi, Narol)

28 Ib Valley (Orissa) ̇ Ib Valley of Jharsuguda (Industrial and mining area)

CEPI-74.00 (Ac_Ws_Ls)
29 Varansi-Mirzapur (Uttar Pradesh) ̇ Industrial estate, Mirzapur
CEPI-73.79 (As_Wc_Ls) ̇ Chunar
̇ Industrial estate, Chandpur, Varansi
̇ UPSIC, industrial estate, Phoolpur
̇ Industrial area, Ramnagar, Chandauli
30 Navi Mumbai (Maharashtra) ̇ TTC industrial area, MIDC, Navi Mumbai (including
CEPI-73.77 (Ac_Ws_Ls) Bocks-D, C, EL, A, R, General, Kalva)

iii
31 Pali (Rajasthan) ̇ Existing industrial areas: Mandia road, Puniyata road,
Sumerpur
CEPI-73.73 (As_Wc_Ls)
̇ Pali town
32 Mangalore (Karnataka) ̇ Baikampady industrial area
CEPI-73.68 (Ac_Ws_Ls)
33 Jharsuguda (Orissa) ̇ Ib valley of Jharsuguda (Industrial and mining area)
CEPI-73.34 (Ac_Ws_Ls)
34 Coimbatore (Tamil Nadu) ̇ SIDCO, Kurichi industrial Clusters
CEPI-72.38 (Ac_Ws_Ln)
35 Bhadravati (Karnataka) ̇ KSSIDC Industrial area, Mysore paper mill & VISL
CEPI-72.33 (Ac_Ws_Ln) township complex

36 Tarapur (Maharashtra) ̇ MIDC Tarapur

CEPI-72.01 (Ac_Ws_Ls)
37 Panipat (Haryana) ̇ Panipat municipal limit and its industrial clusters
CEPI-71.91 (As_Ws_Ls)
38 Indore (Madhya Pradesh) Following 09 industrial area:
CEPI-71.26 (As_Ws_Ls) ̇ Sanwer road
̇ Shivaji nagar
̇ Pologround
̇ Laxmibai nagar
̇ Scheme no.71
̇ Navlakha
̇ Pipliya
̇ Palda
̇ Rau
Indore city
Other surrounding industrial areas: Manglia, Rajoda, Asrawad,
Tejpur Gadwadi
39 Bhavnagar (Gujarat) ̇ GIDI Chitra, Bhavnagar
CEPI-70.99 (As_Ws_Ls)
40 Vishakhapatnam (Andhra Pradesh) ̇ Bowl area (the area between Yarada hill range in the south
CEPI-70.82 (As_Ws_Ls) to Simhachalam hill range in the north and sea on the east
and the present NH-5 in the west direction)
41 Junagarh (Gujarat) Industrial areas:
CEPI-70.82 (As_Ws_Ls) ̇ Sabalpur
̇ Jay Bhavani
̇ Jay Bhuvneshwari
̇ GIDC Junagarh (I&II)
42 Asansole (West Bengal) ̇ Bumpur area surrounding IISCO
CEPI-70.20 (As_Ws_Ls)
43 Patancheru - Bollaram Industrial area:
(Andhra Pradesh) ̇ Patancheru
CEPI-70.07 (As_Ws_Ls) ̇ Bollaram
Note:

Names of identified industrial clusters/potential impact zones are approximate location based on rapid
survey and assessment and may alter partially subject to the detailed field study and monitoring.
Detailed mapping will be made available showing spatial boundaries of the identified industrial
clusters including zone of influence/ buffer zone, after in depth field study.

iv
 ANNEXURE V
Pre-Feasibility Report: Points for Possible Coverage
 Table: Points for Possible Coverage in Pre-feasibility Report

S. No. Contents Points of Coverage in Pre-feasibility Report

I. Executive summary ̇ A miniature report of entire pre feasibility report.

II. Project Details

Need/Justification of the Project ̇ Current demand scenario of the product
̇ Alternatives to meet the demand
̇ Post project scenario on residual demand
Capacity of Induction/Arc ̇ Production capacity of the industry
Furnace/ Cupola Furnace Plant ̇ Sustainability of raw material supply and quality
̇ Optimization of plant capacity
Process technology ̇ Analysis of available/advanced technologies, etc.
̇ Analysis of possible configurations for each
technology or a combination of these technologies
̇ Broad specifications for the proposed industrial units
and process technologies/equipments
Resources/raw materials ̇ Details on raw material, by products
̇ Water
̇ Water requirement for process, utilities, domestic,
gardening etc.
̇ Source of construction water and potable water
̇ Source of circulating/consumptive water
̇ Quality of raw water, treated water
̇ Water budget calculations and effluent generation
̇ Approved water allocation quota (drinking, irrigation
and industrial use) and surplus availability
̇ Feasible ways of bringing water to site indicating
constraints if any.
̇ Lean season water availability and allocation source in
case main source not perennial.
̇ Manpower
̇ Infrastructure
̇ Electrical power
̇ Construction material like sand, brick, stone chips,
borrow earth etc.
Rejects (Pollution potential) ̇ Air emissions (VOCs, HAPs, Dioxins and furans,
metals, Chlorides and fluorides, etc.)
̇ Water pollution
̇ Solid / hazardous waste (slag, steel skulls, waste
refractories, sludge, etc.)
̇ Noise
̇ Odour
Technical profile ̇ Construction details
̇ Estimated duration
̇ Number of construction workers including migrating
workers
̇ Construction equipment
̇ Vehicular traffic
̇ Source, mode of transportation and storage of
construction material
̇ Traffic that would arise during different phases of the
project and transportation mechanism to handle such
traffic
̇ New facilities needed
̇ Technical parameters of the plant & equipments to be

ii
 used
̇ Product storage and associated transportation system
̇ Product demand & supply position data on regional
basis
Project schedule ̇ Project implementation schedule

Future prospects ̇ Ascertain the costs and benefits of the proposed project
for project life
̇ Technical and logistic constraints/ requirements of
project sustainability
III. Selection of site based on least possible impacts
i. ̇ Choice of site selection
Major techno-economic feasibility ̇ Land availability & its development
considerations ̇ Product demand around the selected site
̇ Access to site for transportation of equipments/
construction machinery, material, etc.
̇ Raw material availability and its transportation
̇ Water availability and consumptive use
̇ Product transportation
̇ Infrastructure availability at selected site
̇ Inter-state issue, if any
Incompatible landuse and ̇ If any incompatible land-use attributes fall within the
ecologically sensitive attributes study area, the following details has to be provided:
with respect to identified suitable ̇ Public water supply areas from rivers/surface water
sites bodies, from groundwater
̇ Scenic areas/tourism areas/hill resorts
̇ Religious places, pilgrim centers that attract over 10
lakh pilgrims a year
̇ Protected tribal settlements (notified tribal areas where
industrial activity is not permitted); CRZ
̇ Monuments of national significance, World Heritage
Sites
̇ Cyclone, Tsunami prone areas (based on last 25 years);
̇ Airport areas
̇ Any other feature as specified by the State or local
government and other features as locally applicable,
including prime agricultural lands, pastures, migratory
corridors, etc.
̇ If ecologically sensitive attributes fall within the study
area, please give details. Ecologically sensitive
attributes include
̇ National parks
̇ Wild life sanctuaries Game reserve
̇ Tiger reserve/elephant reserve/turtle nesting ground
̇ Mangrove area
̇ Wetlands
̇ Reserved and protected forests
̇ Endangered species of flora and fauna
̇ Any other eco – sensitive areas etc.
Social aspects ̇ Corporate social responsibilities
̇ Employments and infrastructure added in the vicinity
of the plant
̇ Status of land availability, current and post project land
use variation
̇ Social sensitivity and likely project affected people
ii. Details of selected site
Land details ̇ Land requirement and availability

iii
 ̇ Land ownership details such as Government, private,
tribal, non-tribal, etc.
̇ Total area of the project/site
̇ Prevailing land cost details
Location ̇ Geographical details - Longitude & latitude, village,
taluka, district, state
̇ Approach to site – roads, railways and airports
̇ Distance from nearest residential and industrial areas
̇ Distance from nearest water bodies such as river,
canal, dam, etc
̇ Distance from ecologically sensitive areas
̇ In case of flood prone areas, HFL of the site
̇ In case of seismic areas, seismic zone, active faults,
occurrence on earthquakes, etc.
̇ Proximity from infrastructural facilities
Physical characteristics ̇ Demography
̇ Meteorological data
̇ Landuse pattern such as agricultural, barren, forest, etc.
and details thereof
̇ Topography of the area
̇ Drainage patterns
̇ Soil condition and soil investigation results
̇ Ground profile and levels
IV. Anticipated impacts based on ̇ Population
project operations on receiving ̇ Flora and fauna
environment ̇ Water
̇ Soil
̇ Air
̇ Climate
̇ Landscape, etc.
V. Proposed broad mitigation ̇ Preventive measures
measures which could effectively ̇ Source control measures
be internalized as project ̇ Mitigation measures at the receiving environment,
components to have ̇ Health and safety measures, etc.
environmental and social
acceptance of the proposed site

VI. An indication of any difficulties (technical deficiencies or lack of know-how) encountered by

the developer in compiling the required information.

The above listing is not exhaustive. Thus the proponent may provide additional necessary
information, felt appropriate, to include in the pre-feasibility study report in support of selecting
the site for the proposed developmental activities. The Concerned EAC/SEAC during scrutiny,
may specifically ask for any additional information/data required to substantiate the requirement
to prescribe the ToR for EIA studies. However, it is to make clear that all the required further
information by EAC/SEAC may be mentioned in one single letter, within the prescribed time.

iv
 ANNEXURE VI
Types of Monitoring and Network Design Considerations
 TYPES OF MONITORING AND NETWORK DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

A. Types of Monitoring
Monitoring refers to the collection of data using a series of repetitive measurements of
environmental parameters (or, more generally, to a process of systematic observation).
The environmental quality monitoring programme design will be dependent upon the
monitoring objectives specified for the selected area of interest. The main types of EIA
monitoring activities are:

̇ Baseline monitoring is the measurement of environmental parameters during the pre-

project period for the purpose of determining the range of variation of the system and
establishing reference points against which changes can be measured. This leads to
the assessment of the possible (additional available) assimilative capacity of the
environmental components in pre-project period w.r.t. the standard or target level.
̇ Effects monitoring is the measurement of environmental parameters during project
construction and implementation to detect changes which are attributable to the
project to provide the necessary information to:
− verify the accuracy of EIA predictions; and
− determine the effectiveness of measures to mitigate adverse effects of projects on
the environment.
− Feedback from environmental effect monitoring programs may be used to improve
the predictive capability of EIAs and also determine whether more or less stringent
mitigation measures are needed
̇ Compliance monitoring is the periodic sampling or continuous measurement of
environmental parameters to ensure that regulatory requirements and standards are
being met.
Compliance and effects monitoring occurs during the project construction, operation, and
abandonment stages. The resources and institutional set-up should be available for the
monitoring at these stages. All large-scale construction projects will require some
construction stage monitoring. To control the environmental hazards of construction as
specified in the EIA, a monitoring program should be established to ensure that each
mitigation measure is effectively implemented. There are numerous potential areas for
monitoring during operations. It is meaningful to perform baseline monitoring at those
stations where the effects monitoring is to be performed so that the change from baseline
due to the project as predicted by models can be validated and rectification can be
performed even after the project starts functioning. It is therefore necessary to select the
base line stations at those places where the predicted effects will be very high.

The scope of monitoring topics discussed in this chapter is limited to Baseline and Effects
monitoring. In addition, this chapter will also discuss the Compliance monitoring during
the construction phase. Post-project monitoring requirements are discussed in the EMP.

Before any field monitoring tasks are undertaken there are many institutional, scientific,
and fiscal issues that must be addressed in the implementation of an environmental
monitoring program. Careful consideration of these issues in the design and planning
stages will help avoid many of the pitfalls associated with environmental monitoring
programs. Although these issues are important but the discussions here are confined to the
monitoring network design component.

i
B. Network Design
Analysis of Significant Environmental Issues

At the outset of planning for an environmental monitoring network, the EIA manager may
not know exactly what should be monitored, when monitoring should begin, where it
should monitor, which techniques should be employed, and who should take
responsibility for its conduct. Because there are usually a number of objective decisions
associated with network design to be made, it is important to start with an analysis of
environmental issues. The scoping phase of an EIA is designed to identify and focus on
the major issues. Scoping should provide a valuable source of information on the
concerns that need to be addressed by the monitoring network design. These are project
specific as well as specific to the environmental setting of the location where the project
is proposed to be located

Hence, the network designs are associated with questions like:

̇ What are the expected outputs of the monitoring activity?

̇ Which problems do we need to address to? etc.
Defining the output will influence the design of the network and optimize the resources
used for monitoring. It will also ensure that the network is specially designed to optimize
the information on the problems at hand

What to Monitor?

The question of what to monitor is associated with the identification of VECs.

VECs are generally defined as environmental attributes or components of the

environment that are valued by society as identified during the scoping stage of the
project. They are determined on the basis of perceived public concerns. For example,
changes to water quality and quantity could have implications on fish by affecting habitat,
food supply, oxygen, and contaminant uptake. Similarly, employment and business, and
economies are both VECs that serve as pathways.

The choice of VECs is also related to the perceived significant impact of the project
implementation on important environmental components. In general, the significance or
importance of environmental components is judged based on:

̇ legal protection provided (for example, rare and endangered species)

̇ political or public concerns (for example, resource use conflicts and sustainable
development)
̇ scientific judgment (for example, ecological importance); or
̇ commercial or economic importance
However, in addition to their economic, social, political or ecological significance, the
chosen VEC should also have unambiguous operational ease, be accessible to prediction
and measurement; and be susceptible to hazard. Once the VECs are defined, the VECs
may be directly measured (for example, extent of habitat for an endangered species). In
cases where it is impossible or impractical to directly measure the VECs, the chosen
measurement endpoints or environmental indicators must correspond to, or be predictive
of assessment endpoints.

ii
The chosen environmental indicators must be: 1) measurable; 2) appropriate to the scale
of disturbance/ contamination; 3) appropriate to the impact mechanism; 4) appropriate
and proportional to temporal dynamics; 5) diagnostic; and 6) standardized; as well as
have: 1) a low natural variability; 2) a broad applicability; and 3) an existing data series.

C. Site Selection
This normally means that for designing a monitoring programme in an (study) area which
might have an impact, several monitoring stations are needed for characterizing the
baseline conditions of the impacted area. When considering the location of individual
samplers, it is essential that the data collected are representative for the location and type
of area without the undue influence from the immediate surroundings. In any
measurement point in the study area the total ambient concentration is the representative
of:

̇ natural background concentration

̇ regional background
̇ impact of existing large regional sources such as Industrial emissions
To obtain the information about the importance of these different contributions it is
therefore necessary to locate monitoring stations so that they are representative for
different impacts. In addition to the ambient pollution data, one would often need other
data governing the variations such as meteorological data for air pollution, to identify and
quantify the sources contributing to the measurements. When considering the location of
individual samplers, it is essential that the data collected are representative for the
location and type of area without undue influence from the immediate surroundings. . For
example, for measuring natural background concentration, if a dust sampler is located
adjacent to a dusty road at road level, this will read occasional traffic pollution rather than
the general background dust level of the area. As such a proper QA/QC must be followed
to locate stations. USEPA guidelines are available for this.

Where, How and How Many Times to Monitor?

These are the other components of Monitoring Network Design. These questions are best
answered based on local field conditions, capacity and resources available, prevailing
legal and regulatory priorities, etc. For this screening or reconnaissance Surveys of the
study area also necessary. This may also include some simple inexpensive measurements
and assimilative/dispersion modeling. The data will give some information on the
prevailing spatial and temporal variations, and the general background air pollution in the
area. The number of monitoring stations and the indicators to be measured at each station
in the final permanent network may then be decided upon based on the results of the
screening study as well as on the knowledge of the sources of the proposed development
and prevailing local environmental/meteorological conditions. The best possible
definition of the air pollution problem, together with the analysis of the resources:
personnel, budget and equipment available, represent the basis for the decision on the
following questions:

̇ What spatial density (number) of sampling stations is required?

It is evident that the more is the number of stations selected in the study area, the more
representative is the data and the more is the cost of monitoring. Therefore this needs
optimization. For example, for optimum results as per the present practice, for medium
sized plants like a stand alone induction and electric arc furnace, submerged arc furnace
and cupola , the study area is a circle of 10 km radius from the plant centre; the number of
AAQ stations are at least 6; the number of meteorological station may be 1 in case the
study area falls in a single air shed having similar meteorological conditions and more in

iii
 case the study area falls in more than one air sheds; the number of surface water quality
stations will depend on the number of surface water bodies present in the study area and
likely to get polluted; the number of ground water stations may be at least 6 to 8; the
number of noise monitoring stations will depend upon the number of residential,
commercial and sensitive areas likely to get affected due to the noise from the plant
operation and its services facilities like transport; the number of soil monitoring stations
will be those agricultural lands where the dust fall from the plant is likely to be high; the
number of ecological monitoring stations will depend upon the number of ecologically
sensitive spots etc. Qualitative and quantitative models may be used to defend the
decision. However, these optimum figures are not statutory requirements and may change
from time to time as more scientific and credible information becomes available. These
must be presented in the ToR before costly monitoring exercise is started to save
repetitions. For details refer Annexure 4.
̇ How many samples are needed and during what period (sampling (averaging) time
and frequency)?
These are mostly governed by statutory stipulations made in the E(P) Act/ EIA
Notification/ EIA questionnaire. These must be presented in the ToR before costly
monitoring exercise is started to save repetitions. Generally, the sampling averaging time
must be compatible with the norms e.g., 24 hrs average for AAQ for
PM10/PM2.5/SO2/NO2/Pb/NH3 and 1hr. for O/CO twice a week for at least one full season
of 3 months except monsoon equally spaced. Annual base line data for
Benzene/Benzo(A)Pyrene/As and Ni as needed in the new AAQ monitoring notification
may not be possible at EIA stage and hence must be collected from secondary data if
available or during compliance monitoring. Met data should be hourly to be compatible
with dispersion models. Water samples should be grab or composite for flowing water
collected over the sampling period of one full season and ground water for pre and post
monsoon to give more representative data. LEQ noise should be collected on limited days
over 24 hours to obtain night time and day time values. Dust fall should be collected
monthly for 3 months of monitoring period. As work zone, stack, ecological and socio
economic monitoring are not much season oriented, they may be collected at the earliest.
For details refer Annexure 4.
̇ Where should the stations be located?
As described, the location should be the worst affected areas due to plant operation. As
such for AAQ monitoring, a qualitative or quantitative screening model may be used to
identify inhabited localities/ sensitive locations/ areas under surveillance with limited met
and emission data where GLC due to plant operation will be very high; for surface water
monitoring all static water bodies, upstream and down stream of flowing water bodies
from locations of probable discharges; all upstream and downstream ground water bodies
from probable locations of leaching possibilities (for this ground water contours of the
area should be pre determined); all ecologically sensitive areas;
residential/commercial/sensitive locations for noise monitoring; prime agricultural lands
for dust fall monitoring etc. In general, there must be a scientific basis for selecting
locations. These must be presented in the ToR before costly monitoring exercise is started
to save repetitions. For details refer Annexure 4.
̇ What kind of equipment should be used?
The CPCB guidelines describe such equipment and methods in details. In addition,
standard literatures/ handbooks like USEPA/APHA handbooks may be referred. For details
refer Annexure 4.
̇ What additional background information is needed?
− Published meteorological data from IMD’s nearest station

iv
 − topography from Survey of India/ satellite imageries
− population density from latest government publications
− emission sources and emission rates of plant proper/ other nearby plants affecting
study area
− effects and impacts
− ground water contours
− data on forest and ecology from forest department
− upper air data- primary or secondary
− any other secondary information
̇ How will the data be made available/communicated?
All raw data must be preserved. Adequate QA/QC may be followed. Summary data
may be included in the EIA.

v
 ANNEXURE VII
Guidance for Assessment of Baseline Components and Attributes
 GUIDANCE FOR ASSESSMENT OF BASELINE COMPONENTS AND ATTRIBUTES*

Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks

Network Frequency
A. Air
̇ Meteorological Minimum 1 site in the Min: 1 hrly observations Mechanical / automatic IS 5182 Part 1-20 Sit-specific primary
project impact area from continuous records weather station data is essential
̇ Wind speed
requirements Secondary data from IMD, New Delhi
̇ Wind direction
Rain gauge for the nearest IMD station
̇ Dry bulb temperature
Other additional site(s) are As per IMD
̇ Wet bulb temperature
require depending upon As per IMD
̇ Relative humidity the model applied or site
̇ Rainfall sensitivities
̇ Solar radiation
̇ Cloud cover
Pollutants 10 to 15 locations in the ̇ Gravimetric (High – Monitoring Network
̇ PM10 project impact area 24 hrly twice a week Volume with Cyclone) ̇ Minimum 2 locations in upwind
̇ PM 2.5 ̇ EPA Modified West & side, more sites in downwind side
̇ SO2 Gaeke method / impact zone
̇ NO2 ̇ Ultraviolet fluoroscence ̇ All the sensitive receptors need to
1 hrly twice a week ̇ Chemiluminescence be covered
̇ Pb
̇ TAEM Parameters/Frequency/Measurement
̇ NH3 Methods
Annual ̇ Beta attenuation
̇ CO As per CPCB standards for NAQM,
̇ O ̇ Arsenite Modified
1994/ GSR826E dt. Nov. 16, 2009
Jacob & Hochheiser
̇ Benzene
̇ NDIR technique
̇ BaP 24 hrly twice a week ̇ AAS/ICP
̇ As
̇ ED-XRF
̇ Ni
̇ GC
̇ H2S*
̇ Methylene-blue
̇ HC*
̇ Nessler’s Method
̇ Fluoride*
̇ Infra Red analyzer
̇ VOC-PAH*
̇ Specific lon meter

i
 Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
̇ Mercury*
(Parametres are given in GSR826E
dt. Nov. 16, 2009/ToR for EIA
studies based on nature of project,
raw material & process
technology, location-
nature/activities within of air)
B. Noise
Hourly equivalent noise levels Same as for Air Pollution At lest one day continuous Instrument : Sensitive Noise Min: IS: 4954- 1968 as adopted by
along with others in each season on a level meter (preferably CPCB
Identified in study area working and non-working recording type)
day
Hourly equivalent noise levels Inplant (1.5 m from Same as above for day and Instrument : Noise level CPCB / OSHA
machinery or high night metre
emission processes)
Hourly equivalent noise levels Highways (within 500 Same as above for day and Instrument : Noise level CPCB / IS : 4954-1968
metres from the road edge) night meter
C. Water
Parameters for water quality Set of grab samples during Diurnal and season-wise Samples for water quality
̇ Ph, temp, turbidity, pre and post- monsoon for should be collected and
magnesium hardness, total ground and during analyzed as per:
alkalinity, chloride, sulphate, monitoring season for IS: 2488 (Part 1-5) methods
nitrate, fluoride, sodium, surface water for the for sampling and testing of
potassium salinity whole study zone. For lab. industrial effluents
Analysis the samples
̇ Total nitrogen, total Standard methods for
should be preserved for
phosphorus, DO, BOD, COD, examination of water and
transport safe
Phenol waste water analysis
̇ Heavy metals published by American
Public Health Association.
̇ Total coliforms, faecal
coliforms International standard
practices for benthos and
̇ Phyto plankton
aquatic flora & fauna
̇ Zooplankton
̇ Fish & other aquatic flora &
ii
 Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
fauna
(parameters are given in ToR for
EIA studies based on nature of
project, raw material & process
technology, location-
nature/activities within of air
basin)
For Surface Water Bodies
̇ Total Carbon Monitoring locations Yield & impact on water Samples for water quality Historical data should be collected
̇ PH should include up-stream, sources to be measured should be collected and from relevant offices such as central
on site, down stream of during critical season analyzed as per: water commission, state and central
̇ Dissolved Oxygen
proposed discharge point. River Stretch within IS: 2488 (Part 1-5) methods ground water board, Irrigation dept.
̇ Biological Oxygen Besides sampling should project area be divided in for sampling and testing of
̇ Demand cover width of the river in grids (say 1 km length and industrial effluents
̇ Free NH4 case water quality 1/3 width) and samples Standard methods for
modeling is proposed. should be from each grid
̇ Boron examination of water and
Standard methodology for at a time when the wastewater analysis
̇ Sodium Absorption ratio collection of surface water wastewater discharged by published by American
̇ Electrical Conductivity (BIS standards) other sources of pollution Public Health Association.
At least one grab sample is expected to be
per location per season maximum
Parameters for wastewater characterization
̇ Temp, colour, odour, Implant Source depending Different operational Samples for water quality All plant sources categorized as:
turbidity, TSS, TDS upon the different waste cycles as well as raw should be collected and ̇ Different Process waste streams as
̇ PH , alkalinity as CaCO3, p streams the parameters can material variations should analyzed as per: well as run-off conditions
value, M value, tatal hardness be optimized be reflected in the analysis IS: 2488 (Part 1-5) methods ̇ ETP wastewater
as CaCO3, chloride as cl, Grab and composite for sampling and testing of
Domestic/ sanitary wastewater
sulphate as S04, Nitrate as sampling representing avg industrial effluents
NO3, Floride as F, Phosphate of different process
as P04, Chromium as Cr operations as well as worst
Standard methods for
(Hexavalent, total) emission scenario should
examination of water and
Ammonical Nitrogen as N, be represented
wastewater analysis
TKN, % sodium, BOD at 20
published by American
C, COD, DO, total residual
Public Health Association.
chlorine as Cl2, oil and grease,
iii
 Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
sulphide, phenolic compound

D. Land Environment
̇ Soil One surface sample from Season-wise Collected and analyzed as The purpose of impact assessment on
̇ Particle size distribution each landfill and/or per soil analysis reference soil (land environment) is to assess the
hazardous waste site (if books significant impacts due to leaching of
̇ Texture
applicable) and prime wastes or accidental releases and
̇ pH villages, (soil samples be contaminating
̇ Electrical conductivity collected as per BIS
̇ Caution exchange capacity specifications) in the study
area
̇ Alkali metals
̇ Sodium Absorption Ratio
(SAR)
̇ Permeability
̇ Porosity
Land use / Landscape
̇ Location code At least 20 points along Drainage once in the study ̇ Global positioning Drainage within the plant area and
̇ Total project area with plant boundary and period and land use system surrounding is very important for storm
general major land use categories from secondary ̇ Topo-sheets water impacts.
̇ Topography
categories in the study data (local maps) and From land use maps sensitive receptors
̇ Drainage (natural) ̇ Satellite Imageries
area. ` satellite imageries (forests, parks, mangroves etc.) can be
̇ Cultivated, forest plantations, ̇ (1:25,000)
identified
water bodies, roads and ̇ Satellite Imageries
settlements ̇ (1:25,000)
E. Solid Waste
Quantity: Process wise or activity Guidelines
̇ Based on waste generated wise for respective raw IS 9569 : 1980
from per unit production material used. Domestic
IS 10447 : 1983
waste depends upon the
̇ Per capita contribution IS 12625 : 1989
season also
̇ Collection, transport and IS 12647 : 1989
disposal system
IS 12662 (PTI) 1989
̇ Process waste

iv
 Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
̇ Quality (oily, chemical,
biological)
Quality: For green field unites it is Process wise or activity Analysis
̇ General segregation into based on secondary data wise for respective raw IS 9334 : 1979
biological/organic/inert/hazar base of earlier plants. material used. Domestic
IS 9235 : 1979
dous Grab and Composite waste depends upon the
season also IS 10158 : 1982
̇ Loss on heating samples
̇ pH
̇ Electrical Conductivity
̇ Calorific value, metals etc.
Hazardous Waste
̇ Permeability And porosity For green field unites it is Process wise or activity Analysis Impacts of hazardous waste should be
̇ Moisture pH based on secondary data wise for respective raw IS 9334 : 1979 performed critically depending on the
base of earlier plants material used. waste characteristics and place of
̇ Electrical conductivity IS 9235 : 1979
Grab and Composite discharge. For land disposal the
̇ Loss on ignition IS 10158 : 1982 guidelines should be followed and
samples. Recyclable
̇ Phosphorous components have to impacts of accidental releases should
̇ Total nitrogen analyzed for the recycling be assessed
̇ Caution exchange capacity requirements
̇ Particle size distribution
̇ Heavy metal
̇ Ansonia
̇ Fluoride
F. Biological Environment Aquatic
̇ Primary productivity Considering probable Season changes are very Standards techniques Seasonal sampling for aquatic biota
̇ Aquatic weeds impact, sampling points important (APHA et. Al. 1995, Rau One season for terrestrial biota, in
and number of samples to and Wooten 1980) to be addition to vegetation studies during
̇ Enumeration of
be decided on established followed for sampling and monsoon season
̇ phytoplankton, zooplankton guidelines on ecological measurement
and benthos Preliminary assessment
studies based on site eco-
̇ Fisheries environment setting within Microscopic analysis of plankton and
10/25 km radius from the meiobenthos, studies of macrofauna,
̇ Diversity indices
aquatic vegetation and application of
v
 Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
̇ Trophic levels proposed site indices, viz. Shannon, similarity,
̇ Rare and endangered species Samples to collect from dominance IVI etc
̇ Sanctuaries / closed areas / upstream and downstream Point quarter plot-less method (random
Coastal regulation zone of discharge point, nearby sampling) for terrestrial vegetation
(CRZ) tributaries at down stream, survey.
and also from dug wells
̇ Terrestrial
close to activity site
̇ Vegetation – species, list,
economic importance, forest
produce, medicinal value
̇ Importance value index (IVI)
of trees
̇ Wild animals
Avifauna For forest studies, chronic Secondary data to collect from
̇ Rare and endangered species as well as short-term Government offices, NGOs, published
impacts should be literature
̇ Sanctuaries / National park /
analyzed warranting data Plankton net
Biosphere reserve
on micro climate
Sediment dredge
conditions
Depth sampler
Microscope
Field binocular
G. Socio Economic
̇ Demographic structure Socio-economic survey is Different impacts occurs Primary data collection Secondary data from census records,
̇ Infrastructure resource base based on proportionate, during construction and through R&R surveys (if statistical hard books, toposheets,
stratified and random operational phases of the require) or community health records and relevant official
̇ Economic resource base
sampling method project survey are based on records available with Govt. agencies
̇ Health status: Morbidity personal interviews and
pattern questionnaire
̇ Cultural and aesthetic
attributes
* Project Specific concerned parameters needs to be identified by the project proponent and shall be incorporated in the draft ToR, to be submitted to the Authority for the
consideration and approval by the EAC/SEAC.

vi
 ANNEXURE VIII
Sources of Secondary Data
 Annexure VIIIA: Potential Sources of Data For EIA

Information Source
Air Environment
1. Meteorology- Temperature, Rainfall, Humidity, Indian Meteorology Department, Pune
Inversion, Seasonal Wind rose pattern (16 point
compass scale), cloud cover, wind speed, wind
direction, stability, mixing depth
2. Ambient Air Quality- 24 hourly concentration of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB),
SPM, RPM, SO2, NOx, CO State Pollution Control Board (SPCB),
Municipal Corporations
Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF)
State Department of Environment (DoEN)
Water Environment
3. Surface water- water sources, water flow (lean Central Water Commission (CWC),
season), water quality, water usage, Downstream Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB),
water users State Pollution Control Board (SPCB), Central Water
Command area development plan and Power Research Institute (CWPRS), Pune
Catchment treatment plan State Irrigation Department
Hydel Power generation organizations such as
NHPC, State SEBs
4. Ground Water- groundwater recharge Central Ground Water Board (CGWB)
rate/withdrawal rate, ground water potential Central Ground Water Authority (CGWA)
groundwater levels (pre monsoon, post monsoon), State Ground Water Board (SGWB)
ground water quality, changes observed in quality National Water Development Authority (NWDA)
and quantity of ground water in last 15 years
5. Coastal waters- water quality, tide and current data, Department of Ocean Development, New Delhi
bathymetry State Maritime Boards
Naval Hydrographer’s Office, Dehradun
Port Authorities
National Institute of Oceanography (NIO), Goa
Biological Environment
6. Description of Biological Environment- inventory District Gazetteers
of flora and fauna in 7 km radius, endemic species, National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
endangered species, Aquatic Fauna, Forest land, Hyderabad
forest type and density of vegetation, biosphere, Forest Survey of India, Dehradun
national parks, wild life sanctuaries, tiger reserve, Wildlife Institute of India
elephant reserve, turtle nesting ground, core zone World Wildlife Fund
of biosphere reserve, habitat of migratory birds, Zoological Survey of India
routes of migratory birds Botanical Survey of India
Bombay Natural History Society, (BNHS), Mumbai
State Forest Departments
State Fisheries Department
Ministry of Environment and Forests
State Agriculture Departments
State Agriculture Universities
Land Environment
7. Geographical Information-Latitude, Longitude, Toposheets of Survey of India, Pune
Elevation ( above MSL) National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
Hyderabad
Space Application Centre (SAC), Ahmedabad

REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 1

 Information Source
8. Nature of Terrain, topography map indicating Survey of India Toposheets
contours (1:2500 scale) National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
Hyderabad
State Remote Sensing Centre,
Space Application Centre (SAC), Ahmedabad
9. Hydrogeology- Hydrogeological report (in case of NRSA, Hyderbad
ground water is used/area is drought Survey of India Toposheets
prone/wastewater is likely to discharged on land) Geological Survey of India
Geomorphological analysis (topography and State Geology Departments
drainage pattern) State Irrigation Department
Geological analysis (Geological Department of Wasteland Development, Ministry of
Formations/Disturbances- geological and structural Rural Areas
maps, geomorphological contour maps, structural National Water Development Authority (NWDA)
features, including lineaments, fractures, faults and
joints)
Hydrogeological analysis (disposition of permeable
formations, surface-ground water links, hydraulic
parameter determination etc)
Analysis of the natural soil and water to assess
pollutant absorption capacity
10. Nature of Soil, permeability, erodibility Agriculture Universities
classification of the land State Agriculture Department
Indian Council for Agriculture Research
State Soil Conservation Departments
National Bureau of Soil Survey and Landuse Planning
Central Arid Zone Research Institute (CAZRI),
Jodhpur

11. Landuse in the project area and 10 km radius of the Survey of India- Toposheets
periphery of the project All India Soil and Landuse Survey; Delhi
National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
Hyderabad
Town and County Planning Organisation
State Urban Planning Department
Regional Planning Authorities (existing and proposed
plans)
Village Revenue Map- District Collectorate
Directorate of Economics and Statistics-State
Government
Space Application Centre, Ahmedabad

12. Coastal Regulation Zones- CRZMP, CRZ Urban Development Department

classification, Demarcation of HTL and LTL State Department of Environment
State Pollution Control Board
Space Application Centre*
Centre for Earth Sciences Studies,
Thiruvanthapuram*
Institute of Remote Sensing, Anna University
Chennai*
Naval Hydrographer’s Office, Dehradun*
National Institute of Oceanography, Goa*
National Institute of Ocean Technology, Chennai
Centre for Earth Science Studies

Agencies authorized for approval of demarcation of HTL and LTL

REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 2

 Information Source
Social
13. Socioeconomic - population, number of houses Census Department
and present occupation pattern within 7 km from District Gazetteers- State Government
the periphery of the project District Statistics- District Collectorate
International Institute of Population Sciences,
Mumbai (limited data)
Central Statistical Organisation
14. Monuments and heritage sites District Gazetteer
Archeological Survey of India,
INTACH
District Collectorate
Central and State Tourism Department
State Tribal and Social Welfare Department

Natural Disasters
15. Seismic data (Mining Projects)- zone no, no of Indian Meteorology Department, Pune
earthquakes and scale, impacts on life, property Geological Survey of India
existing mines
16. Landslide prone zone, geomorphological Space Application Centre
conditions, degree of susceptibility to mass
movement, major landslide history (frequency of
occurrence/decade), area affected, population
affected

17. Flood/cyclone/droughts- frequency of occurrence Natural Disaster Management Division in

per decade, area affected, population affected Department of Agriculture and Cooperation
Indian Meteorological Department
Industrial
18. Industrial Estates/Clusters, Growth Centres State Industrial Corporation
Industrial Associations
State Pollution Control Boards
Confederation Indian Industries (CII)
FICCI
19. Physical and Chemical properties of raw material Material and Safety Data Sheets
and chemicals (Industrial projects); fuel quality ENVIS database of Industrial Toxicological Research
Centre, Lucknow
Indian Institute Petroleum
20. Occupational Health and Industrial Hygiene- Central Labour Institute, Mumbai
major occupational health and safety hazards, Directorate of Industrial Safety
health and safety requirements, accident histories ENVIS Database of Industrial Toxicological Research
Centre, Lucknow
National Institute of Occupational Health,
Ahmedabad
21. Pollutant release inventories (Existing pollution Project proponents which have received EC and have
sources in area within 10 km radius) commenced operations

22. Water requirement (process, cooling water, DM EIA Reports

water, Dust suppression, drinking, green belt, fire National and International Benchmarks
service)

REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 3

 Annexure VIIIB: Summary of Available Data with Potential Data Sources for EIA

Agency Information Available

1. Archaeological Survey of India Inventory of monuments and sites of national importance- Listing and
Department of Culture documentation of monuments according to world heritage, pre
Government of India historic, proto historic and secular, religious places and forts
Janpath, New Delhi - 110011
[email protected]
2. Botanical Survey Of India Photodiversity documentation of flora at National, State and District
P-8, Brabourne Road Calcutta level and flora of protected areas, hotspots, fragile ecosystems, sacred
700001 groves etc
Tel#033 2424922 Identification of threatened species including endemics, their
Fax#033 2429330 mapping, population studies
Email: [email protected]. . Database related to medicinal plants, rare and threatened plant species
Red data book of Indian plants (Vol 1,2, and 3)
RO - Coimbatore, Pune, Jodhpur, Manual for roadside and avenue plantation in India
Dehradun, Allahabad, Gantok,
Itanagar, Port Blair
3. Bureau of Indian Standards Bureau of Indian Standards Committees on Earthquake Engineering
Manak Bhawan, 9 Bahadur Shah and Wind Engineering have a Seismic Zoning Map and the Wind
Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110 002 Velocity Map including cyclonic winds for the country
Tel#3230131, 3233375, 3239402 (10
lines)
Fax : 91 11 3234062, 3239399,
3239382
Email- [email protected]
4. Central Water Commission (CWC) Central Data Bank -Collection, collation and Publishing of
Sewa Bhawan, R.K.Puram Hydrological, Hydrometeorological, Sediment and Water Quality
New Delhi - 110066 data-.
[email protected] Basin wise Master Plans
Flood atlas for India
RO- Bangalore, Bhopal, Flood Management and Development and Operation of Flood
Bhubaneshwar, Chandigarh, Forecasting System- CWC operate a network of forecasting stations
Coimbatore/Chennai, Delhi, Over 6000 forecasts are issued every year with about 95% of the
Hyderabad, Lucknow, Nagpur, forecasts within the permissible limit.
Patna, Shillong, Siliguri and Water Year Books, Sediment Year Books and Water Quality Year
Vadodara Books.
Also actively involved in monitoring of 84 identified projects through
National, State and Project level Environmental Committees for
ensuring implementation of environmental safeguards
5. Central Ground Water Board surveys, exploration, monitoring of ground water development
(HO) N.H.IV, New CGO
Complex,
Faridabad - 121001
RO - Guwahati, Chandigarh,
Ahemadabad, Trivandrum,
Calcutta, Bhopal, Lucknow,
Banglore, Nagpur, Jammu,
Bhubneshwar, Raipur, Jaipur,
Chennai, Hyderabad, Patna

16
Based on web search and literature review

REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 4

6. Central Pollution Control Board National Air Quality Monitoring Programme
Parivesh Bhawan, CBD-cum-Office National River Water Quality Monitoring Programme- Global
Complex Environment Monitoring , MINARS
East Arjun Nagar, DELHI - 110 032 Zoning Atlas Programme
INDIA Information on 17 polluting category industries (inventory, category
E-mail : [email protected] wise distribution, compliance, implementation of pollution control
programmes
7. Central Arid Zone Research AGRIS database on all aspects of agriculture from 1975 to date
Institute, Jodhpur Also have cell on Agriculture Research Information System;
Working on ENVIS project on desertification
Email : [email protected] Repository of information on the state of natural resources and
desertification processes and their control
Regional Centre at Bhuj in Gujarat The spectrum of activities involves researches on basic resource
inventories; monitoring of desertification, rehabilitation and
management of degraded lands and other areas

8. Central Inland Capture Fisheries Data Base on

Research Institute, Barrackpore- Ecology and fisheries of major river systems of India.
743101, Biological features of commercially important riverine and estuarine
Tel#033-5600177 fish species.
Fax#033-5600388 Production functions and their interactions in floodplain wetlands.
Email : [email protected] Activities - Environmental Impact Assessment for Resource
Management ; Fisheries Resource surveys

9. Central Institute of Brackish Water Repository of information on brackish water fishery resources with
Aquaculture systematic database of coastal fishery resources for ARIS
141, Marshalls Road, Egmore , Agricultural Research Information System (ARIS) database covers
Chennai - 600 008, State wise data on soil and water quality parameters, land use pattern,
Tel# 044-8554866, 8554891, production and productivity trends,
Director (Per) 8554851 Social, economic and environmental impacts of aquaculture farming,
Fax#8554851, Guidelines and effluent standards for aquaculture farming

10. Central Marine Fisheries Research Assessing and monitoring of exploited and un-exploited fish stocks in
Institute (CMFRI), Cochin Indian EEZ
Monitoring the health of the coastal ecosystems, particularly the
endangered ecosystems in relation to artisanal fishing, mechanised
fishing and marine pollution
The institute has been collecting data on the catch and effort and
biological characteristics for nearly half a century based on
scientifically developed sampling scheme, covering all the maritime
States of the country
The voluminous data available with the institute is managed by the
National Marine Living Resources Data Centre (NMLRDC)

11. Central Water and Power Research Numerical and Physical models for hydro-dynamic simulations
Station, Pune
Tel#020-4391801-14; 4392511;
4392825

Fax #020-4392004,4390189
12. Central Institute of Road Transport, Repository of data on all aspects of performance of STUs and a host
Bhosari, Pune of other related road transport parameters
411 026, India.
Tel : +91 (20) 7125177, 7125292,
7125493, 7125494

REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 5

13. Department of Ocean Development Assessment of environment parameters and marine living resources
(primary and secondary) in Indian EEZ (Nodal Agency NIO Kochi)
Stock assessment, biology and resource mapping of deep sea shrimps,
lobsters and fishes in Indian EEZ (Nodal agency-Fisheries Survey of
India)
Investigations of toxical algal blooms and benthic productivity in
Indian EEZ (Nodal agency- Cochin University of Science and
technology)
Coastal Ocean Monitoring and Prediction System (COMAP) -
monitoring and modelling of marine pollution along entire Indian
coast and islands. Parameters monitored are temp, salinity, DO, pH,
SS, BOD, inorganic phosphate, nitrate, nitrite, ammonia, total
phosphorus, total nitrite, total organic carbon, petroleum
hydrocarbons, pathogenic vibros, pathogenic E.coli, shigella,
salmonella, heavy metals (Cd, Hg, Pb) and pesticide residues (DDT,
BHC, Endosulfan). Monitoring is carried out along the ecologically
sensitive zones and urban areas (NIO Mumbai- Apex coordinating
agency).
Sea Level Measurement Programe (SELMAM)- sea level measurement
at selected stations (Porbandar, Bombay, Goa, Cochin, Tuticorin,
Madras, Machilipatnam, Visakhapatnam, Paradeep, Calcutta and
Kavaratti (Lakshadweep Island)) along Indian coast and islands using
modern tide gauges
Detailed coastal maps through Survey of India showing contour at 1/2
a metre interval in the scale of 1:25000. (Nellore- Machhalipatnam work
already over)
Marine Data Centre (MDC) IMD for Ocean surface meteorology,
GSI for marine geology, SOI for tide levels, Naval Hydrographic
Office for bathymetry, NIO Goa for physical chemical and biological
oceanography, NIO Mumbai for marine pollution, CMFRI for
coastal fisheries, Institute of Ocean Management Madras for coastal
geomorphology
DOD has setup Indian National Centre for Ocean Information
Services (INCOIS) at Hyderabad for generation and dissemination of
ocean data products (near real time data products such as sea surface
temperature, potential fishing zones, upwelling zones, maps, eddies,
chlorophyll, suspended sediment load etc). MDC will be integrated
with INCOIS
Integrated Coastal and Marine Area Management (ICMAM)
programme - GIS based information system for management of 11
critical habitats namely Pichavaram, Karwar, Gulf of Mannar, Gulf of
Khambat, Gulf of Kutch, Malvan, Cochin, Coringa mangroves,
Gahirmata, Sunderbans and Kadamat (Lakshadeep)
Wetland maps for Tamil Nadu and Kerala showing the locations of
lagoons, backwaters, estuaries, mudflats etc (1:50000 scale)
Coral Reef Maps for Gulf of Kachch, Gulf of Mannar, Andaman and
Nicobar and Lakshadeep Islands (1:50,000 scale) indicating the
condition of corals, density etc
14. Environment Protection Training Environment Information Centre- has appointed EPTRI as the
and Research Institute Distributed Information Centre for the Eastern Ghats region of India.
Gachibowli, Hyderabad - 500 019, EIC Collaborates with the Stockholm Environment Institute Sweden
India Phone: +91-40-3001241, Database on Economics of Industrial Pollution Prevention in India
3001242, 3000489 Database of Large and Medium Scale Industries of Andhra Pradesh
Fax: +91-40- 3000361 Environmental Status of the Hyderabad Urban Agglomeration
E-mail: [email protected] Study on ‘water pollution-health linkages’ for a few Districts of A.P

REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 6

 Environment Quality Mapping
Macro level studies for six districts in the State of Andhra Pradesh
Micro level studies for two study zones presenting the permissible
pollutant load and scoping for new industrial categories
Zonation of the IDA, Parwada which helped APIIC to promote the
land for industrial development
Disaster management plan for Visakhapatnam Industrial Bowl Area

15. Forest Survey of India (FSI) State of Forest Report (Biannual)

Kaulagarh Road, P.O., IPE National Forest Vegetation Map (Biannual exercise) (on 1: 1 million
Dehradun - 248 195 scale)
Tel# 0135-756139, 755037, 754507 Thematic mapping on 1:50,000 scale depicting the forest type, species
Fax # 91-135-759104 composition, crown density of forest cover and other landuse National
E-Mail : [email protected] Basic Forest Inventory System
[email protected] Inventory survey of non forest area
Forest inventory report providing details of area estimates,
RO- Banglore, Calcutta, Nagpur topographic description, health of forest, ownership pattern,
and Shimla estimation of volume and other growth parameters such as height and
diameter in different types of forest, estimation of growth,
regeneration and mortality of important species, volume equation and
wood consumption of the area studied
16. Geological Survey of India Environmental hazards zonation mapping in mineral sector
27 Jawaharlal Nehru Road, Calcutta Codification of base line information of geo-environmental
700 016, India Telephone +91-33- appreciation of any terrain and related EIA and EMP studies
2496941 FAX 91-33-2496956 Lineament and geomorphological map of India on 1:20,000 scale.
[email protected] Photo-interpreted geological and structural maps of terrains with
limited field checks.

17. Indian Council of Agriculture A total of 80,000 profiles at 10 kms grid across the country were
Research, analyzed to characterize the soils of India.
Krishi Bhawan, New Delhi, Detailed soil maps of the Country (1:7 million), State (1:250,000) and
Tel#011-338206 districts map (1:50,000) depicting extent of degradation (1:4.4 millions)
have been prepared.
Thematic maps depicting soil depth, texture drainage, calcareousness,
− ICAR complex, Goa- Agro salinity, pH, slope and erosion have been published
metrology Agro-climate characterization of the country based on moisture,
− Central Arid Zone Research thermal and sunshine regimes
Institute- Agro forestry Agro-ecological zones (20) and sub-zones (60) for the country were
− Central Soil salinity Research delineated based on physiography, soils, climate, Length of Growing
Institute, Period and Available Water Content, and mapped on 1:4.4 million
− Indian Institute of Soil Science scale.
− Central Soil and Water Digitization of physiography and soil resource base on 1:50,000 scale
Conservation Research and for 14 States have been completed.
Training Institute .Soil fertility maps of N,P,K,S and Zn have also been developed
− National Bureau of Soil Survey Water quality guidelines for irrigation and naturally occurring
and Landuse Planning saline/sodic water
Calibration and verification of ground water models for predicting
water logging and salinity hazards in irrigation commands

18. Indian Bureau of Mines National mineral inventory for 61 minerals and mineral maps
Indira Bhawan, Civil Lines Nagpur Studies on environmental protection and pollution control in regard
Ph no - 0712-533 631, to the mining and mineral beneficiation operations
Fax- 0712-533 041 Collection, processing and storage of data on mines, minerals and
mineral-based industries, collection and maintenance of world mineral
intelligence, foreign mineral legislation and other related matters

REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 7

19. Indian Meteorology Department Meteorological data
Shivaji nagar, Pune 41100 Background air quality monitoring network under Global
Atmospheric Watch Programme (operates 10 stations)
RO- Mumbai, Chennai, Calcutta, Seismicity map, seismic zoning map; seismic occurrences and cyclone
New Delhi, Nagpur, Guwahati hazard monitoring; list of major earthquakes
Climatological Atlas of India , Rainfall Atlas of India and
Agroclimatic Atlas of India
Monthly bulletin of Climate Diagnostic Bulletin of India
Environmental Meteorological Unit of IMD at Delhi to provide
specific services to MoEF
20. INTACH Listing and documentation of heritage sites identified by
Natural Heritage, 71 Lodi Estate, New municipalities and local bodies (Listing excludes sites and buildings
Delhi-110 003 under the purview of the Archaeological Survey of India and the State
Departments of Archaeology)
Tel. 91-11-4645482, 4632267/9,
4631818, 4692774, 4641304 Fax : 91-
11-4611290
E-mail : [email protected]

21. Industrial Toxicology Research Activities include health survey on occupational diseases in industrial
Centre workers, air and water quality monitoring studies, ecotoxicological
Post Box No. 80, Mahatma Gandhi impact assessment, toxicity of chemicals, human health risk
Marg, Lucknow-226001, assessment
Phone: +91-522- Five databases on CD-ROM in the area of environmental toxicology
221856,213618,228227; Fax : +91- viz: TOXLINE, CHEMBANK, POISINDEX, POLTOX and
522 228227 PESTBANK. The Toxicology Information Centre provides
Email: [email protected] information on toxic chemicals including household chemicals
ENVIS centre and created a full-fledged computerized database
(DABTOC) on toxicity profiles of about 450 chemicals
22. Indian Institute of Forest Consultancy and research on joint forest management (Ford
Management Foundation, SIDA, GTZ, FAO etc)
Post Box No. 357, Nehru Nagar
Bhopal - 462 003
Phone # 0755-575716, 573799,
765125, 767851
Fax # 0755-572878

23. Indian Institute of Petroleum Fuel quality characterisation

Mohkampur , Dehradun, India, Emission factors
248005
0135- 660113 to 116
0135- 671986

24. Ministry of Environment and Survey of natural resources

Forest National river conservation directorate
Environmental research programme for eastern and western ghats
National natural resource management system
Wetlands conservation programme- survey, demarcation, mapping
landscape planning, hydrology for 20 identified wetlands National
wasteland identification programme

25. Mumbai Metropolitan Regional Mumbai Urban Transport Project

Development Authority Mumbai Urban Development Project
Mumbai Urban Rehabilitation Project
Information on MMR; statistics on councils and corporations Regional
Information Centre- Basic data on population, employment, industries
and other sectors are regularly collected and processed

REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 8

26. Municipal Corporation of Greater Air Quality Data for Mumbai Municipal Area
Mumbai Water quality of lakes used for water supply to Mumbai
27. Ministry of Urban Development Identification of hazard prone area
Disaster Mitigation and Vulnerability Atlas showing areas vulnerable to natural disasters
Vulnerability Atlas of India Land-use zoning and design guidelines for improving hazard resistant
construction of buildings and housing
Building Materials & Technology State wise hazard maps (on cyclone, floods and earthquakes)
Promotion Council
G-Wing,Nirman Bhavan, New
Delhi-110011
Tel: 91-11-3019367
Fax: 91-11-3010145
E-Mail: [email protected]
28. Natural Disaster Management Weekly situation reports on recent disasters, reports on droughts,
Division in Department of floods, cyclones and earthquakes
Agriculture and Cooperation
29. National Bureau Of Soil Survey & NBSS&LUP Library has been identified as sub centre of ARIC
Land Use Planning (ICAR) for input to AGRIS covering soil science literature generated
P.O. Box No. 426, Shankar Nagar in India
P.O., Nagpur-440010 Research in weathering and soil formation, soil morphology, soil
mineralogy, physicochemical characterisation, pedogenesis, and landscape-
Tel#91-712-534664,532438,534545 climate-soil relationship.
Fax#:91-712-522534 Soil Series of India- The soils are classified as per Soil Taxonomy. The
described soil series now belong to 17 States of the country.
RO- Nagpur, New Delhi, Banglore, Landuse planning- watershed management, land evaluation criteria, crop
Calcutta, Jorhat, Udaipur efficiency zoning
Soil Information system is developed state-wise at 1:250,000 scale.
Presently the soil maps of all the States are digitized, processed and
designed for final output both digital and hardcopy. The thematic layers
and interpreted layers of land evaluation (land capability, land
irrigability and crop suitability), Agro-Ecological Zones and soil
degradation themes are prepared.
Districts level information system is developed for about 15 districts at 1:
50, 000 scale. The soil information will be at soil series level in this system.
Soil resource inventory of States, districts water-sheds (1:250,000;
1:50,000; 1:10,000/8000)
30. National Institute of Ocean Waste load allocation in selected estuaries (Tapi estuary and Ennore
Technology, creek) is one the components under the Integrated Coastal and Marine
Velacherry-Tambaram main road Area Management (ICMAM) programme of the Department of
Narayanapuram Ocean Development ICMAM is conducted with an IDA based credit
Chennai, Tamil Nadu to the Government of India under the Environmental Capacity
Tel#91-44-2460063 / 2460064/ Building project of MoEF (waste assimilation capacity of Ennore
2460066/ 2460067 creek is over)
Fax#91-44-2460645 Physical oceanographic component of Coastal & Ocean monitoring
Predictive System (COMAPS) a long term monitoring program under
the Department of Ocean Development
Identification of suitable locations for disposal of dredge spoil using
mathematical models & environmental criteria
EIA Manual and EIA guidelines for port and harbour projects
31. National Institute of Oceanography, Coastal Ocean Monitoring and Predictions(COMAP)-Monitoring of
Goa coastal waters for physicochemical and biological parameters
including petroleum hydrocarbons, trace metals, heavy metals, and
RO- Mumbai, Kochi biomass of primary (phytoplankton) and secondary (zooplankton,
microbial and benthic organisms)
Marine Biodiversity of selected ecosystem along the West Coast of
India

REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 9

32. National Botanical Research Dust filtering potential of common avenue trees and roadside shrubs
Institute, has been determined, besides studies have also been conducted on
Post Box No 436 Rana Pratap Marg heavy-metals accumulation potential of aquatic plants supposedly
Lucknow- 226001, useful as indicators of heavy metal pollution in water bodies and
Tel: (+91) 522 271031-35 Fax: (+91) capable of reducing the toxic metals from water bodies.
522 282849, 282881 Assessment of bio-diversity of various regions of India
Lucknow
33. National Geophysical Research Exploration, assessment and management of ground water resources
Institute, Uppal Road, Hyderabad including ground water modelling and pollution studies
Telephone:0091-40-7171124,
FAX:0091-40-7171564
34. National Environmental National Air Quality Monitoring (NAQM) for CPCB
Engineering Research Institute, Database on cleaner technologies of industrial productions
Nagpur
RO- Mumbai, Delhi, Chennai,
Calcutta, Ahmedabad, Cochin,
Hyderabad, Kanpur
35. National Hydrology Institute, Basin studies, hydrometeorological network improvement,
Roorkee hydrological year book, hydrological modelling, regional flood
RO- Belgaum (Hard Rock Regional formulae, reservoir sedimentation studies, environmental hydrology,
Centre), Jammu (Western watershed development studies, tank studies, and drought studies.
Himalayan Regional Centre),
Guwahati (North Eastern Regional
Centre), Kakinada (Deltaic Regional
Centre), Patna (Ganga Plains North
Regional Centre), and Sagar (Ganga
Plains South)
36. National Institute Of Urban Affairs, Urban Statistics Handbook
India Habitat Centre, New Delhi
37. National Institute of Occupational epidemiological studies and surveillance of hazardous occupations
Health including air pollution, noise pollution, agricultural hazards, industrial
Meghaninagar, Ahmedabad hazards in organised sectors as well as small scale industries,
carcinogenesis, pesticide toxicology, etc
RO- Banglore, Calcutta WHO collaborative centre for occupational health for South East Asia
region and the lead institute for the international programme on
chemical safety under IPCS (WHO)
38. NRSA Data Centre Satellite data products (raw data, partially processed (radiometrically
Department of Space, Balanagar, corrected but geometrically uncorrected), standard data
(radiometrically and geometrically corrected), geocoded data(1:50,000
Hyderabad 500 037
and 1:25000 scale), special data products like mosaiced, merged and
Ph- 040-3078560 extracted) available on photographic (B?W and FCC in form of film of
3078664 240 mm X 240mm or enlargements/paper prints in scale varying
[email protected] between 1:1M and 1:12500 and size varying between 240mm and
1000mm) and digital media (CD-ROMs, 8 mm tapes)
39. Rajiv Gandhi National Drinking Database for groundwater using remote sensing technology (Regional
Water Mission Remote Sensing Service Centre involved in generation of ground
water prospect maps at 1:50,000 scale for the State of Kerala,
Karnataka, AP, MP and Rajasthan for RGNDWM)
40. Space Application Centre National Natural Resource Information System
Value Added Services Cell (VASC) Landuse mapping for coastal regulation zone (construction setback
Remote Sensing Application Area line) upto 1:12500 scale
Ahmedabad 380 053 Inventory of coastal wetlands, coral reefs, mangroves, seaweeds
079-676 1188 Monitoring and condition assessment of protected coastal areas

REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 10

 Fax- 079-6762735 Wetland mapping and inventory
Mapping of potential hotspots and zoning of environmental hazards
General geological and geomorphological mapping in diverse terrain
Landslide risk zonation for Tehre area
41. State Pollution Control Board State Air Quality Monitoring Programme
Inventory of polluting industries
Identification and authorization of hazardous waste generating
industries
Inventory of biomedical waste generating industries
Water quality monitoring of water bodies receiving wastewater
discharges
Inventory of air polluting industries
Industrial air pollution monitoring
Air consent, water consent, authorization, environment monitoring
reports
42. State Ground Water Board
43. Survey of India Topographical surveys on 1:250,000 scales, 1:50,000 and 1:25,000
scales
Digital Cartographical Data Base of topographical maps on scales
1:250,000 and 1:50,000
Data generation and its processing for redefinition of Indian Geodetic
Datum
Maintenance of National Tidal Data Centre and receiving/ processing
of tidal data of various ports.
Coastal mapping along the Eastern coast line has been in progress to
study the effect of submergence due to rise in sea-level and other
natural phenomenon. Ground surveys have been completed for the
proposed coastal region and maps are under printing.
District planning maps containing thematic information (135 maps)
have been printed out of 249 maps covering half the districts of India.
Districts planning maps for remaining half of the area are being
processed by National Atlas and Thematic Mapping Organisation
(NATMO)
44. Town and Country Planning Urban mapping - Thematic maps and graphic database on towns
Organisation (under progress in association with NRSA and State town planning
department)
45. Wildlife Institute of India Post Bag Provide information and advice on specific wildlife management
No. 18, Chandrabani Dehradun - problems.
248 001, Uttaranchal National Wildlife Database
Tel#0135 640111 -15,
Fax#0135 640117
email : wii@wii .
46. Zoological Survey of India Red Book for listing of endemic species
Prani Vigyan Bhawan Survey of faunal resources
'M' Block, New Alipore
Calcutta - 700 053
Phone # 91-33-4786893, 4783383
Fax # 91-33-786893
RO - Shillong, Pune, Dehradun,
Jabalpur, Jodhpur, Chennai, Patna,
Hyderabad, Canning, Behrampur,
Kozikode, Itanagar, Digha, Port
Bliar, Solan

REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 11

 ANNEXURE IX
Impact Prediction Tools
 Table 1: Choice of Models for Impact Prediction: Air Environment*

Model Application Remarks

ISCST 3 ̇ Appropriate for point, area and line ̇ Can take up to 99 sources
sources ̇ Computes concentration on 600
̇ Application for flat or rolling terrain receptors in Cartesian on polar
̇ Transport distance up to 50 km valid coordinate system
̇ Computes for 1 hr to annual averaging ̇ Can take receptor elevation
periods ̇ Requires source data, meteorological
and receptor data as input.
AERMOD with ̇ Settling and dry deposition of particles; ̇ Can take up to 99 sources
AERMET ̇ Building wake effects (excluding cavity ̇ Computes concentration on 600
region impacts); receptors in Cartesian on polar
̇ Point, area, line, and volume sources; coordinate system
̇ Plume rise as a function of downwind ̇ Can take receptor elevation
distance; ̇ Requires source data, meteorological
̇ Multiple point, area, line, or volume and receptor data as input.
sources;
̇ Limited terrain adjustment;
̇ Long-term and short-term averaging
modes;
̇ Rural or urban modes;
̇ Variable receptor grid density;
̇ Actual hourly meteorology data
PTMAX ̇ Screening model applicable for a single ̇ Require source characteristics
point source ̇ No met data required
̇ Computes maximum concentration and ̇ Used mainly for ambient air
distance of maximum concentration monitoring network design
occurrence as a function of wind speed
and stability class
PTDIS ̇ Screening model applicable for a single ̇ Require source characteristics
point source ̇ Average met data (wind speed,
̇ Computes maximum pollutant temperature, stability class etc.)
concentration and its occurrences for the required
prevailing meteorological conditions ̇ Used mainly to see likely impact of a
single source
MPTER ̇ Appropriate for point, area and line ̇ Can take 250 sources
sources applicable for flat or rolling ̇ Computes concentration at 180
terrain receptors up to 10 km
̇ Transport distance up to 50 km valid ̇ Requires source data, meteorological
̇ Computes for 1 hr to annual averaging data and receptor coordinates
periods
̇ Terrain adjustment is possible
CTDM PLUS ̇ Point source steady state model, can ̇ Can take maximum 40 Stacks and
(Complex estimate hrly average concentration in computes concentration at maximum
Terrain isolated hills/ array of hills 400 receptors
Dispersion ̇ Does not simulate calm met
Model) conditions
̇ Hill slopes are assumed not to
exceed 15 degrees
̇ Requires sources, met and terrain
characteristics and receptor details

i
 Model Application Remarks

UAM (Urban ̇ 3-D grid type numerical simulation model ̇

Airshed Model) ̇ Computes O3 concentration short term
episodic conditions lasting for 1 or 2 days
resulting from NOx and VOCs
̇ Appropriate for single urban area having
significant O3 problems
RAM (Rural ̇ Steady state Gaussian plume model for ̇ Suitable for flat terrains
Airshed Model) computing concentration of relatively ̇ Transport distance less than 50 km.
stable pollutants for 1 hr to 1 day
averaging time
̇ Application for point and area sources in
rural and urban setting
CRESTER ̇ Applicable for single point source either ̇ Can take up to 19 Stacks
in rural or urban setting simultaneously at a common site.
̇ Computes highest and second highest ̇ Unsuitable for cool and high velocity
concentration for 1hr, 3hr, 24hr and emissions
annual averaging times ̇ Do not account for tall buildings or
̇ Tabulates 50 highest concentration for topographic features
entire year for each averaging times ̇ Computes concentration at 180
receptor, circular wing at five
downwind ring distance 36 radials
̇ Require sources, and met data
OCD (Offshore ̇ It determines the impact of offshore ̇ Requires source emission data
and coastal emissions from point sources on the air ̇ Require hrly met data at offshore and
Dispersion quality of coastal regions onshore locations like water surface
Model) ̇ It incorporates overwater plume transport temperature; overwater air
and dispersion as well as changes that temperature; relative humidity etc.
occur as the plume crosses the shore line
̇ Most suitable for overwater sources shore
onshore receptors are below the lowest
shore height
FDM (Fugitive ̇ Suitable for emissions from fugitive dust ̇ Require dust source particle sizes
Dust Model) sources ̇ Source coordinates for area sources,
̇ Source may be point, area or line (up to source height and geographic details
121 source) ̇ Can compute concentration at max.
̇ Require particle size classification max. 1200 receptors
up to 20 sizes ̇ Require met data (wind direction,
̇ Computes concentrations for 1 hr, 3hr, speed, Temperature, mixing height
8hr, 24hr or annual average periods and stability class)
̇ Model do not include buoyant point
sources, hence no plume rise
algorithm
RTDM (Rough ̇ Estimates GLC is complex/rough (or flat) ̇ Can take up to 35 co-located point
Terrain terrain in the vicinity of one or more co- sources
Diffusion located point sources ̇ Require source data and hourly met
Model) ̇ Transport distance max. up to 15 km to up data
to 50 km ̇ Computes concentration at maximum
̇ Computes for 1 to 24 hr. or annual 400 receptors
ave5rage concentrations ̇ Suitable only for non reactive gases
̇ Do not include gravitational effects
or depletion mechanism such as rain/

ii
 Model Application Remarks
wash out, dry deposition
CDM(Climatolo ̇ It is a climatologically steady state GPM ̇ Suitable for point and area sources in
gically for determining long term (seasonal or urban region, flat terrain
annual) ̇ Valid for transport distance less than
Dispersion ̇ Arithmetic average pollutant 50 km
Model) concentration at any ground level receptor ̇ Long term averages: One month to
in an urban area one year or longer
PLUVUE-II ̇ Applicable to assess visibility impairment ̇ Require source characteristics, met
(Plume due to pollutants emitted from well data and receptor coordinates &
Visibility defined point sources elevation
Model) ̇ It is used to calculate visual range ̇ Require atmospheric aerosols (back
reduction and atmospheric discoloration ground & emitted) characteristics,
caused by plumes like density, particle size
̇ It predicts transport, atmospheric ̇ Require background pollutant
diffusion, chemical, conversion, optical concentration of SO4, NO3, NOx,
effects, and surface deposition of point NO2, O3, SO2 and deposition
source emissions. velocities of SO2, NO2 and aerosols
MESO-PUFF II ̇ It is a Gaussian, Variable trajectory, puff ̇ Can model five pollutants
(Meso scale superposition model designed to account simultaneously (SO2, SO4, NOx,
Puff Model) fro spatial and temporal variations in HNO3 and NO3)
transport, diffusion, chemical ̇ Require source characteristics
transformation and removal mechanism ̇ Can take 20 point sources or 5 area
encountered on regional scale. source
̇ Plume is modeled as a series of discrete ̇ For area source – location, effective
puffs and each puff is transported height, initial puff size, emission is
independently required
̇ Appropriate for point and area sources in ̇ Computes pollutant concentration at
urban areas max. 180 discrete receptors and 1600
̇ Regional scale model. (40 x 40) grided receptors
̇ Require hourly surface data
including cloud cover and twice a
day upper air data (pressure, temp,
height, wind speed, direction)
̇ Do not include gravitational effects
or depletion mechanism such as rain/
wash out, dry deposition

Table 2: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Noise Environment*

Model Application

FHWA (Federal Highway Noise Impact due to vehicular movement on highways

Administration)
Dhwani For predictions of impact due to group of noise sources in the
industrial complex (multiple sound sources)
Hemispherical sound wave propagation Fore predictive impact due to single noise source
Air Port For predictive impact of traffic on airport and rail road

iii
 Table 3: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Land Environment*

Model Application Remarks

Digital Analysis Techniques Provides land use / land cover

distribution
Ranking analysis for soil Provides suitability criteria Various parameters viz. depth, texture,
suitability criteria for developmental slope, erosion status, geomorphology,
conversation activities flooding hazards, GW potential, land
use etc., are used.

Table 4: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Water Environment

Model Application Remarks

QUAL-II E Wind effect is insignificant, vertical dispersive effects Steady state or dynamic
insignificant applicable to streams model
Data required
Deoxygenation coefficients, re-aeration coefficients for
carbonaceous, nitrogenous and benthic substances,
dissolved oxygen deficit
The model is found excellent to generate water quality
parameters
Photosynthetic and respiration rate of suspended and
attached algae
Parameters measured up to 15 component can be
simulated in any combination, e.g. ammonia, nitrite,
nitrate, phosphorous, carbonaceous BOD, benthic
oxygen demand, DO, coliforms, conservative
substances and temperature
DOSAG-3, USEPA: Water quality simulation model for streams & canal Steady-state
(1-D) RECEIV – II, A general Water quality model
USEPA

Explore –I, USEPA A river basin water quality model Dynamic, Simple
hydrodynamics
HSPE, USEPA Hydrologic simulation model Dynamic, Simple
hydrodynamics
RECEIVE-II, A general dynamic planning model for water quality
USEPA management
Stanford watershed This model simulates stream flows once historic
model precipitation data are supplied
The major components of the hydrologic cycle are
modeled including interception, surface detention,
overland inflow, groundwater, evapo-transpiration and
routing of channel flows, temperature, TDS, DO,
carbonaceous BOD coliforms, algae, zooplanktons,
nitrite, nitrate, ammonia, phosphate and conservative

iv
Model Application Remarks
substances can be simulated
Hydrocomp model Long-term meteorological and wastewater Time dependant
characterization data is used to simulate stream flows (Dynamic)
and stream water quality
Stormwater Runoff is modeled from overland flow, through surface Time Dependent
Management model channels, and through sewer network Both combined
(SWMM) and separate sewers can be modeled.
This model also enables to simulate water quality
effects to stormwater or combined sewer discharges.
This model simulates runoff resulting from individual
rainfall events.
Battelle Reservoir Water body is divided into segments along the Two Dimensional multi-
model direction of the flow and each segment is divided into segment model
number of horizontal layers. The model is found to
generate excellent simulation of temperature and good
prediction of water quality parameters.
The model simulates temperature, DO, total and
benthic BOD, phytoplankton, zooplankton, organic and
inorganic nitrogen, phosphorous, coliform bacteria,
toxic substances and hydrodynamic conditions.
TIDEP (Turbulent Horizontal temperature homogeneity Coefficient of Steady state model
diffusion vertical turbulent diffusion constant for charge of area
temperature model with depth negligible coefficient of thermal exchange
reservoirs) constant
Data required wind speed, air temperature, air
humidity, net incoming radiation, surface water
temperature, heat exchange coefficients and vertical
turbulent diffusion coefficients.
BIOLAKE Model estimates potential fish harvest from a take Steady state model
Estuary models/ It is simulates tides, currents, and discharge in shallow, Dynamic model
estuarial Dynamic vertically mixed estuaries excited by ocean tides,
model hydrologic influx, and wind action
Tides, currents in estuary are simulated
Dynamic Water It simulates the mass transport of either conservative or Dynamic model
Quality Model non-conservative quality constituents utilizing
information derived from the hydrodynamic model
Bay-Delta model is the programme generally used.
Up to 10 independent quality parameters of either
conservative or non-conservative type plus the BOD-
DO coupled relationship can be handled
HEC -2 To compute water surface profiles for stead7y,
gradually: varying flow in both prismatic & non-
prismatic channels
SMS Lake circulation, salt water intrusion, surface water Surface water Modeling
profile simulation model system Hydrodynamic
model
RMA2 To compute flow velocities and water surface Hydrodynamic analysis

v
Model Application Remarks
elevations model
RMA4 Solves advective-diffusion equations to model up to six Constituent transport
non-interacting constituents model
SED2D-WES Model simulates transport of sediment Sediment transport
model
HIVEL2D Model supports subcritical and supercritical flow A 2-dimensional
analysis hydrodynamic model
MIKE-II, DHI Model supports, simulations of flows, water quality, Professional Engineering
and sediment transport in estuaries, rives, irrigation software package
systems, channels & other water bodies

Table 5: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Biological Environment*

Name Relevance Applications Remarks

Flora
Sample plot Density and relative Average number of individuals The quadrant sampling
methods density species per unit area technique is applicable in all
types of plant communities
and for the study of
Density and relative Relative degree to which a species
submerged, sessile (attached
dominance predominates a community by its
at the base) or sedentary
sheer numbers, size bulk or
plants
biomass
Frequency and Plant dispersion over an area or Commonly accepted plot
relative frequency within a community size:
importance value 0.1 m2- mosses, lichens &
other mat-like plants
Average of relative density, 0.1 m2- herbaceous
relative dominance and relative vegetation including grasses
frequency
10.20 m2 – for shrubs and
saplings up to 3m tall, and
100 m2 – for tree
communities
Transects & Cover Ratio of total amount of line This methods allows for rapid
line intercepted by each species and assessment of vegetation
intercepts total length of the line intercept transition zones, and requires
methods given its cover minimum time or equipment
of establish
Relative dominance It is the ratio of total individuals of Two or more vegetation strata
a species and total individuals of can be sampled
all species simultaneously
Plot-less Mean point plant Mean point – plant distance Vegetation measurements are
sampling Mean area per plant determined from points rather
methods than being determined in an
Mean area per plant

vi
 Name Relevance Applications Remarks
area with boundaries
Density and relative Method is used in grass-land
density and open shrub and tree
communities
Dominance and It allows more rapid and
relative dominance extensive sampling than the
plot method
Importance value Point- quarter method is
commonly used in woods and
forests.
Fauna
Species list Animal species list List of animal communities Animal species lists present
methods observed directly common and scientific names
of the species involved so
that the faunal resources of
the area are catalogued
Direct Animal species list List of animals communities This method involves
Contact observed directly collection, study and release
Methods of animals

Count Drive counts Observation of animals Count indices provide

indices by driving them past trained estimates of animal
methods observers populations and are obtained
Temporal counts
(Roadside from signs, calls or trailside
and aerial counts or roadside counts
count
methods)
Call counts Count of all animals passing a These estimates, through they
fixed point during some stated do not provide absolute
interval of time population numbers, Provide
an index of the various
species in an area
Such indices allow
comparisons through the
seasons or between sites or
habitats
Removal Population size Number of species captured Removal methods are used to
methods obtain population estimates
of small mammals, such as,
rodents through baited snap
traps
Market Population size Number of species originally It involves capturing a
capture estimate marked (T) portion of the population and
methods (M) Number of marked animals at some later date sampling
recaptured (t) and total number of the ratio of marked to total
animals captured during census (n) animals caught in the
population
N = nT/t

vii
 Table 6: Choice of Models for Impact Predictions: Socio-economic Environment*

Relevance

Name Application Remarks

Extrapolative A prediction is made that is consistent with past

Methods and present socio-economic data, e.g. a
prediction based on the linear extrapolation of
current trends
Intuitive Delphi technique is used to determine Conjecture Brainstorming Heuristic
Forecasting environmental priorities and also to make programming Delphi consensus
(Delphi intuitive predictions through the process of
techniques) achieving group consensus
Trend Predictions may be obtained by extrapolating Trend breakthrough precursor
extrapolation present trends Not an accurate method of events correlation and regression
and correlation making socio-economic forecasts, because a
time series cannot be interpreted or extrapolated
very far into the future with out some knowledge
of the underlying physical, biological, and social
factors
Metaphors and The experience gained else where is used to Growth historical simulation
analogies predict the socio-economic impacts commonsense forecasts
Scenarios Scenarios are common-sense forecasts of data. Common-sense
Each scenario is logically constructed on model
of a potential future for which the degrees of
“confidence” as to progression and outcome
remain undefined
Dynamic Model predicts net economic gain to the society
modeling after considering all inputs required for
(Input- Out conversion of raw materials along with cost of
model) finished product
Normative Desired socio-economic goals are specified and Morphological analysis technology
Methods an attempt is made to project the social scanning contextual mapping
environment backward in time to the present to - functional array
examine whether existing or planned resources
- graphic method
and environmental programmes are adequate to
meet the goals Mission networks and functional
arrays decision trees & relevance
trees matrix methods scenarios
* NOTE: (i) If a project proponent prefer to use any model other than listed, can do so, with prior
concurrence of concerned appraisal committee. (ii) Project-specific proposed prediction tools need to be
identified by the project proponent and shall be incorporated in the draft ToR to be submitted to the
Authority for the consideration and approval by the concerned EAC/SEAC.

viii
 ANNEXURE X
Form through which the State Governments/Administration of
the Union Territories Submit Nominations for SEIAA and SEAC
for the Consideration and Notification by the
Central Government
 1 Name (in block letters)
2 Address for communication

3 Age & Date of Birth

(Shall be less than 67 years for the members
and 72 years for the Chairman)
4 Area of Expertise (As per
Appendix VI)
Professional Qualifications Qualification(s) University Year of Percentage of
(As per Appendix VI) passing marks

6 Work experience Position Years of association Nature of work. If

From to Period in required, attach
(High light relevant experience years separate sheets
as per Appendix VI)

Serving Central / State Government Office? Yes/No

Engaged in industry or their associations? Yes/No
Present position and nature of Associated with environmental activism? Yes/No
7
job
If no is the answer for above three, please
specify the present position and name of the
organization
Whether experienced in the Yes/No.
8 process of prior environmental If yes, please specify the experience in a separate sheet (Please restrict to
clearance? 500 words)
Yes/ No
Whether any out-standing
9 If yes, please provide details in a separate sheet (Please restrict to 500
expertise has been acquired?
words).
10 Any other relevant information? May like to attach separate sheets (Research projects, consultancy projects,
publications, memberships in associations, trainings undergone,
international exposure cum experience etc.)

The Government of……………………is pleased to forward the Nomination of Dr./Sh.

…………………...…. for the position of Chairperson / Member / Secretary of the SEIAA / SEAC / EAC
to the Ministry of Environment & Forests, the Government of India for the Notification.

(Authorized Signature with Seal)

 ANNEXURE XI
Composition of EAC/SEAC
 Composition of the EAC/SEAC

The Members of the EAC shall be Experts with the requisite expertise and experience in the
following fields /disciplines. In the event that persons fulfilling the criteria of “Experts” are not
available, Professionals in the same field with sufficient experience may be considered:

̇ Environment Quality Experts: Experts in measurement/monitoring, analysis and

interpretation of data in relation to environmental quality
̇ Sectoral Experts in Project Management: Experts in Project Management or Management of
Process/Operations/Facilities in the relevant sectors.
̇ Environmental Impact Assessment Process Experts: Experts in conducting and carrying out
Environmental Impact Assessments (EIAs) and preparation of Environmental Management
Plans (EMPs) and other Management plans and who have wide expertise and knowledge of
predictive techniques and tools used in the EIA process
̇ Risk Assessment Experts
̇ Life Science Experts in floral and faunal management
̇ Forestry and Wildlife Experts
̇ Environmental Economics Expert with experience in project appraisal

i
___________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE XII
Best Practices & Latest Technologies available and reference
 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Media Pathways Comment

cases, it will be necessary to
estimate the combined dosage.

EAF and induction furnace plant emissions or rejects (gaseous, solid & hazardous as well
as liquid effluents) can cause damage to human health, aquatic and terrestrial ecology as
well as material due to various exposure routes (pathways). For example adverse effects
of EAF and induction furnace plants on human health could be direct impact of noxious
gases on the organism and/or indirect impact via the food chain and changes in the
environment. Especially in connection with high levels of fine particulates, noxious gases
like SO2 and NOx can lead to respiratory diseases. SO2 and NOx can have health-
impairing effects even at concentrations below those of 2009 AAQ (24 hours avg.)
standard of 80 µg/m3 for SO2 and NOx. The duration of exposure is decisive. Injurious
heavy metals (e.g., lead, mercury and cadmium) can enter the food chain and thus, the
humans through drinking water/vegetables/animal products. Climatic changes such as
warming and acidification of surface waters, forest depletion may occur due to acid rain
and/or the greenhouse effect of CO2 and other trace gases can have long-term detrimental
effects on human health. Similarly important are the effects of climatic changes on
agriculture and forestry (and thus on people’s standard of living), e.g., large-scale shifts of
cultivation to other regions and/or deterioration of crop yields due to climate change
impacts. Hence, the construction and operation of EAF as well as the induction furnace
plants can have both socio-economic and socio-cultural consequences. Appropriate
preparatory studies, gender-specific and otherwise, are therefore required, and the state of
medical services within the project area must be clarified in advance. Besides, noise
pollution generated from turbines is an important source of Occupational exposure, has
direct effects on humans and animals.

3.4 Technological Aspects

3.4.1 Cleaner technologies

Steel melting in EAF or induction furnace uses large quantities of raw materials, energy
and water. As with any industry, these need to be managed well in order to maximize
productivity and profits. As such, improving energy and resource efficiency should be
approached from several directions. A strong corporate-wide energy and resource
management program is essential. While process technologies described in Section 3.2
present well-documented opportunities for improvement, equally important is fine-tuning
the production process, sometimes producing even greater savings. In section 3.3.1, are
some measures concerning these and other general crosscutting utilities that apply to this
industry.

3.4.1.1 DC arc furnace with water cooled furnace wall

Large energy saving is achieved in an EAF, which melts and refines ferrous materials
such as steel scrap, by changing its power source from conventional three-phase AC to
DC using a central electrode at top and bottom. The principle and mechanism are:

̇ it can melt materials uniformly

̇ the metal is melted and agitated by the electric current flowing through it and the
magnetic field

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-28 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

̇ by adopting water cooled furnace wall, high efficiency operation is achievable

Energy Saving

̇ Specific power consumption is reduced by 5 to 10%

̇ Furnace maintenance materials are reduced
̇ Specific electrode consumption is reduced by 40 to 50%
Observations

DC arc furnaces are being used sparingly in Indian steel plants in place of AC arc
furnaces, although energy efficient. ESSAR Steel in India is operating with DC-EAFs.
The reasons of low penetration are as follows:

̇ High maintenance requirements

̇ DC electrical equipments are critical in nature; moreover erosion of bottom electrode
is fast
̇ Investment cost is high and technology know-how is not easily available
̇ Grid has to be strengthened to absorb high surge
3.4.1.2 High frequency melting furnace

It is a melting furnace for steel such as stainless steel, cast steel, nickel, other alloy steel
(by direct melting method); copper, brass, aluminum, noble metals and other non-ferrous
metals (by indirect melting method in which carbon or metallic crucibles are used). The
principles and mechanism are:

̇ frequency and power are selected

̇ high frequency induction current, with enhanced current density which is 2 to 5 times
higher than that of low frequency method, is generated. The current generates heat by
internal resistance of the material, and performs melting

̇ steel and alloy steel are melted by resistance heat generated by the induction current
that flows in steel itself

̇ non-ferrous metals and nonmetals are heated and melted by conduction heat from
induction heating elements such as graphite and metallic crucibles

Table 3-11 below compares a high frequency melting furnace with a low frequency
melting furnace:

Table 3-11: Comparison of High and Low Frequency Melting Furnaces

Low Frequency Melting Furnace High Frequency Melting Furnace

Cannot perform rapid melting because the Can rapidly melt small-sized materials. This is
electric current density needs to be because high frequency current can penetrate
maintained low in view of the agitating deeper, and eddy current is generated even in small
force. As it is difficult to inject electric sized materials
power to small-sized materials, melting
takes longer time.
Batch type intermittent operation needs a Batch type intermittent operation is possible. A
starting block or heel starting block or heel is not needed;

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-29 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Low Frequency Melting Furnace High Frequency Melting Furnace

The equipment cost is lower than that of a As it needs a high frequency power source; the
high frequency furnace. equipment cost is higher than that of a low
frequency furnace.
With high frequency current, larger electric power
can be applied, and rapid melting is possible. As
radiation heat loss is small, energy is saved

Energy saving

̇ Saving of specific power consumption for 3 T furnace : 12.3%

̇ Melting speed for a 3 T furnace (kg/h): Increase by 19.5%
̇ Electricity 750 kW for low frequency furnace but 1500 kW for high frequency
furnace.
Observations

̇ High frequency melting furnace has inherent advantage of high melting rate of scrap
leading to improved furnace productivity. This also increases the production capacity
of the shop and reduces specific cost of production.

̇ Many of the induction furnace operators in India are engaged in production of various
types of cast irons/steels/special quality products. Adopting high frequency melting
furnaces through technology transfers would be quite beneficial from energy-saving-
point which reduces specific energy costs and improves bottom line.

3.4.1.3 Channel type induction furnace for cast iron melting

Induction furnaces are of two types: crucible type and channel type. Recently the channel
type is more widely used because of its higher overall heat efficiency. A crucible type
furnace was conventionally used for melting cast iron, using coke or low frequency non-
iron core induction as a heat source. The current trend is to perform continuous operation
and save energy using a channel type low frequency furnace. The comparison is given in
Table 3-12 and Table 3-13.

Table 3-12: Comparison of Crucible and Channel Type of Induction Furnace

Crucible Type Induction Furnace Channel Type Induction Furnace

The assembly of this type consists of a A closed channel furnace comprises a cylindrical
crucible within a water-cooled copper coil shaft, made of sheet iron and lined with refractory
and a framework on supports arranged for materials, and a bottom block which is enclosed in a
tilting during pouring. The primary detachable cast shell. An inductor is placed in the
circuit is formed by the coil, and the central portion of the iron core in hole provided in
secondary circuit is the crucible or, rather, the bottom block. The metal that fills a narrow
the charge in it. The lines of magnetic channel in the bottom block is heated by the
force link through the charge and induce induced current. After being placed into the shaft,
eddy current in it, and the later generates the charge is melted owing to the intensive
heat. circulation of molten metal.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-30 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Table 3-13: Comparison of Energy Saving between Crucible and Channel Type

Item Crucible Type Channel Type

Power efficiency 60% - 80% 95% - 97%

Overall efficiency 55% – 65% 75% - 85%
Specific power consumption High Low
Need of heel Not needed Needed
Intermittent operation Arbitrarily possible Principally two shift or
continuous operation

3.4.1.4 Ferroalloys Furnace for effective energy utilization

The electric furnace for smelting HC-FeCr (high carbon ferrochromium) refines
chromium ore using coke as a reducing agent. However, as the ratio of fine chromium
ore increased in recent years, permeability in the electric furnace decreased, and specific
consumption of electric power and coke increased. The system described here reduces
energy consumption for producing HC-FeCr, and recovers the combustible gas.

When fine chromium ore is agglomerated and calcined into pellets by an annular furnace,
and the pellets are charged into the EAF in place of fine chromium ore, permeability in
the furnace increases, which increases the heat exchange rate among charge materials,
and decreases specific power consumption. Exhaust gas from the furnace is used as fuel
of the burner for pellet calcinations. Excess gas is converted to steam for internal use.

Energy saving

̇ Electric power, etc.,

̇ Reduction in crude oil e.g., when applied to 7 EAFs of more than 1000 kVA each,
reduction in crude oil eq is 80,000 t/y.

3.4.1.5 Oxy-fuel burners/lancing

Oxy-fuel burners/lancing can be installed in EAFs to reduce electricity consumption by

substituting electricity with oxygen and hydrocarbon fuels. They reduce total energy
consumption because of:

̇ Reduced heat times, which save 2-3 kWh/tonne/min of holding time

̇ Increased heat transfer during the refining period
̇ Facilitates slag foaming, which increases efficiency of oxygen usage and injected
carbon
Care must be taken to use oxy-fuel burners correctly, otherwise there is the risk that total
energy consumption and greenhouse gases will increase.

Energy saving

̇ Electricity savings of 0.14 GJ/tonne crude steel, typical savings range from 2.5 to 4.4
kWh per Nm3 oxygen injection with common injection rates of 18 Nm3/t.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-31 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

̇ Natural gas injection is 10 scf/kWh (0.3 m3/kWh) with typical savings of 20 to 40

kWh/T

̇ Retrofit Capital Costs of $4.80/T crude steel on an EAF of 110 tonnes

̇ Improved heat distribution leads to reduced tap-to-tap times of about 6%, leading to
estimated annual cost savings of $4.0/T

̇ Reduction of nitrogen content of the steel, leading to improved product quality

3.4.1.6 Scrap preheating

Scrap preheating is a technology that can reduce the power consumption of EAFs through
from using the waste heat of the furnace to preheat the scrap charge. Old (bucket)
preheating systems had various problems, e.g., emissions, high handling costs, and a
relatively low heat recovery rate. Modern systems have reduced these problems and are
highly efficient. The energy savings depend on the preheat temperature of the scrap.
Various systems have been developed and are in use at various sites in the U.S. and
Europe, i.e., Consteel tunnel-type preheater, Fuchs Finger Shaft, and Fuchs Twin Shaft.
All systems can be applied to new constructions, and also to retrofit existing plants.

A. Tunnel furnace - CONSTEEL process

The Consteel process consists of a conveyor belt with the scrap going through a tunnel,
down to the EAF through a “hot heel”. Various U.S. plants have installed a Consteel
process, as well as one plant in Japan.

Energy/Environment/Cost/Other Benefits Consteel process:

̇ Productivity increase of 33%

̇ Reduced electrode consumption of 40%
̇ Reduced dust emissions
̇ Electricity savings estimated to be 60 kWh/t for retrofits
̇ Annual operating cost savings of $1.90/t crude steel (including productivity increase,
reduced electrode consumption, and increased yield)
̇ Retrofit Capital Costs $4.4 to $5.5/t ($2M for a capacity of 400,000 to 500,000 t/year)
B. Post consumption shaft furnace (FUCHS)

The FUCHS shaft furnace consists of a vertical shaft that channels the off-gases to
preheat the scrap. The scrap can be fed continuously or through a so-called system of
‘fingers’. The optimal recovery system is the ‘double shaft’ furnace, which can only be
applied for new construction. The Fuchs-systems make almost 100% scrap preheating
possible, leading to potential energy savings of 100-120 kWh/t. Carbon monoxide and
oxygen concentrations should be well controlled to reduce the danger of explosions, as
happened at one plant in the U.S.

Energy saving

̇ Electricity savings of 120 kWh/t and fuel increases of 0.7 GJ/t

̇ Annual operating cost savings of $4.5/t (excluding saved electricity costs)
̇ Retrofit Capital Costs of about $6/t crude steel for and existing 100 t furnace

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-32 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

̇ Reduced electrode consumption

̇ Yield improvement of 0.25-2%
̇ Up to 20% productivity increase
̇ 25% reduced flue gas dust emissions (reducing hazardous waste handling costs)
3.4.1.7 Electrochemical dezincing

Dezincing of steel scrap improves recycling process. This electrochemical dezincing

process provides an environmental friendly, economic method of removing zinc from
steel scrap to reuse both the steel and zinc. With the use of zinc coated prompt scrap
increasing, steelmakers are feeling the effect of increased contaminant loads on their
operations. The greatest concerns are the cost of treatment before disposal of waste dusts
and the water associated with remelting zinc coated scrap.

The process consists of two basic steps:

̇ dissolving the zinc coating from scrap in a hot, caustic solution, and

̇ recovering the zinc from the solution electrolytically.

Through a galvanic process, the zinc is removed from the steel and is in solution as
sodium zincate ions rather than zinc dust. The steel is then rinsed with water and ready for
reuse. Impurities are removed from the zinc solution, and then a voltage is applied in
order to grow metallic zinc via an oxidation reduction reaction. All waste streams in this
process are reused.

Benefits

̇ Pollution Reduction – Removal of zinc decreases steelmaking dust released to the air
as well as pollutants in wastewater streams. The process itself does not consume any
chemicals (other than drag out losses) and produces only a small amount of waste.

̇ Productivity – Removing zinc prior to processing of scrap saves time and money in
disposal of waste dusts and water. Without the zinc, this high quality scrap does not
require extra handling, blending, or sorting for remelting in steelmaking furnaces.

3.4.1.8 Divided blast cupola

Divided blast cupola (DBC) is a well-proven technology for improving the energy
performance at a modest investment. A DBC supplies blast air to the cupola furnace at
two levels through a double row of tuyeres almost equally divided between the top and
bottom row of tuyeres, and the spacing between the tuyeres is about one metre apart,
irrespective of the diameter of the cupola. Some comparative advantages of a DBC, as
found in studies conducted by BCIRA, are given below:

̇ a higher metal tapping temperature (approximately 45-50oC more) and higher carbon
pick-up (approximately 0.06%) are obtained for a given charge-coke consumption
̇ charge-coke consumption is reduced by 20-32% and the melting rate is increased
by11-23%, while maintaining the same metal tapping temperature
However, in the initial survey conducted at Agra and Howrah foundry clusters, it was
found that conventional cupolas are commonly used by Indian foundry units and DBCs,
where ever adopted, are of sub-optimal designs. Hence the intervention aims to

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-33 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

demonstrate and disseminate the benefits of a well - designed DBC among Indian
foundries.

TERI's DBC design

TERI's DBC design incorporates the specific melting requirements of the individual
foundry unit. Salient features of the cupola design include:

̇ Optimum selection of blower specifications (quantity and pressure)

̇ Optimum ratio of the air delivered to the top and bottom tuyers
̇ Minimum pressure drop and turbulence of the combustion air
̇ Separate wind-belts for top and bottom tuyeres
̇ Correct tuyere area, tuyere number and distance between the two rows of tuyeres
̇ Optimum well capacity
̇ Higher stack height
̇ Mechanical charging system
̇ Stringent material specifications

Energy savings and other benefits

A demonstration plant was installed at Bharat Engineering Works, Howrah, a unit

nominated by the Indian Foundry Association (IFA). The foundry, manufacturing ingot
moulds, had a charge coke percentage of 13.6 % (coke:metal :: 1:7.5) which was brought
down to 8 % (coke:metal :: 1:12.5). Hence, the energy saving achieved in the new plant
was about 40 % compared to their earlier cupola. On an average monthly melting of 430
tonnes, the yearly saving in coke is 270 tonnes which is equivalent to Rs. 8 lakh.

Additionally there was an increase in metal tapping temperature and reduction in silicon
and manganese losses.

Energy saving of about 40 % was achieved in a replication unit setup at a foundry unit in
Nagpur which makes thin-walled sanitary castings. The charge coke consumption
reduced from 22 % (coke:metal :: 1:4.5) earlier to about 13 % (coke:metal :: 1: 7.7). This
translates to a coke saving of 280 tonnes per annum (TPA) worth about Rs. 11 lakh on a
melting of 300 tonnes per month in the foundry. The total capital investment of the
cupola, inclusive of civil work, platforms, bucket charging system etc., was about Rs. 12
lakhs. Thus the payback on the investment is one year considering savings in coke only.
Additional benefits of DBC were – better analytical and temperature control of molten
metal leading to substantial reduction in rejection of finished castings. The payback is
more attractive, if the decrease in rejection rate of finished casting on account of better
analytical and temperature control is considered

3.4.2 Pollution control technologies

3.4.2.1 EAF

In EAF operation, scarp, reduced iron and now-a-days hot metal is charged from the top
into a refractory and water panel lined chamber. Swing roof, which is also lined with
TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-34 August 2010
 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

refractory and water-cooled panel, is placed over the chamber. Through the roof three
graphite electrodes are placed and connected to a powerful AC transformer which
supplies the power necessary to melt the charge using high power arc discharge. The
fume generated during the operation is aspirated through the fourth hole in the roof by
creating a vacuum of about 1.5 to 2.5 mm H2O inside the EAF casing, which is known as
primary air. In-leakage air enters the casing through door openings, gaps of electrode
holes, chute, etc. and decarburizes carbon. Additional oxygen may be supplied for
complete decarburization of charge. The air rich in CO at a temperature of around
1700oC then passes through double-walled water-cooled elbow. Additional air is
aspirated to combust balance CO to CO2 from elbow gap. Hot gases are cooled through a
water-cooled duct to around 550-600oC and then by a forced draft cooler before entering
the bag filter at 120 – 130oC. If needed, additional air is sucked to the system. The bag
filter is normally pulse jet type. Wet scrubbers were used earlier.

During charging, considerable amount of fugitive emissions arise which may be sucked
through roof mounted canopy of adequate size. The quantity of suction air may be 10-15
times more than that of the primary air. This air may be added to the gas collection
system through a mixing chamber, which also serves as a spark arrester, to cool the gases
and taken to the bag filter to avoid installation of additional bag filter system. The canopy
hood needs to suck less air during melting when the roof is closed and can be manipulated
by a damper.

In many cases, especially in case of smaller capacity furnaces and high alloy steel making
furnaces, where a small positive pressure is required in the furnace to create reducing
condition, it would be advantageous to control the emissions by means of a side draft
hood placed above the furnace roof or only by a roof mounted canopy, though its
effectiveness is less. If the EAF is provided with a ladle refining unit, gases may be
sucked from the refining ladle through a water-cooled duct and connected to the same
system at mixing chamber.

The dust from the bag filter unit and mixing chamber is conveyed to a dust silo by
mechanical or pneumatic conveying system. The dust is processed through a pug mill or
pelletized before its final disposal/reuse. Dust recycling in the rotary hearth furnace
(RHF) was applied at Nippon Steel’s Kimitsu Works in 2000. The dust and sludge, in
case of wet cleaning, along with iron oxide and carbon, are agglomerated into shaped
articles and the iron oxide is reduced at high temperatures. Zinc and other impurities in
the dust and sludge are expelled and exhausted into off-gas. Asahi Kyogyo in June 2007
used RHF to recycle 10,000 TPA EAF dust to EAF as DRI. So far, the EAF dust and slag
are not being recycled or utilized in any way in the Indian steel works. These two by-
products are being dumped. There is pressure from the regulatory body for alternate use
of EAF dust as these are hazardous in nature. Pelletising of EAF dust is generally not
practiced in Indian Electric Furnace steel making.

3.4.2.2 Induction furnace

From the description of pollution potential from induction furnaces, it may be observed
that volume, quantity and harmful emission of solid and gaseous contaminants are fairly
low as compared to EAF. The equipment need not be as elaborate as EAF so as to make
it cost-effective for small-scale induction furnace units. At the same time, the pollutants
emitted should be in conformity to regulations. The steps involved are: extraction of
fumes; cleaning by cyclone separator; further cleaning of finer particulates in wet
scrubber; and then allowing clean gases to pass to the environment. The last step is
disposal of solid matter left as sludge or dust.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-35 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

3.4.2.3 Cupola furnace

Emission reduction efforts include the use of bag houses, venturi scrubber, wet scrubbers,
and afterburners to reduce particulates, CO and VOCs in cupola off-gases. Fabric filters
are most effective in controlling cupola emissions, reducing manganese emissions from
250,000 to 300 mg/Mg. High energy scrubbers, impingement scrubbers and wet caps are
used with less favorable results. Use of gas for heat and graphite for carbon may reduce
emissions due to coke, which contributes to organics and trace inorganics.

The venturi scrubber is a highly efficient device for removing particulate matter and
sulphur dioxide from stack gases. Since cupola stack gases contain a significant
percentage of fine particulates, it was found that a venturi scrubber was the most effective
device to bring down the emissions below the more stringent PEL of 150 mg/Nm³. Lime
dosing can be done to maintain the pH of the recirculating water and reduce SO2.

SPM and sulphur dioxide of the outlet gas from the pollution control device was
measured which was installed at a foundry in Howrah. The SPM was found to be about
50 mg/Nm3 and sulphur dioxide was measured to be about 40 mg/Nm3.

Low cost wet scrubber dust emission control

National Productivity Council, Chennai has conducted a detailed investigation of the

emissions from the cupola furnaces at Coimbatore. A low-cost wet scrubber system was
designed and implemented by the units to control the dust emissions. It is a simple
fabricate and install online process. No operator attention is necessary for scrubber
operation. A water spray wet scrubber is designed concurrent to gas flow rate at the exit
of the cupola furnace (Figure 3-9). The natural draft created (300oC – 400oC) by the
cupola furnace is sufficient to draw the gases through the scrubber and there is no
additional ID fan is necessary. A set of water spray nozzles scrub the dust laden gases.
However to create additional draft to the cooled gases to discharge into atmosphere, an
extended stack of diameter 1.0 ft and 6 ft high is installed at the exit of the scrubber. The
scrubber water is collected in a sump to allow settling and separate the sludge and the
clear water is re-circulated to the scrubber by 1HP centrifugal pump. Periodically the
settled sludge is collected dried and disposed.

The water loss due to evaporation and along with sludge is about 5 m3 for 8 hours
operation of cupola. The operating cost is only the power consumption by the
recirculating pump, which is about < 10 units per day. The cost of the system is about Rs
70,000/- to Rs 80,000/-.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-36 August 2010

 Induction/Electric Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry

Scrubber at top

Figure 3-9: Low Cost Scrubber

Performance efficiency of the wet scrubber

The performance efficiency of the scrubber was assessed by collecting stack emission
dust samples from the sampling port provided at the extended stack. Following are the
emission monitoring results:

Table 3-12: Emission Monitoring Results

S. Parameter Designed Measured Emission Standard

No values values by TNPCB

1 Flow rate of gases, 3000 2,300 -

Nm3/hr
2 Dust emissions after the < 150 47 150
scrubber, mg/Nm3
3 Sulphur dioxide 300 - 400 < 50 -
concentration, mg/Nm3

3.5 Summary of Applicable National Regulatory Requirements

3.5.1 General description of major statutes

Government of India has published specific regulations and norms for the induction and
electric arc furnace, submerged arc furnace and cupola in the Environmental (Protection)
Rules, 1986 and its amendments. Detailed list is provided as Annexure I.

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry 3-37 August 2010

 REFERENCES
Documents

̇ Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI – “Environment Impact Assessment Notification”

S.O.1533 dated 14th September 2006.

̇ Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI – “Environment Impact Assessment Notification

2006 – Amendment” S.O. 195 (E) dated 1st December, 2009.

̇ Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI – Charter on Corporate Responsibility for

Environment Protection Action Points for 17 Categories of Industries, CPCB, March 2003.

̇ Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI – Environment (Protection) Act,

̇ Larry W. Canter, “Environmental Impact Assessment”, Second Edition, McGraw Hill,

University of Oklahoma, 1997.

̇ European Commission - Integrated Pollution Prevention and Control (IPPC): Best

Available Techniques Reference Document on the Production of Iron and Steel December
2001.

̇ International Association for Impact Assessment – “Principles of Environmental Impact

Assessment Best Practice”, Institute of Environmental Assessment, UK.

̇ International Finance Corporation – “Environmental, Health and Safety Guidelines for

Integrated Steel Mills”, World Bank Group, April 30, 2007.

̇ World Bank Group – “Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook on Coke

Manufacturing” effective July 1998.

̇ World Bank Group – “Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook on Copper smelting”
effective July 1998.

̇ World Bank Group – “Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook on Aluminum

Manufacturing” effective July 1998.

̇ World Bank Group – “Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook on Iron and Steel
Manufacturing” effective July 1998.

̇ World Bank Group – “Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook on Lead and Zinc
Smelting” effective July 1998.

̇ World Bank Group – “Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook on Mini steel Mills”
effective July 1998.

̇ World Bank Group – “Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook on Nickel Smelting
and Refining” effective July 1998.

̇ World Bank Group – “Environmental, Health and Safety Guidelines, Base Metal Smelting
and Refining, April 30, 2007
TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010
 ̇ A Text Book of Metallurgy, A.R.Baily, MacMilan and Company Limited, 1967

̇ “Added Value Long Steel Products produced at MSSA Newcastle Works” – V. Scholtz, D.S.
Magudulela, F. van Zyl, A. Coetzee, A. Humpel, C. Hill, and A.J. Potgieter.

̇ Air Pollution Engineering Manual (Environmental Engineering) – by Anthony J.

Buonicore (Hardcover - Jun 1992)

̇ Coke Production For Blast Furnace Ironmaking – By Hardarshan S. Valia, Scientist, Ispat
Inland Inc

̇ Dust and Fume Generation in the Iron and Steel Industry, S.Andonyev et.al., Mir
Publisher, Moscow,1978

̇ Egyptian Environmental Affairs Agency (EEAA) Egyptian Pollution Abatement Project

(EPAP) – “Self-Monitoring Manual Secondary Metallurgical Industry: by Dr. Mohamed
Abdel Hamid El Refaai Faculty of Engineering – Al Azhar University.

̇ Environmental and Waste Management in Metallurgical Industries, NML, Jamshedpur,

February 1996.

̇ General Metallurgy, N. Sevryukov et.al., Mir Publishers, Moscow,1969

̇ JPC Bulletin on Iron & Steel (JPC), Ministry of Steel, Government of India, January 2007
& June 2008

̇ Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency – “ Environmental Guidelines for Coke

Manufacturing”

̇ National Seminar on Environmental Pollution and Control in Secondary Steel Sector,

NISST, New Delhi, 1996

̇ Products and by-products of Coal – By Edger stansfield

̇ Sector Notebook Project, USEPA; SIC Code 333-334, September 1995.

̇ State-of-the-Art Clean Technologies (SOACT) for Steel Making Handbook, Asia Pacific
Partnership On Clean Development And Climate (APPCD), December 2007

̇ Technological Development in Metallurgical Industries, Focus: Iron Making and Steel

Making, MECON, September 2007

̇ T.K.Mukherjee, Processing of Secondary Resources for Sustainable Development in the

Metallurgical Industry, IIM Presidential Address, 2004.

̇ Environmental Management System Implementation Guide for the Electric Arc Furnace
Iron & Steel Industry: Sector Strategies Program of the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA).

̇ Environmental Management System Guide: Steel Manufacturers Association

̇ Environmental Impact Assessment of Thai Iron and Steel Factory: International

Conference on Sustainable Architectural Design and Urban Planning, Hanoi Architectural
University (Vietnam), 2007.
TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010
Websites

̇ http://beta.deq.virginia.gov/export/sites/default/air/pdf/airregs/448.pdf

̇ http://dsp-psd.pwgsc.gc.ca/Collection/C45-2-3-2000-2E.pdf

̇ http://ecm.ncms.org/ERI/new/IRRironsteel.htm#issues

̇ http://envfor.nic.in/divisions/iass/eia.htm

̇ http://gisserver.nic.in/ecprocess/ECProcess/10.htm

̇ http://www.bhamrails.info/index.htm

̇ http://www.cfriindia.nic.in/

̇ http://www.cpcb.nic.in/

̇ http://www.epa.gov/

̇ http://www.epa.gov/ttn/chief/ap42/ch12/

̇ http://www.epa.gov/ttnchie1/ap42/ch12/index.html

̇ http://www.epa.gov/Compliance/resources/publications/assistance/sectors/notebooks/nonferro
us.html

̇ http://www.iaia.org

̇ http://www.minsocam.org/MSA/collectors_corner/article/oremin.htm

̇ http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/etools/leadsmelter/index.html

̇ http://www.scribd.com/doc/7278475/Sponge-Iron-Report

̇ www.wikipedia.org

̇ www.epa.gov/sectors

TGM for Induction/Arc/Cupola Furnaces Industry August 2010

 IL&FS Ecosmart Limited
Flat # 408, Saptagiri Towers
Begumpet
Hyderabad – 500 016
Ph: + 91 40 40163016
Fax: + 91 40 40032220
For any queries or technical inputs kindly mail:
[email protected]
[email protected]